X Version 11, Release 7.7
X Toolkit Intrinsics Version 1.2.0
XWindow System is a trademark of X Consortium, Inc.
Copyright © 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1991, 1994 X Consortium
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE X CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X Consortium.
Copyright © 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1991, 1994 Digital Equipment Corporation, Maynard, Massachusetts.
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of Digital not be used in in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. Digital makes no representations about the suitability of the software described herein for any purpose. It is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty.
This update to the X11 Intrinsics drops support for K&R C, as well as improving its use of Standard C features, notably const.
Matt Dew did the initial conversion of this specification from nroff to DocBook.
Later, I expanded on that, improving the formatting, as well as updating the function prototypes in the specification as well as the related manual pages.
Matthieu Herrb modified the Intrinsics header files to drop support for K&R C, leaving the Standard C prototypes.
Later, he applied my changes to complete the conversion of the library source from a mixture of K&R C and Standard C to just use the standard language features.
Others (including Alan Coopersmith, Gaetan Nadon, Walter Harms, and Kevin E. Martin) have worked to maintain the library's build-scripts and documentation.
Thomas E. Dickey
invisible-island.net
April 2019
The design of the X11 Intrinsics was done primarily by Joel McCormack of Digital WSL. Major contributions to the design and implementation also were done by Charles Haynes, Mike Chow, and Paul Asente of Digital WSL. Additional contributors to the design and/or implementation were:
Loretta Guarino-Reid (Digital WSL) | Rich Hyde (Digital WSL) |
Susan Angebranndt (Digital WSL) | Terry Weissman (Digital WSL) |
Mary Larson (Digital UEG) | Mark Manasse (Digital SRC) |
Jim Gettys (Digital SRC) | Leo Treggiari (Digital SDT) |
Ralph Swick (Project Athena and Digital ERP) | Mark Ackerman (Project Athena) |
Ron Newman (Project Athena) | Bob Scheifler (MIT LCS) |
The contributors to the X10 toolkit also deserve mention. Although the X11 Intrinsics present an entirely different programming style, they borrow heavily from the implicit and explicit concepts in the X10 toolkit.
The design and implementation of the X10 Intrinsics were done by:
Terry Weissman (Digital WSL) |
Smokey Wallace (Digital WSL) |
Phil Karlton (Digital WSL) |
Charles Haynes (Digital WSL) |
Frank Hall (HP) |
The design and implementation of the X10 toolkit’s sample widgets were by the above, as well as by:
Ram Rao (Digital UEG) |
Mary Larson (Digital UEG) |
Mike Gancarz (Digital UEG) |
Kathleen Langone (Digital UEG) |
These widgets provided a checklist of requirements that we had to address in the X11 Intrinsics.
Thanks go to Al Mento of Digital’s UEG Documentation Group for formatting and generally improving this document and to John Ousterhout of Berkeley for extensively reviewing early drafts of it.
Finally, a special thanks to Mike Chow, whose extensive performance analysis of the X10 toolkit provided the justification to redesign it entirely for X11.
Joel McCormack
Western Software Laboratory
Digital Equipment Corporation
March 1988
The current design of the Intrinsics has benefited greatly from the input of several dedicated reviewers in the membership of the X Consortium. In addition to those already mentioned, the following individuals have dedicated significant time to suggesting improvements to the Intrinsics:
Steve Pitschke (Stellar) | C. Doug Blewett (AT&T) |
Bob Miller (HP) | David Schiferl (Tektronix) |
Fred Taft (HP) | Michael Squires (Sequent) |
Marcel Meth (AT&T) | Jim Fulton (MIT) |
Mike Collins (Digital) | Kerry Kimbrough (Texas Instruments) |
Scott McGregor (Digital) | Phil Karlton (Digital) |
Julian Payne (ESS) | Jacques Davy (Bull) |
Gabriel Beged-Dov (HP) | Glenn Widener (Tektronix) |
Thanks go to each of them for the countless hours spent reviewing drafts and code.
Ralph R. Swick
External Research Group
Digital Equipment Corporation
MIT Project Athena
June 1988
From Release 3 to Release 4, several new members joined the design team. We greatly appreciate the thoughtful comments, suggestions, lengthy discussions, and in some cases implementation code contributed by each of the following:
Don Alecci (AT&T) | Ellis Cohen (OSF) |
Donna Converse (MIT) | Clive Feather (IXI) |
Nayeem Islam (Sun) | Dana Laursen (HP) |
Keith Packard (MIT) | Chris Peterson (MIT) |
Richard Probst (Sun) | Larry Cable (Sun) |
In Release 5, the effort to define the internationalization additions was headed by Bill McMahon of Hewlett Packard and Frank Rojas of IBM. This has been an educational process for many of us, and Bill and Frank’s tutelage has carried us through. Vania Joloboff of the OSF also contributed to the internationalization additions. The implementation efforts of Bill, Gabe Beged-Dov, and especially Donna Converse for this release are also gratefully acknowledged.
Ralph R. Swick
December 1989
and
July 1991
The Release 6 Intrinsics is a result of the collaborative efforts of participants in the X Consortium’s intrinsics working group. A few individuals contributed substantial design proposals, participated in lengthy discussions, reviewed final specifications, and in most cases, were also responsible for sections of the implementation. They deserve recognition and thanks for their major contributions:
Paul Asente (Adobe) | Larry Cable (SunSoft) |
Ellis Cohen (OSF) | Daniel Dardailler (OSF) |
Vania Joloboff (OSF) | Kaleb Keithley (X Consortium) |
Courtney Loomis (HP) | Douglas Rand (OSF) |
Bob Scheifler (X Consortium) | Ajay Vohra (SunSoft) |
Many others analyzed designs, offered useful comments and suggestions, and participated in a significant subset of the process. The following people deserve thanks for their contributions: Andy Bovingdon, Sam Chang, Chris Craig, George Erwin-Grotsky, Keith Edwards, Clive Feather, Stephen Gildea, Dan Heller, Steve Humphrey, David Kaelbling, Jaime Lau, Rob Lembree, Stuart Marks, Beth Mynatt, Tom Paquin, Chris Peterson, Kamesh Ramakrishna, Tom Rodriguez, Jim VanGilder, Will Walker, and Mike Wexler.
I am especially grateful to two of my colleagues: Ralph Swick for expert editorial guidance, and Kaleb Keithley for leadership in the implementation and the specification work.
Donna Converse
X Consortium
April 1994
Table of Contents
X Toolkit Intrinsics — C Language Interface is intended to be read by both application programmers who will use one or more of the many widget sets built with the Intrinsics and by widget programmers who will use the Intrinsics to build widgets for one of the widget sets. Not all the information in this manual, however, applies to both audiences. That is, because the application programmer is likely to use only a number of the Intrinsics functions in writing an application and because the widget programmer is likely to use many more, if not all, of the Intrinsics functions in building a widget, an attempt has been made to highlight those areas of information that are deemed to be of special interest for the application programmer. (It is assumed the widget programmer will have to be familiar with all the information.) Therefore, all entries in the table of contents that are printed in bold indicate the information that should be of special interest to an application programmer.
It is also assumed that, as application programmers become more familiar with the concepts discussed in this manual, they will find it more convenient to implement portions of their applications as special-purpose or custom widgets. It is possible, nonetheless, to use widgets without knowing how to build them.
This document uses the following conventions:
Global symbols are printed in this special font
. These can be either
function names, symbols defined in include files, data types, or structure names. Arguments to
functions, procedures, or macros are printed in italics.
Each function is introduced by a general discussion that distinguishes it from other functions. The function declaration itself follows, and each argument is specifically explained. General discussion of the function, if any is required, follows the arguments.
To eliminate any ambiguity between those arguments that you pass and those that a function returns to you, the explanations for all arguments that you pass start with the word specifies or, in the case of multiple arguments, the word specify. The explanations for all arguments that are returned to you start with the word returns or, in the case of multiple arguments, the word return.
Table of Contents
The Intrinsics are a programming library tailored to the special requirements of user interface construction within a network window system, specifically the X Window System. The Intrinsics and a widget set make up an X Toolkit.
The Intrinsics provide the base mechanism necessary to build a wide variety of interoperating widget sets and application environments. The Intrinsics are a layer on top of Xlib, the C Library X Interface. They extend the fundamental abstractions provided by the X Window System while still remaining independent of any particular user interface policy or style.
The Intrinsics use object-oriented programming techniques to supply a consistent architecture for constructing and composing user interface components, known as widgets. This allows programmers to extend a widget set in new ways, either by deriving new widgets from existing ones (subclassing) or by writing entirely new widgets following the established conventions.
When the Intrinsics were first conceived, the root of the object hierarchy was a widget class named Core. In Release 4 of the Intrinsics, three nonwidget superclasses were added above Core. These superclasses are described in Chapter 12, Nonwidget Objects. The name of the class now at the root of the Intrinsics class hierarchy is Object. The remainder of this specification refers uniformly to widgets and Core as if they were the base class for all Intrinsics operations. The argument descriptions for each Intrinsics procedure and Chapter 12, Nonwidget Objects describe which operations are defined for the nonwidget superclasses of Core. The reader may determine by context whether a specific reference to widget actually means “widget” or “object.”
The Intrinsics are intended to be used for two programming purposes. Programmers writing widgets will be using most of the facilities provided by the Intrinsics to construct user interface components from the simple, such as buttons and scrollbars, to the complex, such as control panels and property sheets. Application programmers will use a much smaller subset of the Intrinsics procedures in combination with one or more sets of widgets to construct and present complete user interfaces on an X display. The Intrinsics programming interfaces primarily intended for application use are designed to be callable from most procedural programming languages. Therefore, most arguments are passed by reference rather than by value. The interfaces primarily intended for widget programmers are expected to be used principally from the C language. In these cases, the usual C programming conventions apply. In this specification, the term client refers to any module, widget, or application that calls an Intrinsics procedure.
Applications that use the Intrinsics mechanisms
must include the header files
<X11/Intrinsic.h>
and
<X11/StringDefs.h>
,
or their equivalent,
and they may also include
<X11/Xatoms.h>
and
<X11/Shell.h>
.
In addition, widget implementations should include
<X11/IntrinsicP.h>
instead of
<X11/Intrinsic.h>
.
The applications must also include the additional header files for
each widget class that they are to use (for example,
<X11/Xaw/Label.h>
or
<X11/Xaw/Scrollbar.h>).
On a POSIX-based system,
the Intrinsics object library file is named
libXt.a
and is usually referenced as -lXt when linking the application.
All functions defined in this specification except those specified below may be implemented as C macros with arguments. C applications may use “#undef” to remove a macro definition and ensure that the actual function is referenced. Any such macro will expand to a single expression that has the same precedence as a function call and that evaluates each of its arguments exactly once, fully protected by parentheses, so that arbitrary expressions may be used as arguments.
The following symbols are macros that do not have function
equivalents and that may expand their arguments in a manner other
than that described above:
XtCheckSubclass
,
XtNew
,
XtNumber
,
XtOffsetOf
,
XtOffset
,
and
XtSetArg
.
The fundamental abstraction and data type of the X Toolkit is the widget, which is a combination of an X window and its associated input and display semantics and which is dynamically allocated and contains state information. Some widgets display information (for example, text or graphics), and others are merely containers for other widgets (for example, a menu box). Some widgets are output-only and do not react to pointer or keyboard input, and others change their display in response to input and can invoke functions that an application has attached to them.
Every widget belongs to exactly one widget class, which is statically allocated and initialized and which contains the operations allowable on widgets of that class. Logically, a widget class is the procedures and data associated with all widgets belonging to that class. These procedures and data can be inherited by subclasses. Physically, a widget class is a pointer to a structure. The contents of this structure are constant for all widgets of the widget class but will vary from class to class. (Here, “constant” means the class structure is initialized at compile time and never changed, except for a one-time class initialization and in-place compilation of resource lists, which takes place when the first widget of the class or subclass is created.) For further information, see the section called “Creating Widgets”
The distribution of the declarations and code for a new widget class among a public .h file for application programmer use, a private .h file for widget programmer use, and the implementation .c file is described in the section called “Widget Classing” The predefined widget classes adhere to these conventions.
A widget instance is composed of two parts:
A data structure which contains instance-specific values.
A class structure which contains information that is applicable to all widgets of that class.
Much of the input/output of a widget (for example, fonts, colors, sizes, or border widths) is customizable by users.
This chapter discusses the base widget classes, Core, Composite, and Constraint, and ends with a discussion of widget classing.
The
Core
widget class contains the definitions of fields common to all widgets.
All widgets classes are subclasses of the
Core class,
which is defined by the
CoreClassPart
and
CorePart
structures.
All widget classes contain the fields defined in the
CoreClassPart
structure.
typedef struct { WidgetClass superclass; See Widget Classing String class_name; See Resource Management Cardinal widget_size; See Widget Classing XtProc class_initialize; See Widget Classing XtWidgetClassProc class_part_initialize; See Widget Classing XtEnum class_inited; See Widget Classing XtInitProc initialize; See Creating Widgets XtArgsProc initialize_hook; See Creating Widgets XtRealizeProc realize; See Realizing Widgets XtActionList actions; See Translation Management Cardinal num_actions; See Translation Management XtResourceList resources; See Resource Management Cardinal num_resources; See Resource Management XrmClass xrm_class; Private to resource manager Boolean compress_motion; See X Event Filters XtEnum compress_exposure; See X Event Filters Boolean compress_enterleave; See X Event Filters Boolean visible_interest; See Widget Exposure and Visibility XtWidgetProc destroy; See Destroying Widgets XtWidgetProc resize; See Geometry Management XtExposeProc expose; See Widget Exposure and Visibility XtSetValuesFunc set_values; See Reading and Writing Widget State XtArgsFunc set_values_hook; See Reading and Writing Widget State XtAlmostProc set_values_almost; See Reading and Writing Widget State XtArgsProc get_values_hook; See Reading and Writing Widget State XtAcceptFocusProc accept_focus; See Focusing Events on a Child XtVersionType version; See Widget Classing XtPointer callback_private; Private to callbacks String tm_table; See Translation Management XtGeometryHandler query_geometry; See Geometry Management XtStringProc display_accelerator; See Translation Management XtPointer extension; See Widget Classing } CoreClassPart;
All widget classes have the Core class fields as their first component.
The prototypical
WidgetClass
and
CoreWidgetClass
are defined with only this set of fields.
typedef struct { CoreClassPart core_class; } WidgetClassRec, *WidgetClass, CoreClassRec, *CoreWidgetClass;
Various routines can cast widget class pointers, as needed, to specific widget class types.
The single occurrences of the class record and pointer for creating instances of Core are
In
IntrinsicP.h
:
extern WidgetClassRec widgetClassRec; #define coreClassRec widgetClassRec
In
Intrinsic.h
:
extern WidgetClass widgetClass, coreWidgetClass;
The opaque types
Widget
and
WidgetClass
and the opaque variable
widgetClass
are defined for generic actions on widgets.
In order to make these types opaque and ensure that the compiler
does not allow applications to access private data, the Intrinsics use
incomplete structure definitions in
Intrinsic.h
:
typedef struct _WidgetClassRec *WidgetClass, *CoreWidgetClass;
All widget instances contain the fields defined in the
CorePart
structure.
typedef struct _CorePart { Widget self; Described below WidgetClass widget_class; See Widget Classing Widget parent; See Creating Widgets Boolean being_destroyed; See Destroying Widgets XtCallbackList destroy_callbacks; See Destroying Widgets XtPointer constraints; See Constrained Composite Widgets Position x; See Geometry Management Position y; See Geometry Management Dimension width; See Geometry Management Dimension height; See Geometry Management Dimension border_width; See Geometry Management Boolean managed; See Composite Widgets and Their Children Boolean sensitive; See Setting and Checking the Sensitivity State of a Widget Boolean ancestor_sensitive; See Setting and Checking the Sensitivity State of a Widget XtTranslations accelerators; See Translation Management Pixel border_pixel; See Realizing Widgets Pixmap border_pixmap; See Realizing Widgets WidgetList popup_list; See Pop-Up Widgets Cardinal num_popups; See Pop-Up Widgets String name; See Resource Management Screen *screen; See Realizing Widgets Colormap colormap; See Realizing Widgets Window window; See Realizing Widgets Cardinal depth; See Realizing Widgets Pixel background_pixel; See Realizing Widgets Pixmap background_pixmap; See Realizing Widgets Boolean visible; See Widget Exposure and Visibility Boolean mapped_when_managed; See Composite Widgets and Their Children } CorePart;
All widget instances have the Core fields as their first component.
The prototypical type
Widget
is defined with only this set of fields.
typedef struct { CorePart core; } WidgetRec, *Widget, CoreRec, *CoreWidget;
Various routines can cast widget pointers, as needed, to specific widget types.
In order to make these types opaque and ensure that the compiler
does not allow applications to access private data, the Intrinsics use
incomplete structure definitions in
Intrinsic.h
.
typedef struct _WidgetRec *Widget, *CoreWidget;
The resource names, classes, and representation types specified in the
coreClassRec
resource list are
Name | Class | Representation |
---|---|---|
XtNaccelerators | XtCAccelerators | XtRAcceleratorTable |
XtNbackground | XtCBackground | XtRPixel |
XtNbackgroundPixmap | XtCPixmap | XtRPixmap |
XtNborderColor | XtCBorderColor | XtRPixel |
XtNborderPixmap | XtCPixmap | XtRPixmap |
XtNcolormap | XtCColormap | XtRColormap |
XtNdepth | XtCDepth | XtRInt |
XtNmappedWhenManaged | XtCMappedWhenManaged | XtRBoolean |
XtNscreen | XtCScreen | XtRScreen |
XtNtranslations | XtCTranslations | XtRTranslationTable |
Additional resources are defined for all widgets via the
objectClassRec
and
rectObjClassRec
resource lists; see the section called “Object Objects” and the section called “Rectangle Objects” for details.
The default values for the Core fields, which are filled in by the Intrinsics, from the resource lists, and by the initialize procedures, are
Field | Default Value |
---|---|
self | Address of the widget structure (may not be changed). |
widget_class | widget_class argument to
XtCreateWidget
(may not be changed). |
parent | parent argument to
XtCreateWidget
(may not be changed). |
being_destroyed | Parent's being_destroyed value. |
destroy_callbacks | NULL |
constraints | NULL |
x | 0 |
y | 0 |
width | 0 |
height | 0 |
border_width | 1 |
managed | False |
sensitive | True |
ancestor_sensitive | logical AND of parent's sensitive and ancestor_sensitive values. |
accelerators | NULL |
border_pixel | XtDefaultForeground |
border_pixmap | XtUnspecifiedPixmap |
popup_list | NULL |
num_popups | 0 |
name | name argument to
XtCreateWidget
(may not be changed). |
screen | Parent's screen; top-level widget gets screen from display specifier (may not be changed). |
colormap | Parent's colormap value. |
window | NULL |
depth | Parent's depth; top-level widget gets root window depth. |
background_pixel | XtDefaultBackground |
background_pixmap | XtUnspecifiedPixmap |
visible | True |
mapped_when_managed | True |
XtUnspecifiedPixmap
is a symbolic constant guaranteed to be unequal to
any valid Pixmap id,
None
,
and
ParentRelative
.
The Composite
widget class is a subclass of the
Core
widget class (see Chapter 3, Composite Widgets and Their Children).
Composite widgets are intended to be containers for other widgets.
The additional data used by composite widgets are defined by the
CompositeClassPart
and
CompositePart
structures.
In addition to the Core class fields, widgets of the Composite class have the following class fields.
typedef struct { XtGeometryHandler geometry_manager; See Geometry Management XtWidgetProc change_managed; See Composite Widgets and Their Children XtWidgetProc insert_child; See Composite Widgets and Their Children XtWidgetProc delete_child; See Composite Widgets and Their Children XtPointer extension; See Widget Classing } CompositeClassPart;
The extension record defined for
CompositeClassPart
with record_type
equal to
NULLQUARK
is
CompositeClassExtensionRec
.
typedef struct { XtPointer next_extension; See Class Extension Records XrmQuark record_type; See Class Extension Records long version; See Class Extension Records Cardinal record_size; See Class Extension Records Boolean accepts_objects; See Creating a Widget Instance Boolean allows_change_managed_set; See Bundling Changes to the Managed Set } CompositeClassExtensionRec, *CompositeClassExtension;
Composite classes have the Composite class fields immediately following the Core class fields.
typedef struct { CoreClassPart core_class; CompositeClassPart composite_class; } CompositeClassRec, *CompositeWidgetClass;
The single occurrences of the class record and pointer for creating instances of Composite are
In
IntrinsicP.h
:
extern CompositeClassRec compositeClassRec;
In
Intrinsic.h
:
extern WidgetClass compositeWidgetClass;
The opaque types
CompositeWidget
and
CompositeWidgetClass
and the opaque variable
compositeWidgetClass
are defined for generic operations on widgets whose class
is Composite or a subclass of Composite.
The symbolic constant for the
CompositeClassExtension
version identifier is
XtCompositeExtensionVersion
(see the section called “Class Extension Records”).
Intrinsic.h
uses an incomplete structure
definition to ensure that the compiler catches attempts to access
private data.
typedef struct _CompositeClassRec *CompositeWidgetClass;
In addition to the
Core instance
fields,
widgets of the Composite class have the following
instance fields defined in the
CompositePart
structure.
typedef struct { WidgetList children; See Composite Widgets and Their Children Cardinal num_children; See Composite Widgets and Their Children Cardinal num_slots; See Composite Widgets and Their Children XtOrderProc insert_position; See Insertion Order of Children: The insert_position Procedure } CompositePart;
Composite widgets have the Composite instance fields immediately following the Core instance fields.
typedef struct { CorePart core; CompositePart composite; } CompositeRec, *CompositeWidget;
Intrinsic.h
uses an incomplete structure definition to ensure that the
compiler catches attempts to access private data.
typedef struct _CompositeRec *CompositeWidget;
The resource names, classes, and representation types
that are specified in
the
compositeClassRec
resource list are
Name | Class | Representation |
---|---|---|
XtNchildren | XtCReadOnly | XtRWidgetList |
XtNinsertPosition | XtCInsertPosition | XtRFunction |
XtNnumChildren | XtCReadOnly | XtRCardinal |
The default values for the Composite fields, which are filled in from the Composite resource list and by the Composite initialize procedure, are
Field | Default Value |
---|---|
children | NULL |
num_children | 0 |
num_slots | 0 |
insert_position | Internal function to insert at end |
The children, num_children, and insert_position fields are declared as resources; XtNinsertPosition is a settable resource, XtNchildren and XtNnumChildren may be read by any client but should only be modified by the composite widget class procedures.
The Constraint
widget class is a subclass of the
Composite
widget class (see the section called “Constrained Composite Widgets”). Constraint
widgets maintain additional state
data for each child; for example, client-defined constraints on the child's
geometry.
The additional data used by constraint widgets are defined by the
ConstraintClassPart
and
ConstraintPart
structures.
In addition to the Core and Composite class fields, widgets of the Constraint class have the following class fields.
typedef struct { XtResourceList resources; See Resource Management Cardinal num_resources; See Resource Management Cardinal constraint_size; See Constrained Composite Widgets XtInitProc initialize; See Constrained Composite Widgets XtWidgetProc destroy; See Constrained Composite Widgets XtSetValuesFunc set_values; See Setting Widget State XtPointer extension; See Widget Classing } ConstraintClassPart;
The extension record defined for
ConstraintClassPart
with record_type equal to
NULLQUARK
is
ConstraintClassExtensionRec
.
typedef struct { XtPointer next_extension; See Class Extension Records XrmQuark record_type; See Class Extension Records long version; See Class Extension Records Cardinal record_size; See Class Extension Records XtArgsProc get_values_hook; See Obtaining Widget State } ConstraintClassExtensionRec, *ConstraintClassExtension;
Constraint classes have the Constraint class fields immediately following the Composite class fields.
typedef struct _ConstraintClassRec { CoreClassPart core_class; CompositeClassPart composite_class; ConstraintClassPart constraint_class; } ConstraintClassRec, *ConstraintWidgetClass;
The single occurrences of the class record and pointer for creating instances of Constraint are
In
IntrinsicP.h
:
extern ConstraintClassRec constraintClassRec;
In
Intrinsic.h
:
extern WidgetClass constraintWidgetClass;
The opaque types
ConstraintWidget
and
ConstraintWidgetClass
and the opaque variable
constraintWidgetClass
are defined for generic operations on widgets
whose class is Constraint or a subclass
of Constraint.
The symbolic constant for the
ConstraintClassExtension
version identifier is
XtConstraintExtensionVersion
(see the section called “Class Extension Records”).
Intrinsic.h
uses an incomplete structure definition to ensure that the
compiler catches attempts to access private data.
typedef struct _ConstraintClassRec *ConstraintWidgetClass;
In addition to the
Core
and
Composite instance
fields,
widgets of the Constraint class have the following unused
instance fields defined in the
ConstraintPart
structure
typedef struct { int empty; } ConstraintPart;
Constraint widgets have the Constraint instance fields immediately following the Composite instance fields.
typedef struct { CorePart core; CompositePart composite; ConstraintPart constraint; } ConstraintRec, *ConstraintWidget;
Intrinsic.h
uses an incomplete structure definition to ensure that the
compiler catches attempts to access private data.
typedef struct _ConstraintRec *ConstraintWidget;
To increase the portability of widget and application source code between different system environments, the Intrinsics define several types whose precise representation is explicitly dependent upon, and chosen by, each individual implementation of the Intrinsics.
These implementation-defined types are
Boolean |
A datum that contains a zero or nonzero value.
Unless explicitly stated, clients should not assume
that the nonzero value is equal to the symbolic
value
|
Cardinal | An unsigned integer datum with a minimum range of [0..216-1]. |
Dimension | An unsigned integer datum with a minimum range of [0..216-1]. |
Position | A signed integer datum with a minimum range of [-215..215-1]. |
XtPointer |
A datum large enough to contain the largest of a char*, int*, function
pointer, structure pointer, or long value. A pointer
to any type or function, or a long value may be converted
to an
|
XtArgVal |
A datum large enough to contain an
|
XtEnum |
An integer datum large enough to encode at least 128 distinct
values, two of which are the symbolic values
|
In addition to these specific types, the precise order of the
fields within the structure declarations for any of the instance
part records
ObjectPart
,
RectObjPart
,
CorePart
,
CompositePart
,
ShellPart
,
WMShellPart
,
TopLevelShellPart
,
and
ApplicationShellPart
is implementation-defined. These
structures may also have additional private
fields internal to the implementation.
The
ObjectPart
,
RectObjPart
,
and
CorePart
structures must be defined so that any member with the same name
appears at the same offset in
ObjectRec
,
RectObjRec
,
and
CoreRec
( WidgetRec ).
No other relations between the offsets of any two
fields may be assumed.
The widget_class field of a widget points to its widget class structure, which contains information that is constant across all widgets of that class. As a consequence, widgets usually do not implement directly callable procedures; rather, they implement procedures, called methods, that are available through their widget class structure. These methods are invoked by generic procedures that envelop common actions around the methods implemented by the widget class. Such procedures are applicable to all widgets of that class and also to widgets whose classes are subclasses of that class.
All widget classes are a subclass of
Core
and can be subclassed further.
Subclassing reduces the amount of code and declarations
necessary to make a
new widget class that is similar to an existing class.
For example, you do not have to describe every resource your widget uses in an
XtResourceList
.
Instead, you describe only the resources your widget has
that its superclass does not.
Subclasses usually inherit many of their superclasses' procedures
(for example, the expose procedure or geometry handler).
Subclassing, however, can be taken too far. If you create a subclass that inherits none of the procedures of its superclass, you should consider whether you have chosen the most appropriate superclass.
To make good use of subclassing, widget declarations and naming conventions are highly stylized. A widget consists of three files:
A public .h file, used by client widgets or applications.
A private .h file, used by widgets whose classes are subclasses of the widget class.
A .c file, which implements the widget.
The Intrinsics provide a vehicle by which programmers can create new widgets and organize a collection of widgets into an application. To ensure that applications need not deal with as many styles of capitalization and spelling as the number of widget classes it uses, the following guidelines should be followed when writing new widgets:
Use the X library naming conventions that are applicable.
For example, a record component name is all lowercase
and uses underscores (_) for compound words (for example, background_pixmap).
Type and procedure names start with uppercase and use capitalization for
compound words (for example,
ArgList
or
XtSetValues ).
A resource name is spelled identically to the field name
except that compound names use capitalization rather than underscore.
To let the compiler catch spelling errors,
each resource name should have a symbolic identifier prefixed with
“XtN”.
For example,
the background_pixmap field has the corresponding identifier
XtNbackgroundPixmap,
which is defined as the string “backgroundPixmap”.
Many predefined names are listed in
<X11/StringDefs.h>
.
Before you invent a new name,
you should make sure there is not already a name that you can use.
A resource class string starts with a capital letter
and uses capitalization for compound names (for example,“BorderWidth”).
Each resource class string should have a symbolic identifier prefixed with
“XtC”
(for example, XtCBorderWidth).
Many predefined classes are listed in
<X11/StringDefs.h>
.
A resource representation string is spelled identically to the type name
(for example, “TranslationTable”).
Each representation string should have a symbolic identifier prefixed with
“XtR”
(for example, XtRTranslationTable).
Many predefined representation types are listed in
<X11/StringDefs.h>
.
New widget classes start with a capital and use uppercase for compound words. Given a new class name AbcXyz, you should derive several names:
Additional widget instance structure part name AbcXyzPart.
Complete widget instance structure names AbcXyzRec and _AbcXyzRec.
Widget instance structure pointer type name AbcXyzWidget.
Additional class structure part name AbcXyzClassPart.
Complete class structure names AbcXyzClassRec and _AbcXyzClassRec.
Class structure pointer type name AbcXyzWidgetClass.
Class structure variable abcXyzClassRec.
Class structure pointer variable abcXyzWidgetClass.
Action procedures available to translation specifications should follow the same naming conventions as procedures. That is, they start with a capital letter, and compound names use uppercase (for example, “Highlight” and “NotifyClient”).
The symbolic identifiers XtN..., XtC..., and XtR...
may be implemented
as macros, as global symbols, or as a mixture of the two. The
(implicit) type of the identifier is
String
.
The pointer value itself
is not significant; clients must not assume that inequality of two
identifiers implies inequality of the resource name, class, or
representation string. Clients should also note that although global
symbols permit savings in literal storage in some environments, they
also introduce the possibility of multiple definition conflicts when
applications attempt to use independently developed widgets
simultaneously.
The public .h file for a widget class is imported by clients and contains
A reference to the public .h file for the superclass.
Symbolic identifiers for the names and classes of the new resources that this widget adds to its superclass. The definitions should have a single space between the definition name and the value and no trailing space or comment in order to reduce the possibility of compiler warnings from similar declarations in multiple classes.
Type declarations for any new resource data types defined by the class.
The class record pointer variable used to create widget instances.
The C type that corresponds to widget instances of this class.
Entry points for new class methods.
For example, the following is the public .h file for a possible implementation of a Label widget:
#ifndef LABEL_H #define LABEL_H /* New resources */ #define XtNjustify "justify" #define XtNforeground "foreground" #define XtNlabel "label" #define XtNfont "font" #define XtNinternalWidth "internalWidth" #define XtNinternalHeight "internalHeight" /* Class record pointer */ extern WidgetClass labelWidgetClass; /* C Widget type definition */ typedef struct _LabelRec *LabelWidget; /* New class method entry points */ extern void LabelSetText(Widget w, String text); extern String LabelGetText(Widget w); #endif LABEL_H
The conditional inclusion of the text allows the application to include header files for different widgets without being concerned that they already may be included as a superclass of another widget.
To accommodate operating systems with file name length restrictions,
the name of the public .h file is the first ten characters of the
widget class.
For example,
the public .h file for the
Constraint
widget class is
Constraint.h
.
The private .h file for a widget is imported by widget classes that are subclasses of the widget and contains
A reference to the public .h file for the class.
A reference to the private .h file for the superclass.
Symbolic identifiers for any new resource representation types defined by the class. The definitions should have a single space between the definition name and the value and no trailing space or comment.
A structure part definition for the new fields that the widget instance adds to its superclass's widget structure.
The complete widget instance structure definition for this widget.
A structure part definition for the new fields that this widget class adds to its superclass's constraint structure if the widget class is a subclass of Constraint.
The complete constraint structure definition if the widget class is a subclass of Constraint.
Type definitions for any new procedure types used by class methods declared in the widget class part.
A structure part definition for the new fields that this widget class adds to its superclass's widget class structure.
The complete widget class structure definition for this widget.
The complete widget class extension structure definition for this widget, if any.
The symbolic constant identifying the class extension version, if any.
The name of the global class structure variable containing the generic class structure for this class.
An inherit constant for each new procedure in the widget class part structure.
For example, the following is the private .h file for a possible Label widget:
#ifndef LABELP_H #define LABELP_H #include <X11/Label.h> /* New representation types used by the Label widget */ #define XtRJustify "Justify" /* New fields for the Label widget record */ typedef struct { /* Settable resources */ Pixel foreground; XFontStruct *font; String label; /* text to display */ XtJustify justify; Dimension internal_width; /* # pixels horizontal border */ Dimension internal_height; /* # pixels vertical border */ /* Data derived from resources */ GC normal_GC; GC gray_GC; Pixmap gray_pixmap; Position label_x; Position label_y; Dimension label_width; Dimension label_height; Cardinal label_len; Boolean display_sensitive; } LabelPart; /* Full instance record declaration */ typedef struct _LabelRec { CorePart core; LabelPart label; } LabelRec; /* Types for Label class methods */ typedef void (*LabelSetTextProc)(Widget w, String text); typedef String (*LabelGetTextProc)(Widget w); /* New fields for the Label widget class record */ typedef struct { LabelSetTextProc set_text; LabelGetTextProc get_text; XtPointer extension; } LabelClassPart; /* Full class record declaration */ typedef struct _LabelClassRec { CoreClassPart core_class; LabelClassPart label_class; } LabelClassRec; /* Class record variable */ extern LabelClassRec labelClassRec; #define LabelInheritSetText((LabelSetTextProc)_XtInherit) #define LabelInheritGetText((LabelGetTextProc)_XtInherit) #endif LABELP_H
To accommodate operating systems with file name length restrictions,
the name of the private .h file is the first nine characters of the
widget class followed by a capital P.
For example,
the private .h file for the
Constraint
widget class is
ConstrainP.h
.
The .c file for a widget contains the structure initializer for the class record variable, which contains the following parts:
Class information (for example, superclass, class_name, widget_size, class_initialize, and class_inited).
Data constants (for example, resources and num_resources, actions and num_actions, visible_interest, compress_motion, compress_exposure, and version).
Widget operations (for example, initialize, realize, destroy, resize, expose, set_values, accept_focus, and any new operations specific to the widget).
The superclass field points to the superclass
global class
record, declared in the superclass private .h file.
For direct subclasses of the generic core widget,
superclass should be initialized to the address of the
widgetClassRec
structure.
The superclass is used for class chaining operations and for
inheriting or enveloping a superclass's operations
(see the section called “Superclass Chaining”,
the section called “Initializing a Widget Class”, and
the section called “Inheritance of Superclass Operations”.
The class_name field contains the text name for this class, which is used by the resource manager. For example, the Label widget has the string “Label”. More than one widget class can share the same text class name. This string must be permanently allocated prior to or during the execution of the class initialization procedure and must not be subsequently deallocated.
The widget_size field is the size of the corresponding widget instance structure (not the size of the class structure).
The version field indicates the toolkit
implementation version number and is used for
runtime consistency checking of the X Toolkit and widgets in an application.
Widget writers must set it to the
implementation-defined symbolic value
XtVersion
in the widget class structure initialization.
Those widget writers who believe that their widget binaries are compatible
with other implementations of the Intrinsics can put the special value
XtVersionDontCheck
in the version field to disable version checking for those widgets.
If a widget needs to compile alternative code for different
revisions of the Intrinsics interface definition, it may use the symbol
XtSpecificationRelease
,
as described in Chapter 13, Evolution of the Intrinsics.
Use of
XtVersion
allows the Intrinsics implementation to recognize widget binaries
that were compiled with older implementations.
The extension field is for future upward compatibility. If the widget programmer adds fields to class parts, all subclass structure layouts change, requiring complete recompilation. To allow clients to avoid recompilation, an extension field at the end of each class part can point to a record that contains any additional class information required.
All other fields are described in their respective sections.
The .c file also contains the declaration of the global class structure pointer variable used to create instances of the class. The following is an abbreviated version of the .c file for a Label widget. The resources table is described in Chapter 9, Resource Management.
/* Resources specific to Label */ static XtResource resources[] = { {XtNforeground, XtCForeground, XtRPixel, sizeof(Pixel), XtOffset(LabelWidget, label.foreground), XtRString, XtDefaultForeground}, {XtNfont, XtCFont, XtRFontStruct, sizeof(XFontStruct *), XtOffset(LabelWidget, label.font),XtRString, XtDefaultFont}, {XtNlabel, XtCLabel, XtRString, sizeof(String), XtOffset(LabelWidget, label.label), XtRString, NULL}, . . . } /* Forward declarations of procedures */ static void ClassInitialize(void); static void Initialize(Widget, Widget, ArgList, Cardinal*); static void Realize(Widget, XtValueMask*, XSetWindowAttributes*); static void SetText(Widget, String); static void GetText(Widget); . . .
/* Class record constant */ LabelClassRec labelClassRec = { { /* core_class fields */ /* superclass */ (WidgetClass)&coreClassRec, /* class_name */ "Label", /* widget_size */ sizeof(LabelRec), /* class_initialize */ ClassInitialize, /* class_part_initialize */ NULL, /* class_inited */ False, /* initialize */ Initialize, /* initialize_hook */ NULL, /* realize */ Realize, /* actions */ NULL, /* num_actions */ 0, /* resources */ resources, /* num_resources */ XtNumber(resources), /* xrm_class */ NULLQUARK, /* compress_motion */ True, /* compress_exposure */ True, /* compress_enterleave */ True, /* visible_interest */ False, /* destroy */ NULL, /* resize */ Resize, /* expose */ Redisplay, /* set_values */ SetValues, /* set_values_hook */ NULL, /* set_values_almost */ XtInheritSetValuesAlmost, /* get_values_hook */ NULL, /* accept_focus */ NULL, /* version */ XtVersion, /* callback_offsets */ NULL, /* tm_table */ NULL, /* query_geometry */ XtInheritQueryGeometry, /* display_accelerator */ NULL, /* extension */ NULL }, { /* Label_class fields */ /* get_text */ GetText, /* set_text */ SetText, /* extension */ NULL } }; /* Class record pointer */ WidgetClass labelWidgetClass = (WidgetClass) &labelClassRec; /* New method access routines */ void LabelSetText(Widget w, String text) { LabelWidgetClass lwc = (Label WidgetClass)XtClass(w); XtCheckSubclass(w, labelWidgetClass, NULL); *(lwc->label_class.set_text)(w, text) } /* Private procedures */ . . .
To obtain the class of a widget, use
XtClass
.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
The
XtClass
function returns a pointer to the widget's class structure.
To obtain the superclass of a widget, use
XtSuperclass
.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
The
XtSuperclass
function returns a pointer to the widget's superclass class structure.
To check the subclass to which a widget belongs, use
XtIsSubclass
.
w | Specifies the widget or object instance whose class is to be checked. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
widget_class | Specifies the widget class for which to test. Must be objectClass or any subclass thereof. |
The
XtIsSubclass
function returns
True
if the class of the specified widget is equal to
or is a subclass of the specified class.
The widget's class can be any number of subclasses down the chain
and need not be an immediate subclass of the specified class.
Composite widgets that need to restrict the class of the items they
contain can use
XtIsSubclass
to find out if a widget belongs to the desired class of objects.
To test if a given widget belongs to a subclass of an Intrinsics-defined
class, the Intrinsics define macros or functions equivalent to
XtIsSubclass
for each of the built-in classes. These procedures are
XtIsObject
,
XtIsRectObj
,
XtIsWidget
,
XtIsComposite
,
XtIsConstraint
,
XtIsShell
,
XtIsOverrideShell
,
XtIsWMShell
,
XtIsVendorShell
,
XtIsTransientShell
,
XtIsTopLevelShell
,
XtIsApplicationShell
,
and
XtIsSessionShell
.
All these macros and functions have the same argument description.
w | Specifies the widget or object instance whose class is to be checked. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
These procedures may be faster than calling
XtIsSubclass
directly for the built-in classes.
To check a widget's class
and to generate a debugging error message, use
XtCheckSubclass
,
defined in
<X11/IntrinsicP.h>
:
w | Specifies the widget or object whose class is to be checked. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
widget_class | Specifies the widget class for which to test. Must be objectClass or any subclass thereof. |
message | Specifies the message to be used. |
The
XtCheckSubclass
macro determines if the class of the specified widget is equal to
or is a subclass of the specified class.
The widget's class can be any number of subclasses down the chain
and need not be an immediate subclass of the specified class.
If the specified widget's class is not a subclass,
XtCheckSubclass
constructs an error message from the supplied message,
the widget's actual class, and the expected class and calls
XtErrorMsg
.
XtCheckSubclass
should be used at the entry point of exported routines to ensure
that the client has passed in a valid widget class for the exported operation.
XtCheckSubclass
is only executed when the module has been compiled with the compiler symbol
DEBUG defined; otherwise, it is defined as the empty string
and generates no code.
While most fields in a widget class structure are self-contained, some fields are linked to their corresponding fields in their superclass structures. With a linked field, the Intrinsics access the field's value only after accessing its corresponding superclass value (called downward superclass chaining) or before accessing its corresponding superclass value (called upward superclass chaining). The self-contained fields are
In all widget classes: class_name class_initialize widget_size realize visible_interest resize expose accept_focus compress_motion compress_exposure compress_enterleave set_values_almost tm_table version allocate deallocate In Composite widget classes: geometry_manager change_managed insert_child delete_child accepts_objects allows_change_managed_set In Constraint widget classes: constraint_size In Shell widget classes: root_geometry_manager
With downward superclass chaining, the invocation of an operation first accesses the field from the Object, RectObj, and Core class structures, then from the subclass structure, and so on down the class chain to that widget's class structure. These superclass-to-subclass fields are
class_part_initialize get_values_hook initialize initialize_hook set_values set_values_hook resources
In addition, for subclasses of
Constraint,
the following fields of the
ConstraintClassPart
and
ConstraintClassExtensionRec
structures are chained from the
Constraint
class down to the subclass:
resources initialize set_values get_values_hook
With upward superclass chaining, the invocation of an operation first accesses the field from the widget class structure, then from the superclass structure, and so on up the class chain to the Core, RectObj, and Object class structures. The subclass-to-superclass fields are
destroy actions
For subclasses of
Constraint,
the following field of
ConstraintClassPart
is chained from the subclass up to the
Constraint class:
destroy
Many class records can be initialized completely at compile or link time. In some cases, however, a class may need to register type converters or perform other sorts of once-only runtime initialization.
Because the C language does not have initialization procedures
that are invoked automatically when a program starts up,
a widget class can declare a class_initialize procedure
that will be automatically called exactly once by the Intrinsics.
A class initialization procedure pointer is of type
XtProc
:
typedef void (*XtProc)(void);
A widget class indicates that it has no class initialization procedure by specifying NULL in the class_initialize field.
In addition to the class initialization that is done exactly once,
some classes perform initialization for fields in their parts
of the class record.
These are performed not just for the particular class,
but for subclasses as well, and are
done in the class's class part initialization procedure,
a pointer to which is stored in the class_part_initialize field.
The class_part_initialize procedure pointer is of type
XtWidgetClassProc
.
typedef void (*XtWidgetClassProc)(WidgetClass)(
WidgetClass widget_class)
;
widget_class | Points to the class structure for the class being initialized. |
During class initialization, the class part initialization procedures for the class and all its superclasses are called in superclass-to-subclass order on the class record. These procedures have the responsibility of doing any dynamic initializations necessary to their class's part of the record. The most common is the resolution of any inherited methods defined in the class. For example, if a widget class C has superclasses Core, Composite, A, and B, the class record for C first is passed to Core 's class_part_initialize procedure. This resolves any inherited Core methods and compiles the textual representations of the resource list and action table that are defined in the class record. Next, Composite's class_part_initialize procedure is called to initialize the composite part of C's class record. Finally, the class_part_initialize procedures for A, B, and C, in that order, are called. For further information, see the section called “Initializing a Widget Class” Classes that do not define any new class fields or that need no extra processing for them can specify NULL in the class_part_initialize field.
All widget classes, whether they have a class initialization procedure or not,
must start with their class_inited field
False
.
The first time a widget of a class is created,
XtCreateWidget
ensures that the widget class and all superclasses are initialized, in
superclass-to-subclass order, by checking each class_inited field and,
if it is
False
,
by calling the class_initialize and the class_part_initialize procedures
for the class and all its superclasses.
The Intrinsics then set the class_inited field to a nonzero value.
After the one-time initialization,
a class structure is constant.
The following example provides the class initialization procedure for a Label class.
static void ClassInitialize(void) { XtSetTypeConverter(XtRString, XtRJustify, CvtStringToJustify, NULL, 0, XtCacheNone, NULL); }
A class is initialized when the first widget of that class or any
subclass is created.
To initialize a widget class without creating any widgets, use
XtInitializeWidgetClass
.
object_class |
Specifies the object class to initialize. May be
|
If the specified widget class is already initialized,
XtInitializeWidgetClass
returns immediately.
If the class initialization procedure registers type converters,
these type converters are not available until the first object
of the class or subclass is created or
XtInitializeWidgetClass
is called
(see the section called “Resource Conversions”).
A widget class is free to use any of its superclass's self-contained operations rather than implementing its own code. The most frequently inherited operations are
expose
realize
insert_child
delete_child
geometry_manager
set_values_almost
To inherit an operation xyz,
specify the constant
XtInherit
Xyz
in your class record.
Every class that declares a new procedure in its widget class part must provide for inheriting the procedure in its class_part_initialize procedure. The chained operations declared in Core and Constraint records are never inherited. Widget classes that do nothing beyond what their superclass does specify NULL for chained procedures in their class records.
Inheriting works by comparing the value of the field with a known, special
value and by copying in the superclass's value for that field if a match
occurs.
This special value, called the inheritance constant,
is usually the Intrinsics internal value
_XtInherit
cast to the appropriate type.
_XtInherit
is a procedure that issues an error message if it is actually called.
For example,
CompositeP.h
contains these definitions:
#define XtInheritGeometryManager ((XtGeometryHandler) _XtInherit) #define XtInheritChangeManaged ((XtWidgetProc) _XtInherit) #define XtInheritInsertChild ((XtArgsProc) _XtInherit) #define XtInheritDeleteChild ((XtWidgetProc) _XtInherit)
Composite's class_part_initialize procedure begins as follows:
static void CompositeClassPartInitialize(WidgetClass widgetClass) { CompositeWidgetClass wc = (CompositeWidgetClass)widgetClass; CompositeWidgetClass super = (CompositeWidgetClass)wc->core_class.superclass; if (wc->composite_class.geometry_manager == XtInheritGeometryManager) { wc->composite_class.geometry_manager = super->composite_class.geometry_manager; } if (wc->composite_class.change_managed == XtInheritChangeManaged) { wc->composite_class.change_managed = super->composite_class.change_managed; } . . . }
Nonprocedure fields may be inherited in the same manner as procedure fields. The class may declare any reserved value it wishes for the inheritance constant for its new fields. The following inheritance constants are defined:
For Object:
XtInheritAllocate
XtInheritDeallocate
For Core:
XtInheritRealize
XtInheritResize
XtInheritExpose
XtInheritSetValuesAlmost
XtInheritAcceptFocus
XtInheritQueryGeometry
XtInheritTranslations
XtInheritDisplayAccelerator
For Composite:
XtInheritGeometryManager
XtInheritChangeManaged
XtInheritInsertChild
XtInheritDeleteChild
For Shell:
XtInheritRootGeometryManager
A widget sometimes needs to call a superclass operation
that is not chained.
For example,
a widget's expose procedure might call its superclass's expose
and then perform a little more work on its own.
For example, a Composite
class with predefined managed children can implement insert_child
by first calling its superclass's insert_child
and then calling
XtManageChild
to add the child to the managed set.
A class method should not use
XtSuperclass
but should instead call the class method of its own specific superclass
directly through the superclass record.
That is, it should use its own class pointers only,
not the widget's class pointers,
as the widget's class may be a subclass of the
class whose implementation is being referenced.
This technique is referred to as enveloping the superclass's operation.
It may be necessary at times to add new fields to already existing widget class structures. To permit this to be done without requiring recompilation of all subclasses, the last field in a class part structure should be an extension pointer. If no extension fields for a class have yet been defined, subclasses should initialize the value of the extension pointer to NULL.
If extension fields exist, as is the case with the Composite, Constraint, and Shell classes, subclasses can provide values for these fields by setting the extension pointer for the appropriate part in their class structure to point to a statically declared extension record containing the additional fields. Setting the extension field is never mandatory; code that uses fields in the extension record must always check the extension field and take some appropriate default action if it is NULL.
In order to permit multiple subclasses and libraries to chain extension records from a single extension field, extension records should be declared as a linked list, and each extension record definition should contain the following four fields at the beginning of the structure declaration:
struct { XtPointer next_extension; XrmQuark record_type; long version; Cardinal record_size; };
next_extension | Specifies the next record in the list, or NULL. |
record_type | Specifies the particular structure declaration to which each extension record instance conforms. |
version | Specifies a version id symbolic constant supplied by the definer of the structure. |
record_size | Specifies the total number of bytes allocated for the extension record. |
The record_type field identifies the contents of the extension record
and is used by the definer of the record to locate its particular
extension record in the list. The
record_type field is normally assigned the
result of
XrmStringToQuark
for a registered string constant. The
Intrinsics reserve all record type strings beginning with the two
characters “XT” for future standard uses. The value
NULLQUARK
may also be used
by the class part owner in extension records attached to its own class
part extension field to identify the extension record unique to that
particular class.
The version field is an owner-defined constant that may be used to
identify binary files that have been compiled with alternate
definitions of the remainder of the extension record data structure. The private
header file for a widget class should provide a symbolic constant for
subclasses to use to initialize this field.
The record_size field value includes the four common header fields and
should normally be initialized with
sizeof().
Any value stored in the class part extension fields of
CompositeClassPart
,
ConstraintClassPart
,
or
ShellClassPart
must point to an extension record conforming to this definition.
The Intrinsics provide a utility function for widget writers to locate a particular class extension record in a linked list, given a widget class and the offset of the extension field in the class record.
To locate a class extension record, use
XtGetClassExtension
.
XtPointer XtGetClassExtension(
WidgetClass object_class, Cardinal byte_offset, XrmQuark type, long version, Cardinal record_size)
;
object_class | Specifies the object class containing the extension list to be searched. |
byte_offset | Specifies the offset in bytes from the base of the class record of the extension field to be searched. |
type | Specifies the record_type of the class extension to be located. |
version | Specifies the minimum acceptable version of the class extension required for a match. |
record_size | Specifies the minimum acceptable length of the class extension record required for a match, or 0. |
The list of extension records at the specified offset in the specified
object class will be searched for a match on the specified type,
a version greater than or equal to the specified version, and a record
size greater than or equal the specified record_size if it is nonzero.
XtGetClassExtension
returns a pointer to a matching extension record or NULL if no match
is found. The returned extension record must not be modified or
freed by the caller if the caller is not the extension owner.
Table of Contents
A hierarchy of widget instances constitutes a widget tree.
The shell widget returned by
XtAppCreateShell
is the root of the widget tree instance.
The widgets with one or more children are the intermediate nodes of that tree,
and the widgets with no children of any kind are the leaves of the widget tree.
With the exception of pop-up children (see Chapter 5, Pop-Up Widgets),
this widget tree instance defines the associated X Window tree.
Widgets can be either composite or primitive. Both kinds of widgets can contain children, but the Intrinsics provide a set of management mechanisms for constructing and interfacing between composite widgets, their children, and other clients.
Composite widgets, that is, members of the class
compositeWidgetClass
,
are containers for an arbitrary,
but widget implementation-defined, collection of children,
which may be instantiated by the composite widget itself,
by other clients, or by a combination of the two.
Composite widgets also contain methods for managing the geometry (layout)
of any child widget.
Under unusual circumstances,
a composite widget may have zero children,
but it usually has at least one.
By contrast,
primitive widgets that contain children typically instantiate
specific children of known classes themselves and do not expect external
clients to do so.
Primitive widgets also do not have general geometry management methods.
In addition, the Intrinsics recursively perform many operations (for example, realization and destruction) on composite widgets and all their children. Primitive widgets that have children must be prepared to perform the recursive operations themselves on behalf of their children.
A widget tree is manipulated by several Intrinsics functions.
For example,
XtRealizeWidget
traverses the tree downward and recursively realizes all
pop-up widgets and children of composite widgets.
XtDestroyWidget
traverses the tree downward and destroys all pop-up widgets
and children of composite widgets.
The functions that fetch and modify resources traverse the tree upward
and determine the inheritance of resources from a widget's ancestors.
XtMakeGeometryRequest
traverses the tree up one level and calls the geometry manager
that is responsible for a widget child's geometry.
To facilitate upward traversal of the widget tree,
each widget has a pointer to its parent widget.
The
Shell
widget that
XtAppCreateShell
returns has a parent pointer of NULL.
To facilitate downward traversal of the widget tree, the children field of each composite widget is a pointer to an array of child widgets, which includes all normal children created, not just the subset of children that are managed by the composite widget's geometry manager. Primitive widgets that instantiate children are entirely responsible for all operations that require downward traversal below themselves. In addition, every widget has a pointer to an array of pop-up children.
Before an application can call any Intrinsics function
other than
XtSetLanguageProc
and
XtToolkitThreadInitialize
,
it must initialize the Intrinsics by using
XtToolkitInitialize
,
which initializes the Intrinsics internals
XtCreateApplicationContext
,
which initializes the per-application state
XtDisplayInitialize
or
XtOpenDisplay
,
which initializes the per-display state
XtAppCreateShell
,
which creates the root of a widget tree
Or an application can call the convenience procedure
XtOpenApplication
,
which combines the functions of the preceding procedures.
An application wishing to use the ANSI C locale mechanism should call
XtSetLanguageProc
prior to calling
XtDisplayInitialize
,
XtOpenDisplay
,
XtOpenApplication
,
or
XtAppInitialize
.
Multiple instances of X Toolkit applications may be implemented
in a single address space.
Each instance needs to be able to read
input and dispatch events independently of any other instance.
Further, an application instance may need multiple display connections
to have widgets on multiple displays.
From the application's point of view, multiple display connections
usually are treated together as a single unit
for purposes of event dispatching.
To accommodate both requirements,
the Intrinsics define application contexts,
each of which provides the information needed to distinguish one application
instance from another.
The major component of an application context is a list of one or more X
Display
pointers for that application.
The Intrinsics handle all display connections within a single application
context simultaneously, handling input in a round-robin fashion.
The application context type
XtAppContext
is opaque to clients.
To initialize the Intrinsics internals, use
XtToolkitInitialize
.
If
XtToolkitInitialize
was previously called, it returns immediately.
When
XtToolkitThreadInitialize
is called before
XtToolkitInitialize
,
the latter is protected against
simultaneous activation by multiple threads.
To create an application context, use
XtCreateApplicationContext
.
The
XtCreateApplicationContext
function returns an application context,
which is an opaque type.
Every application must have at least one application context.
To destroy an application context and close any
remaining display connections in it, use
XtDestroyApplicationContext
.
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
The
XtDestroyApplicationContext
function destroys the specified application context.
If called from within an event dispatch (for example, in a callback procedure),
XtDestroyApplicationContext
does not destroy the application context until the dispatch is complete.
To get the application context in which a given widget was created, use
XtWidgetToApplicationContext
.
w | Specifies the widget for which you want the application context. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
The
XtWidgetToApplicationContext
function returns the application context for the specified widget.
To initialize a display and add it to an application context, use
XtDisplayInitialize
.
void XtDisplayInitialize(
XtAppContext app_context, Display * display, const char * application_name, const char * application_class, XrmOptionDescRec * options, Cardinal num_options, int * argc, char ** argv)
;
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
display | Specifies a previously opened display connection. Note that a single display connection can be in at most one application context. |
application_name | Specifies the name of the application instance. |
application_class | Specifies the class name of this application, which is usually the generic name for all instances of this application. |
options |
Specifies how to parse the command line for any application-specific resources.
The options argument is passed as a parameter to
|
num_options | Specifies the number of entries in the options list. |
argc | Specifies a pointer to the number of command line parameters. |
argv | Specifies the list of command line parameters. |
The
XtDisplayInitialize
function retrieves the language string to be
used for the specified display (see the section called “Finding File Names”),
calls the language procedure (if set) with that language string,
builds the resource database for the default screen, calls the Xlib
XrmParseCommand
function to parse the command line,
and performs other per-display initialization.
After
XrmParseCommand
has been called,
argc and argv contain only those parameters that
were not in the standard option table or in the table specified by the
options argument.
If the modified argc is not zero,
most applications simply print out the modified argv along with a message
listing the allowable options.
On POSIX-based systems,
the application name is usually the final component of argv[0].
If the synchronous resource is
True
,
XtDisplayInitialize
calls the Xlib
XSynchronize
function to put Xlib into synchronous mode for this display connection
and any others currently open in the application context.
See the section called “Loading the Resource Database”
and the section called “Parsing the Command Line”
for details on the application_name,
application_class, options, and num_options arguments.
XtDisplayInitialize
calls
XrmSetDatabase
to associate the resource database of the default screen with the
display before returning.
To open a display, initialize it, and then
add it to an application context, use
XtOpenDisplay
.
Display *XtOpenDisplay(
XtAppContext app_context, const char * display_string, const char * application_name, const char * application_class, XrmOptionDescRec * options, Cardinal num_options, int * argc, char ** argv)
;
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
display_string | Specifies the display string, or NULL. |
application_name | Specifies the name of the application instance, or NULL. |
application_class | Specifies the class name of this application, which is usually the generic name for all instances of this application. |
options |
Specifies how to parse the command line for any application-specific resources.
The options argument is passed as a parameter to
|
num_options | Specifies the number of entries in the options list. |
argc | Specifies a pointer to the number of command line parameters. |
argv | Specifies the list of command line parameters. |
The
XtOpenDisplay
function calls
XOpenDisplay
with the specified display_string.
If display_string is NULL,
XtOpenDisplay
uses the current value of the -display option specified in argv.
If no display is specified in argv,
the user's default display is retrieved from the environment.
On POSIX-based systems,
this is the value of the
DISPLAY
environment variable.
If this succeeds,
XtOpenDisplay
then calls
XtDisplayInitialize
and passes it the opened display and
the value of the -name option specified in argv as the application name.
If no -name option is specified
and application_name is
non-NULL, application_name is passed to
XtDisplayInitialize
.
If application_name is NULL and if the environment variable
RESOURCE_NAME
is set, the value of
RESOURCE_NAME
is used. Otherwise, the application
name is the name used to invoke the program. On implementations that
conform to ANSI C Hosted Environment support, the application name will
be argv[0] less any directory and file type components, that is, the
final component of argv[0], if specified. If argv[0] does not exist or
is the empty string, the application name is “main”.
XtOpenDisplay
returns the newly opened display or NULL if it failed.
See the section called “Using the Intrinsics in a Multi-Threaded Environment”
for information regarding the use of
XtOpenDisplay
in multiple threads.
To close a display and remove it from an application context, use
XtCloseDisplay
.
display | Specifies the display. |
The
XtCloseDisplay
function calls
XCloseDisplay
with the specified display as soon as it is safe to do so.
If called from within an event dispatch (for example, a callback procedure),
XtCloseDisplay
does not close the display until the dispatch is complete.
Note that applications need only call
XtCloseDisplay
if they are to continue executing after closing the display;
otherwise, they should call
XtDestroyApplicationContext
.
See the section called “Using the Intrinsics in a Multi-Threaded Environment”
for information regarding the use of
XtCloseDisplay
in multiple threads.
Resource databases are specified to be created in the current process locale. During display initialization prior to creating the per-screen resource database, the Intrinsics will call out to a specified application procedure to set the locale according to options found on the command line or in the per-display resource specifications.
The callout procedure provided by the application is of type
XtLanguageProc
.
typedef String (*XtLanguageProc)(
Display display, String language, XtPointer client_data)
;
display | Passes the display. |
language | Passes the initial language value obtained from the command line or server per-display resource specifications. |
client_data |
Passes the additional client data specified in the call to
|
The language procedure allows an application to set the locale to
the value of the language resource determined by
XtDisplayInitialize
.
The function returns a new language string that
will be subsequently used by
XtDisplayInitialize
to establish the path for loading resource files. The returned
string will be copied by the Intrinsics into new memory.
Initially, no language procedure is set by the Intrinsics.
To set the language procedure for use by
XtDisplayInitialize
,
use
XtSetLanguageProc
.
XtLanguageProc XtSetLanguageProc(
XtAppContext app_context, XtLanguageProc proc, XtPointer client_data)
;
app_context | Specifies the application context in which the language procedure is to be used, or NULL. |
proc | Specifies the language procedure. |
client_data | Specifies additional client data to be passed to the language procedure when it is called. |
XtSetLanguageProc
sets the language procedure that will be called from
XtDisplayInitialize
for all subsequent Displays initialized in the specified application
context. If app_context is NULL, the specified language
procedure is registered in all application contexts created by the
calling process, including any future application contexts that may
be created. If proc is NULL, a default language procedure is
registered.
XtSetLanguageProc
returns the previously registered language procedure.
If a language procedure has not yet been registered, the return value
is unspecified, but if this return value is used in a subsequent call to
XtSetLanguageProc
,
it will cause the default language procedure to be registered.
The default language procedure does the following:
Sets the locale according to the environment. On ANSI C-based
systems this is done by calling
setlocale
(
LC_ALL
,
language ).
If an error is encountered, a warning message is issued with
XtWarning
.
Calls
XSupportsLocale
to verify that the current locale is supported.
If the locale is not supported, a warning message is issued with
XtWarning
and the locale is set to “C”.
Calls
XSetLocaleModifiers
specifying the empty string.
Returns the value of the current locale. On ANSI C-based systems this
is the return value from a final call to
setlocale
(
LC_ALL
,
NULL ).
A client wishing to use this mechanism to establish locale can do so
by calling
XtSetLanguageProc
prior to
XtDisplayInitialize
,
as in the following example.
Widget top; XtSetLanguageProc(NULL, NULL, NULL); top = XtOpenApplication(...); ...
The
XtDisplayInitialize
function first determines the language
string to be used for the specified display. It then
creates a resource database for the default screen of the display by
combining the following sources in order, with the entries in the
first named source having highest precedence:
Application command line (argc, argv).
Per-host user environment resource file on the local host.
Per-screen resource specifications from the server.
Per-display resource specifications from the server or from the user preference file on the local host.
Application-specific user resource file on the local host.
Application-specific class resource file on the local host.
When the resource database for a particular screen on the display
is needed (either internally, or when
XtScreenDatabase
is called),
it is created in the following manner using the sources listed
above in the same order:
A temporary database, the “server resource database”, is
created from the string returned by
XResourceManagerString
or, if
XResourceManagerString
returns NULL, the contents of a resource file in the user's home
directory. On POSIX-based systems, the usual name for this user
preference resource file is $HOME/.Xdefaults
.
If a language procedure has been set,
XtDisplayInitialize
first searches the command line for the option “-xnlLanguage”, or
for a -xrm option that specifies the xnlLanguage/XnlLanguage resource,
as specified by Section 2.4.
If such a resource is found, the value is assumed to be
entirely in XPCS, the X Portable Character Set. If neither option is
specified on the command line,
XtDisplayInitialize
queries the server resource database (which is assumed to be entirely
in XPCS) for the resource
name.xnlLanguage
, class Class.XnlLanguage
where name
and Class are the application_name and
application_class specified to
XtDisplayInitialize
.
The language procedure is then invoked with
the resource value if found, else the empty string. The
string returned from the language procedure is saved for all future
references in the Intrinsics that require the per-display language string.
The screen resource database is initialized by parsing the command line in the manner specified by Section 2.4.
If a language procedure has not been set,
the initial database is then queried for the resource
name.xnlLanguage
, class Class.XnlLanguage
as specified above.
If this database query fails, the server resource database is
queried; if this query also fails, the language is determined from
the environment; on POSIX-based systems, this is done by retrieving the
value of the
LANG
environment variable. If no language string is
found, the empty string is used.
This language string is saved for all future references in the Intrinsics
that require the per-display language string.
After determining the language string, the user's environment resource
file is then merged into the initial resource database if the file exists.
This file is user-, host-, and process-specific and is expected to
contain user preferences that are to override those specifications in
the per-display and per-screen resources.
On POSIX-based systems, the user's environment resource file name is
specified by the value of the
XENVIRONMENT
environment variable.
If this environment variable does not exist, the user's home directory
is searched for a file named
.Xdefaults-
host,
where host is the host name of the machine on which the
application is running.
The per-screen resource specifications are then merged into the screen
resource database, if they exist. These specifications are the string
returned by
XScreenResourceString
for the respective screen and are owned entirely by the user.
Next, the server resource database created earlier is merged into the screen resource database. The server property, and corresponding user preference file, are owned and constructed entirely by the user.
The application-specific user resource file from the local host is
then merged into the screen resource database.
This file contains user customizations and is stored
in a directory owned by the user.
Either the user or the application or both can store resource specifications
in the file. Each should be prepared to find and respect entries made
by the other.
The file name is found by calling
XrmSetDatabase
with the current screen resource database, after preserving the
original display-associated database, then calling
XtResolvePathname
with the parameters
(display, NULL, NULL, NULL, path, NULL, 0, NULL),
where path is defined in an operating-system-specific way.
On POSIX-based systems, path is defined to be the value
of the environment variable
XUSERFILESEARCHPATH
if this is defined. If
XUSERFILESEARCHPATH
is not defined, an implementation-dependent default value is used.
This default value is constrained in the following manner:
If the environment variable XAPPLRESDIR is not defined, the default XUSERFILESEARCHPATH must contain at least six entries. These entries must contain $HOME as the directory prefix, plus the following substitutions:
1. %C, %N, %L or %C, %N, %l, %t, %c 2. %C, %N, %l 3. %C, %N 4. %N, %L or %N, %l, %t, %c 5. %N, %l 6. %N
The order of these six entries within the path must be as given above. The order and use of substitutions within a given entry are implementation-dependent.
If XAPPLRESDIR is defined, the default XUSERFILESEARCHPATH must contain at least seven entries. These entries must contain the following directory prefixes and substitutions:
1. $XAPPLRESDIR with %C, %N, %L or %C, %N, %l, %t, %c 2. $XAPPLRESDIR with %C, %N, %l 3. $XAPPLRESDIR with %C, %N 4. $XAPPLRESDIR with %N, %L or %N, %l, %t, %c 5. $XAPPLRESDIR with %N, %l 6. $XAPPLRESDIR with %N 7. $HOME with %N
The order of these seven entries within the path must be as given above. The order and use of substitutions within a given entry are implementation-dependent.
Last, the application-specific class resource file from the local
host is merged into the screen resource database.
This file is owned by the application and is usually installed in
a system directory when the application is installed.
It may contain sitewide customizations specified by the system manager.
The name of the application class resource file is found by calling
XtResolvePathname
with the parameters
(display, “app-defaults”, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, NULL).
This file is expected to be provided by the developer of the application
and may be required for the application to function properly.
A simple application that wants to be assured of having a minimal
set of resources in the absence of its class resource file can declare
fallback resource specifications with
XtAppSetFallbackResources
.
Note that the customization substitution string is retrieved
dynamically by
XtResolvePathname
so that the resolved file name of the application class resource file
can be affected by any of the earlier sources for the screen resource
database, even though the contents of the class resource file have
lowest precedence. After calling
XtResolvePathname
,
the original display-associated database is restored.
To obtain the resource database for a particular screen, use
XtScreenDatabase
.
screen | Specifies the screen whose resource database is to be returned. |
The
XtScreenDatabase
function returns the fully merged resource database as specified above,
associated with the specified screen. If the specified screen
does not belong to a
Display
initialized by
XtDisplayInitialize
,
the results are undefined.
To obtain the default resource database associated with a particular display, use
XtDatabase
.
display | Specifies the display. |
The
XtDatabase
function is equivalent to
XrmGetDatabase
.
It returns the database associated with the specified display, or
NULL if a database has not been set.
To specify a default set of resource values that will be used to
initialize the resource database if no application-specific class
resource file is found (the last of the six sources listed above),
use
XtAppSetFallbackResources
.
app_context | Specifies the application context in which the fallback specifications will be used. |
specification_list | Specifies a NULL-terminated list of resource specifications to preload the database, or NULL. |
Each entry in specification_list points to a string in the format of
XrmPutLineResource
.
Following a call to
XtAppSetFallbackResources
,
when a resource database is being created for a particular screen and
the Intrinsics are not able
to find or read an application-specific class resource file according to the
rules given above and if specification_list is not NULL, the
resource specifications in specification_list will be merged
into the screen resource database in place of the application-specific
class resource file.
XtAppSetFallbackResources
is not
required to copy specification_list; the caller must ensure that the
contents of the list and of the strings addressed by the list remain
valid until all displays are initialized or until
XtAppSetFallbackResources
is called again. The value NULL for
specification_list removes any previous fallback resource specification
for the application context. The intended use for fallback resources
is to provide a minimal
number of resources that will make the application usable (or at
least terminate with helpful diagnostic messages) when some problem
exists in finding and loading the application defaults file.
The
XtOpenDisplay
function first parses the command line for the following options:
-display |
Specifies the display name for
|
-name |
Sets the resource name prefix,
which overrides the application name passed to
|
-xnllanguage | Specifies the initial language string for establishing locale and for finding application class resource files. |
XtDisplayInitialize
has a table of standard command line options that are passed to
XrmParseCommand
for adding resources to the resource database,
and it takes as a parameter additional
application-specific resource abbreviations.
The format of this table is described in Section 15.9 in Xlib — C Language X Interface.
typedef enum { XrmoptionNoArg, /* Value is specified in OptionDescRec.value */ XrmoptionIsArg, /* Value is the option string itself */ XrmoptionStickyArg, /* Value is characters immediately following option */ XrmoptionSepArg, /* Value is next argument in argv */ XrmoptionResArg, /* Use the next argument as input to XrmPutLineResource*/ XrmoptionSkipArg, /* Ignore this option and the next argument in argv */ XrmoptionSkipNArgs, /* Ignore this option and the next */ /* OptionDescRec.value arguments in argv */ XrmoptionSkipLine /* Ignore this option and the rest of argv */ } XrmOptionKind; typedef struct { char *option; /* Option name in argv */ char *specifier; /* Resource name (without application name) */ XrmOptionKind argKind; /* Location of the resource value */ XPointer value; /* Value to provide if XrmoptionNoArg */ } XrmOptionDescRec, *XrmOptionDescList;
The standard table contains the following entries:
Option String | Resource Name | Argument Kind | Resource Value |
---|---|---|---|
-background | *background | SepArg | next argument |
-bd | *borderColor | SepArg | next argument |
-bg | *background | SepArg | next argument |
-borderwidth | .borderWidth | SepArg | next argument |
-bordercolor | *borderColor | SepArg | next argument |
-bw | .borderWidth | SepArg | next argument |
-display | .display | SepArg | next argument |
-fg | *foreground | SepArg | next argument |
-fn | *font | SepArg | next argument |
-font | *font | SepArg | next argument |
-foreground | *foreground | SepArg | next argument |
-geometry | .geometry | SepArg | next argument |
-iconic | .iconic | NoArg | "true" |
-name | .name | SepArg | next argument |
-reverse | .reverseVideo | NoArg | "on" |
-rv | .reverseVideo | NoArg | "on" |
+rv | .reverseVideo | NoArg | "off" |
-selectionTimeout | .selectionTimeout | SepArg | next argument |
-synchronous | .synchronous | NoArg | "on" |
+synchronous | .synchronous | NoArg | "off" |
-title | .title | SepArg | next argument |
-xnllanguage | .xnlLanguage | SepArg | next argument |
-xrm | next argument | ResArg | next argument |
-xtsessionID | .sessionID | SepArg | next argument |
Note that any unique abbreviation for an option name in the standard table or in the application table is accepted.
If reverseVideo is
True
,
the values of
XtDefaultForeground
and
XtDefaultBackground
are exchanged for all screens on the Display.
The value of the synchronous resource specifies whether or not
Xlib is put into synchronous mode. If a value is found in the resource
database during display initialization,
XtDisplayInitialize
makes a call to
XSynchronize
for all display
connections currently open in the application context. Therefore,
when multiple displays are initialized in the same application
context, the most recent value specified for the synchronous resource
is used for all displays in the application context.
The value of the selectionTimeout resource applies to all displays opened in the same application context. When multiple displays are initialized in the same application context, the most recent value specified is used for all displays in the application context.
The -xrm option provides a method of setting any resource in an application.
The next argument should be a quoted string identical in format to a line in
the user resource file.
For example,
to give a red background to all command buttons in an application named
xmh
,
you can start it up as
xmh -xrm 'xmh*Command.background: red'
When it parses the command line,
XtDisplayInitialize
merges the application option table with the standard option table
before calling the Xlib
XrmParseCommand
function.
An entry in the application table with the same name as an entry
in the standard table overrides the standard table entry.
If an option name is a prefix of another option name,
both names are kept in the merged table.
The Intrinsics reserve all option names
beginning with the characters “-xt” for future standard uses.
The creation of widget instances is a three-phase process:
The widgets are allocated and initialized with resources and are optionally added to the managed subset of their parent.
All composite widgets are notified of their managed children in a bottom-up traversal of the widget tree.
The widgets create X windows, which then are mapped.
To start the first phase,
the application calls
XtCreateWidget
for all its widgets and adds some (usually, most or all) of its widgets
to their respective parents' managed set by calling
XtManageChild
.
To avoid an O(n2) creation process where each composite widget
lays itself out each time a widget is created and managed,
parent widgets are not notified of changes in their managed set
during this phase.
After all widgets have been created,
the application calls
XtRealizeWidget
with the top-level widget to execute the second and third phases.
XtRealizeWidget
first recursively traverses the widget tree in a postorder (bottom-up)
traversal and then notifies each composite widget with one
or more managed children by means of its change_managed procedure.
Notifying a parent about its managed set involves geometry layout and possibly geometry negotiation. A parent deals with constraints on its size imposed from above (for example, when a user specifies the application window size) and suggestions made from below (for example, when a primitive child computes its preferred size). One difference between the two can cause geometry changes to ripple in both directions through the widget tree. The parent may force some of its children to change size and position and may issue geometry requests to its own parent in order to better accommodate all its children. You cannot predict where anything will go on the screen until this process finishes.
Consequently, in the first and second phases, no X windows are actually created, because it is likely that they will get moved around after creation. This avoids unnecessary requests to the X server.
Finally,
XtRealizeWidget
starts the third phase by making a preorder (top-down) traversal
of the widget tree, allocates an X window to each widget by means of
its realize procedure, and finally maps the widgets that are managed.
Many Intrinsics functions may be passed pairs of resource names and
values.
These are passed as an arglist, a pointer to an array of
Arg
structures, which contains
typedef struct { String name; XtArgVal value; } Arg, *ArgList;
where
XtArgVal
is as defined in Section 1.5.
If the size of the resource is less than or equal to the size of an
XtArgVal
,
the resource value is stored directly in value;
otherwise, a pointer to it is stored in value.
To set values in an
ArgList
,
use
XtSetArg
.
arg | Specifies the name/value pair to set. |
name | Specifies the name of the resource. |
value |
Specifies the value of the resource if it will fit in an
|
The
XtSetArg
function is usually used in a highly stylized manner to
minimize the probability of making a mistake; for example:
Arg args[20]; int n; n = 0; XtSetArg(args[n], XtNheight, 100); n++; XtSetArg(args[n], XtNwidth, 200); n++; XtSetValues(widget, args, n);
Alternatively, an application can statically declare the argument list
and use
XtNumber
:
static Args args[] = { {XtNheight, (XtArgVal) 100}, {XtNwidth, (XtArgVal) 200}, }; XtSetValues(Widget, args, XtNumber(args));
Note that you should not use expressions with side effects such as
auto-increment or auto-decrement
within the first argument to
XtSetArg
.
XtSetArg
can be implemented as a macro that evaluates the first argument twice.
To merge two
arglist arrays, use
XtMergeArgLists
.
args1 | Specifies the first argument list. |
num_args1 | Specifies the number of entries in the first argument list. |
args2 | Specifies the second argument list. |
num_args2 | Specifies the number of entries in the second argument list. |
The
XtMergeArgLists
function allocates enough storage to hold the combined
arglist arrays and copies them into it.
Note that it does not check for duplicate entries.
The length of the returned list is the sum of the lengths of the
specified lists.
When it is no longer needed,
free the returned storage by using
XtFree
.
All Intrinsics interfaces that require
ArgList
arguments have analogs
conforming to the ANSI C variable argument list
(traditionally called “varargs”)
calling convention. The name of the analog is formed by prefixing
“Va” to the name of the corresponding
ArgList
procedure; e.g.,
XtVaCreateWidget
.
Each procedure named XtVa
something takes as its
last arguments, in place of the corresponding
ArgList
/
Cardinal
parameters, a variable parameter list of resource name and
value pairs where each name is of type
String
and each value is of type
XtArgVal
.
The end of the list is identified by a name entry
containing NULL. Developers writing in the C language wishing to pass
resource name and value pairs to any of these interfaces may use the
ArgList
and varargs forms interchangeably.
Two special names are defined for use only in varargs lists:
XtVaTypedArg
and
XtVaNestedList
.
#define XtVaTypedArg "XtVaTypedArg"
If the name
XtVaTypedArg
is specified in place of a resource
name, then the following four arguments are interpreted as a
name/type/value/size tuple where name is of type
String
,
type is of type
String
,
value is of type
XtArgVal
,
and size is of type int. When a varargs list containing
XtVaTypedArg
is processed, a resource type
conversion (see the section called “Resource Conversions”) is performed if necessary to convert the
value into the format required by the associated resource. If type is
XtRString, then value contains a pointer to the string and size
contains the number of bytes allocated, including the trailing null
byte. If type is not XtRString, then if size is
less than or equal to
sizeof
(XtArgVal
), the value should be the data cast to the type
XtArgVal
,
otherwise value is a pointer to the data. If the type
conversion fails for any reason, a warning message is issued and the
list entry is skipped.
#define XtVaNestedList "XtVaNestedList"
If the name
XtVaNestedList
is specified in place of a resource name,
then the following argument is interpreted as an
XtVarArgsList
value, which specifies another
varargs list that is logically inserted into the original list at the
point of declaration. The end of the nested list is identified with a
name entry containing NULL. Varargs lists may nest to any depth.
To dynamically allocate a varargs list for use with
XtVaNestedList
in multiple calls, use
XtVaCreateArgsList
.
typedef XtPointer XtVarArgsList;
unused | This argument is not currently used and must be specified as NULL. |
... | Specifies a variable parameter list of resource name and value pairs. |
The
XtVaCreateArgsList
function allocates memory and copies its arguments into a
single list pointer, which may be used with
XtVaNestedList
.
The end of
both lists is identified by a name entry containing NULL. Any entries
of type
XtVaTypedArg
are copied as specified without applying
conversions. Data passed by reference (including Strings) are not
copied, only the pointers themselves; the caller must ensure that the
data remain valid for the lifetime of the created varargs list. The
list should be freed using
XtFree
when no longer needed.
Use of resource files and of the resource database is generally encouraged over lengthy arglist or varargs lists whenever possible in order to permit modification without recompilation.
To create an instance of a widget, use
XtCreateWidget
.
Widget XtCreateWidget(
const char * name, WidgetClass object_class, Widget parent, ArgList args, Cardinal num_args)
;
name | Specifies the resource instance name for the created widget, which is used for retrieving resources and, for that reason, should not be the same as any other widget that is a child of the same parent. |
object_class | Specifies the widget class pointer for the created object. Must be objectClass or any subclass thereof. |
parent | Specifies the parent widget. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
args | Specifies the argument list to override any other resource specifications. |
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in the argument list. |
The
XtCreateWidget
function performs all the boilerplate operations of widget
creation, doing the following in order:
Checks to see if the class_initialize procedure has been called for this class and for all superclasses and, if not, calls those necessary in a superclass-to-subclass order.
If the specified class is not
coreWidgetClass
or a subclass thereof,
and the parent's class is a subclass of
compositeWidgetClass
and either no extension record in
the parent's composite class part extension field exists with the
record_type
NULLQUARK
or the accepts_objects field in the extension
record is
False
,
XtCreateWidget
issues a fatal error; see the section called “Addition of Children to a Composite Widget: The insert_child Procedure” and Chapter 12, Nonwidget Objects.
If the specified class contains an extension record in the object class
part extension field with record_type
NULLQUARK
and the allocate field is not NULL,
the procedure is invoked to allocate memory
for the widget instance. If the parent is a member of the class
constraintWidgetClass
,
the procedure also allocates memory for the
parent's constraints and stores the address of this memory into the
constraints field. If no allocate procedure is found, the Intrinsics
allocate memory for the widget and, when applicable, the constraints,
and initializes the constraints field.
Initializes the Core nonresource data fields self, parent, widget_class, being_destroyed, name, managed, window, visible, popup_list, and num_popups.
Initializes the resource fields (for example, background_pixel)
by using the
CoreClassPart
resource lists specified for this class and all superclasses.
If the parent is a member of the class
constraintWidgetClass
,
initializes the resource fields of the constraints record
by using the
ConstraintClassPart
resource lists specified for the parent's class
and all superclasses up to
constraintWidgetClass
.
Calls the initialize procedures for the widget starting at the Object initialize procedure on down to the widget's initialize procedure.
If the parent is a member of the class
constraintWidgetClass
,
calls the
ConstraintClassPart
initialize procedures,
starting at
constraintWidgetClass
on down to the parent's
ConstraintClassPart
initialize procedure.
If the parent is a member of the class
compositeWidgetClass
,
puts the widget into its parent's children list by calling its parent's
insert_child procedure.
For further information,
see the section called “Addition of Children to a Composite Widget: The insert_child Procedure”.
To create an instance of a widget using varargs lists, use
XtVaCreateWidget
.
name | Specifies the resource name for the created widget. |
object_class | Specifies the widget class pointer for the created object. Must be objectClass or any subclass thereof. |
parent | Specifies the parent widget. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
... | Specifies the variable argument list to override any other resource specifications. |
The
XtVaCreateWidget
procedure is identical in function to
XtCreateWidget
with the args and num_args parameters replaced by a varargs list,
as described
in Section 2.5.1.
An application can have multiple top-level widgets, each of which
specifies a unique widget tree
that can potentially be on different screens or displays.
An application uses
XtAppCreateShell
to create independent widget trees.
Widget XtAppCreateShell(
const char * name, const char * application_class, WidgetClass widget_class, Display * display, ArgList args, Cardinal num_args)
;
name |
Specifies the instance name of the shell widget.
If name is NULL,
the application name passed to
|
application_class |
Specifies the resource class string to be used in
place of the widget class_name string when
widget_class is
|
widget_class |
Specifies the widget class for the top-level widget (e.g.,
|
display | Specifies the display for the default screen and for the resource database used to retrieve the shell widget resources. |
args | Specifies the argument list to override any other resource specifications. |
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in the argument list. |
The
XtAppCreateShell
function
creates a new shell widget instance as the root of a widget tree.
The screen resource for this widget is determined by first scanning
args for the XtNscreen argument. If no XtNscreen argument is
found, the resource database associated with the default screen of
the specified display is queried for the resource name.screen,
class Class.Screen where Class is the specified
application_class if widget_class is
applicationShellWidgetClass
or a subclass thereof. If widget_class is not
applicationShellWidgetClass
or a subclass, Class is the class_name
field from the
CoreClassPart
of the specified widget_class.
If this query fails, the default
screen of the specified display is used. Once the screen is determined,
the resource database associated with that screen is used to retrieve
all remaining resources for the shell widget not specified in
args. The widget name and Class as determined above are
used as the leftmost (i.e., root) components in all fully qualified
resource names for objects within this widget tree.
If the specified widget class is a subclass of WMShell, the name and
Class as determined above will be stored into the
WM_CLASS
property on the widget's window when it becomes realized.
If the specified widget_class is
applicationShellWidgetClass
or a subclass thereof, the
WM_COMMAND
property will also be set from the values of the XtNargv and
XtNargc resources.
To create multiple top-level shells within a single (logical) application, you can use one of two methods:
Designate one shell as the real top-level shell and
create the others as pop-up children of it by using
XtCreatePopupShell
.
Have all shells as pop-up children of an unrealized top-level shell.
The first method, which is best used when there is a clear choice for what is the main window, leads to resource specifications like the following:
xmail.geometry:... (the main window) xmail.read.geometry:... (the read window) xmail.compose.geometry:... (the compose window)
The second method, which is best if there is no main window, leads to resource specifications like the following:
xmail.headers.geometry:... (the headers window) xmail.read.geometry:... (the read window) xmail.compose.geometry:... (the compose window)
To create a top-level widget that is the root of a widget tree using
varargs lists, use
XtVaAppCreateShell
.
Widget XtVaAppCreateShell(
const char * name, const char * application_class, WidgetClass widget_class, Display * display, ...)
;
name |
Specifies the instance name of the shell widget.
If name is NULL,
the application name passed to
|
application_class |
Specifies the resource class string to be used in
place of the widget class_name string when
widget_class is
|
widget_class | Specifies the widget class for the top-level widget. |
display | Specifies the display for the default screen and for the resource database used to retrieve the shell widget resources. |
... | Specifies the variable argument list to override any other resource specifications. |
The
XtVaAppCreateShell
procedure is identical in function to
XtAppCreateShell
with the args and num_args parameters replaced by a varargs list, as
described in Section 2.5.1.
To initialize the Intrinsics internals, create an application context,
open and initialize a display, and create the initial root shell
instance, an application may use
XtOpenApplication
or
XtVaOpenApplication
.
Widget XtOpenApplication(
XtAppContext * app_context_return, const char * application_class, XrmOptionDescList options, Cardinal num_options, int * argc_in_out, char ** argv_in_out, String * fallback_resources, WidgetClass widget_class, ArgList args, Cardinal num_args)
;
app_context_return | Returns the application context, if non-NULL. |
application_class | Specifies the class name of the application. |
options | Specifies the command line options table. |
num_options | Specifies the number of entries in options. |
argc_in_out | Specifies a pointer to the number of command line arguments. |
argv_in_out | Specifies a pointer to the command line arguments. |
fallback_resources | Specifies resource values to be used if the application class resource file cannot be opened or read, or NULL. |
widget_class | Specifies the class of the widget to be created. Must be shellWidgetClass or a subclass. |
args | Specifies the argument list to override any other resource specifications for the created shell widget. |
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in the argument list. |
The
XtOpenApplication
function calls
XtToolkitInitialize
followed by
XtCreateApplicationContext
,
then calls
XtOpenDisplay
with display_string NULL and
application_name NULL, and finally calls
XtAppCreateShell
with name NULL, the specified widget_class,
an argument list and count,
and returns the created shell.
The recommended widget_class is
sessionShellWidgetClass
.
The argument list and count are created by merging
the specified args and num_args with a list
containing the specified argc and argv.
The modified argc and argv returned by
XtDisplayInitialize
are returned in argc_in_out and argv_in_out. If
app_context_return is not NULL, the created application context is
also returned. If the display specified by the command line cannot be
opened, an error message is issued and
XtOpenApplication
terminates the application. If fallback_resources is non-NULL,
XtAppSetFallbackResources
is called with the value prior to calling
XtOpenDisplay
.
Widget XtVaOpenApplication(
XtAppContext * app_context_return, const char * application_class, XrmOptionDescList options, Cardinal num_options, int * argc_in_out, char ** argv_in_out, String * fallback_resources, WidgetClass widget_class, ...)
;
app_context_return | Returns the application context, if non-NULL. |
application_class | Specifies the class name of the application. |
options | Specifies the command line options table. |
num_options | Specifies the number of entries in options. |
argc_in_out | Specifies a pointer to the number of command line arguments. |
argv_in_out | Specifies the command line arguments array. |
fallback_resources | Specifies resource values to be used if the application class resource file cannot be opened, or NULL. |
widget_class | Specifies the class of the widget to be created. Must be shellWidgetClass or a subclass. |
... | Specifies the variable argument list to override any other resource specifications for the created shell. |
The
XtVaOpenApplication
procedure is identical in function to
XtOpenApplication
with the args and num_args parameters replaced by a varargs list,
as described
in Section 2.5.1.
A widget class may optionally provide an instance allocation procedure
in the
ObjectClassExtension
record.
When the call to create a widget includes a varargs list containing
XtVaTypedArg
,
these arguments will be passed to the allocation procedure in an
XtTypedArgList
.
typedef struct { String name; String type; XtArgVal value; int size; } XtTypedArg, *XtTypedArgList;
The allocate procedure pointer in the
ObjectClassExtension
record is of type
(*XtAllocateProc)
.
typedef void (*XtAllocateProc)(
WidgetClass widget_class, Cardinal* constraint_size, Cardinal* more_bytes, ArgList args, Cardinal* num_args, XtTypedArgList typed_args, Cardinal* num_typed_args, Widget* new_return, XtPointer* more_bytes_return)
;
widget_class | Specifies the widget class of the instance to allocate. |
constraint_size | Specifies the size of the constraint record to allocate, or 0. |
more_bytes | Specifies the number of auxiliary bytes of memory to allocate. |
args | Specifies the argument list as given in the call to create the widget. |
num_args | Specifies the number of arguments. |
typed_args | Specifies the list of typed arguments given in the call to create the widget. |
num_typed_args | Specifies the number of typed arguments. |
new_return | Returns a pointer to the newly allocated instance, or NULL in case of error. |
more_bytes_return | Returns the auxiliary memory if it was requested, or NULL if requested and an error occurred; otherwise, unchanged. |
At widget allocation time, if an extension record with record_type
equal to
NULLQUARK
is located through the object class part extension field
and the allocate field is not NULL, the
(*XtAllocateProc)
will be invoked to allocate memory for the widget. If no ObjectClassPart
extension record is declared with record_type equal to
NULLQUARK,
then
XtInheritAllocate
and
XtInheritDeallocate
are assumed.
If no
(*XtAllocateProc)
is found, the Intrinsics will allocate memory for the widget.
An
(*XtAllocateProc)
must perform the following:
Allocate memory for the widget instance and return it in new_return. The memory must be at least wc->core_class.widget_size bytes in length, double-word aligned.
Initialize the core.constraints field in the instance record to NULL or to point to a constraint record. If constraint_size is not 0, the procedure must allocate memory for the constraint record. The memory must be double-word aligned.
If more_bytes is not 0, then the address of a block of memory at least more_bytes in size, double-word aligned, must be returned in the more_bytes_return parameter, or NULL to indicate an error.
A class allocation procedure that envelops the allocation procedure of a superclass must rely on the enveloped procedure to perform the instance and constraint allocation. Allocation procedures should refrain from initializing fields in the widget record except to store pointers to newly allocated additional memory. Under no circumstances should an allocation procedure that envelopes its superclass allocation procedure modify fields in the instance part of any superclass.
The initialize procedure pointer in a widget class is of type
(*XtInitProc)
.
request | Specifies a copy of the widget with resource values as requested by the argument list, the resource database, and the widget defaults. |
new | Specifies the widget with the new values, both resource and nonresource, that are actually allowed. |
args |
Specifies the argument list passed by the client, for
computing derived resource values.
If the client created the widget using a varargs form, any resources
specified via
|
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in the argument list. |
An initialization procedure performs the following:
Allocates space for and copies any resources referenced by address
that the client is allowed to free or modify
after the widget has been created.
For example,
if a widget has a field that is a
String
,
it may choose not to
depend on the characters at that address remaining constant
but dynamically allocate space for the string and copy it to the new space.
Widgets that do not copy one or more resources referenced
by address should clearly so state in their user documentation.
It is not necessary to allocate space for or to copy callback lists.
Computes values for unspecified resource fields. For example, if width and height are zero, the widget should compute an appropriate width and height based on its other resources.
A widget may directly assign only its own width and height within the initialize, initialize_hook, set_values, and set_values_hook procedures; see Chapter 6, Geometry Management.
Computes values for uninitialized nonresource fields that are derived from resource fields. For example, graphics contexts (GCs) that the widget uses are derived from resources like background, foreground, and font.
An initialization procedure also can check certain fields for internal consistency. For example, it makes no sense to specify a colormap for a depth that does not support that colormap.
Initialization procedures are called in superclass-to-subclass order after all fields specified in the resource lists have been initialized. The initialize procedure does not need to examine args and num_args if all public resources are declared in the resource list. Most of the initialization code for a specific widget class deals with fields defined in that class and not with fields defined in its superclasses.
If a subclass does not need an initialization procedure because it does not need to perform any of the above operations, it can specify NULL for the initialize field in the class record.
Sometimes a subclass may want to overwrite values filled in by its superclass. In particular, size calculations of a superclass often are incorrect for a subclass, and in this case, the subclass must modify or recalculate fields declared and computed by its superclass.
As an example, a subclass can visually surround its superclass display. In this case, the width and height calculated by the superclass initialize procedure are too small and need to be incremented by the size of the surround. The subclass needs to know if its superclass's size was calculated by the superclass or was specified explicitly. All widgets must place themselves into whatever size is explicitly given, but they should compute a reasonable size if no size is requested.
The request and new arguments provide the necessary information for a subclass to determine the difference between an explicitly specified field and a field computed by a superclass. The request widget is a copy of the widget as initialized by the arglist and resource database. The new widget starts with the values in the request, but it has been updated by all superclass initialization procedures called so far. A subclass initialize procedure can compare these two to resolve any potential conflicts.
In the above example, the subclass with the visual surround can see if the width and height in the request widget are zero. If so, it adds its surround size to the width and height fields in the new widget. If not, it must make do with the size originally specified.
The new widget will become the actual widget instance record. Therefore, the initialization procedure should do all its work on the new widget; the request widget should never be modified. If the initialize procedure needs to call any routines that operate on a widget, it should specify new as the widget instance.
The constraint initialization procedure pointer, found in the
ConstraintClassPart
initialize field of the widget class record, is of type
(*XtInitProc)
.
The values passed to the parent constraint initialization procedures
are the same as those passed to the child's class widget initialization
procedures.
The constraints field of the request widget points to a copy of the constraints record as initialized by the arglist and resource database.
The constraint initialization procedure should compute any constraint fields derived from constraint resources. It can make further changes to the new widget to make the widget and any other constraint fields conform to the specified constraints, for example, changing the widget's size or position.
If a constraint class does not need a constraint initialization procedure,
it can specify NULL for the initialize field of the
ConstraintClassPart
in the class record.
The initialize_hook procedure is obsolete, as the same information is now available to the initialize procedure. The procedure has been retained for those widgets that used it in previous releases.
The initialize_hook procedure pointer is of type
(*XtArgsProc)
:
w | Specifies the widget. |
args |
Specifies the argument list passed by the client.
If the client created the widget using a varargs form, any resources
specified via
|
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in the argument list. |
If this procedure is not NULL, it is called immediately after the corresponding initialize procedure or in its place if the initialize field is NULL.
The initialize_hook procedure allows a widget instance to initialize nonresource data using information from the specified argument list as if it were a resource.
To realize a widget instance, use
XtRealizeWidget
.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
If the widget is already realized,
XtRealizeWidget
simply returns.
Otherwise it performs the following:
Binds all action names in the widget's translation table to procedures (see the section called “Action Names to Procedure Translations”).
Makes a postorder traversal of the widget tree rooted at the specified widget and calls each non-NULL change_managed procedure of all composite widgets that have one or more managed children.
Constructs an
XSetWindowAttributes
structure filled in with information derived from the
Core
widget fields and calls the realize procedure for the widget,
which adds any widget-specific attributes and creates the X window.
If the widget is
not a subclass of
compositeWidgetClass
,
XtRealizeWidget
returns; otherwise it continues and performs the following:
Descends recursively to each of the widget's managed children and calls the realize procedures. Primitive widgets that instantiate children are responsible for realizing those children themselves.
Maps all of the managed children windows that have mapped_when_managed
True
.
If a widget is managed but mapped_when_managed is
False
,
the widget is allocated visual space but is not displayed.
If the widget is a top-level shell widget (that is, it has no parent), and
mapped_when_managed is
True
,
XtRealizeWidget
maps the widget window.
XtCreateWidget
,
XtVaCreateWidget
,
XtRealizeWidget
,
XtManageChildren
,
XtUnmanageChildren
,
XtUnrealizeWidget
,
XtSetMappedWhenManaged
,
and
XtDestroyWidget
maintain the following invariants:
If a composite widget is realized, then all its managed children are realized.
If a composite widget is realized, then all its managed children that have
mapped_when_managed
True
are mapped.
All Intrinsics functions and all widget routines should accept
either realized or unrealized widgets.
When calling the realize or change_managed
procedures for children of a composite
widget,
XtRealizeWidget
calls the procedures in reverse order of
appearance in the
CompositePart
children list. By default, this
ordering of the realize procedures will
result in the stacking order of any newly created subwindows being
top-to-bottom in the order of appearance on the list, and the most
recently created child will be at the bottom.
To check whether or not a widget has been realized, use
XtIsRealized
.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
The
XtIsRealized
function returns
True
if the widget has been realized,
that is, if the widget has a nonzero window ID.
If the specified object is not a widget, the state of the nearest
widget ancestor is returned.
Some widget procedures (for example, set_values) might wish to operate differently after the widget has been realized.
The realize procedure pointer in a widget class is of type
(*XtRealizeProc)
.
w | Specifies the widget. |
value_mask | Specifies which fields in the attributes structure are used. |
attributes |
Specifies the window attributes to use in the
|
The realize procedure must create the widget's window.
Before calling the class realize procedure, the generic
XtRealizeWidget
function fills in a mask and a corresponding
XSetWindowAttributes
structure.
It sets the following fields in attributes and
corresponding bits in value_mask
based on information in the widget
core
structure:
The background_pixmap (or background_pixel if background_pixmap is
XtUnspecifiedPixmap
)
is filled in from the corresponding field.
The border_pixmap (or border_pixel if border_pixmap is
XtUnspecifiedPixmap
)
is filled in from the corresponding field.
The colormap is filled in from the corresponding field.
The event_mask is filled in based on the event handlers registered,
the event translations specified, whether the expose field is non-NULL,
and whether visible_interest is
True
.
The bit_gravity is set to
NorthWestGravity
if the expose field is NULL.
These or any other fields in attributes and the corresponding bits in value_mask can be set by the realize procedure.
Note that because realize is not a chained operation,
the widget class realize procedure must update the
XSetWindowAttributes
structure with all the appropriate fields from
non-Core
superclasses.
A widget class can inherit its realize procedure from its superclass
during class initialization.
The realize procedure defined for
coreWidgetClass
calls
XtCreateWindow
with the passed value_mask and attributes
and with window_class and visual set to
CopyFromParent
.
Both
compositeWidgetClass
and
constraintWidgetClass
inherit this realize procedure, and most new widget subclasses
can do the same (see the section called “Inheritance of Superclass Operations”).
The most common noninherited realize procedures set bit_gravity in the mask
and attributes to the appropriate value and then create the window.
For example, depending on its justification, Label might set bit_gravity to
WestGravity
,
CenterGravity
,
or
EastGravity
.
Consequently, shrinking it would just move the bits appropriately,
and no
exposure
event is needed for repainting.
If a composite widget's children should be realized in an order other
than that specified
(to control the stacking order, for example),
it should call
XtRealizeWidget
on its children itself in the appropriate order from within its own
realize procedure.
Widgets that have children and whose class is not a subclass of
compositeWidgetClass
are responsible for calling
XtRealizeWidget
on their children, usually from within the realize procedure.
Realize procedures cannot manage or unmanage their descendants.
Rather than call the Xlib
XCreateWindow
function explicitly, a realize procedure should normally call the Intrinsics analog
XtCreateWindow
,
which simplifies the creation of windows for widgets.
void XtCreateWindow(
Widget w, unsigned int window_class, Visual * visual, XtValueMask value_mask, XSetWindowAttributes * attributes)
;
w | Specifies the widget that defines the additional window attributed. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
window_class |
Specifies the Xlib window class (for example,
|
visual |
Specifies the visual type (usually
|
value_mask | Specifies which fields in the attributes structure are used. |
attributes |
Specifies the window attributes to use in the
|
The
XtCreateWindow
function calls the Xlib
XCreateWindow
function with values from the widget structure and the passed parameters.
Then, it assigns the created window to the widget's window field.
XtCreateWindow
evaluates the following fields of the widget core
structure: depth, screen, parent->core.window, x,
y, width, height, and
border_width.
The Core widget class definition contains the screen and window ids. The window field may be NULL for a while (see the section called “Creating Widgets” and the section called “Realizing Widgets”).
The display pointer, the parent widget, screen pointer, and window of a widget are available to the widget writer by means of macros and to the application writer by means of functions.
Display * XtDisplay(
Widget w)
;
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
XtDisplay
returns the display pointer for the specified widget.
Widget XtParent(
Widget w)
;
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
XtParent
returns the parent object for the specified widget. The returned object
will be of class Object or a subclass.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
XtScreen
returns the screen pointer for the specified widget.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
XtWindow
returns the window of the specified widget.
The display pointer, screen pointer, and window of a widget or
of the closest widget ancestor of a nonwidget object are available
by means of
XtDisplayOfObject
,
XtScreenOfObject
,
and
XtWindowOfObject
.
object | Specifies the object. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
XtDisplayOfObject
is identical in function to
XtDisplay
if the object is a widget; otherwise
XtDisplayOfObject
returns the display
pointer for the nearest ancestor of object that is of class
Widget or a subclass thereof.
object | Specifies the object. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
XtScreenOfObject
is identical in function to
XtScreen
if the object is a widget; otherwise
XtScreenOfObject
returns the screen pointer
for the nearest ancestor of object that is of class
Widget or a subclass thereof.
object | Specifies the object. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
XtWindowOfObject
is identical in function to
XtWindow
if the object is a widget; otherwise
XtWindowOfObject
returns the window for the nearest ancestor of object that is of class
Widget or a subclass thereof.
To retrieve the instance name of an object, use
XtName
.
object | Specifies the object whose name is desired. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
XtName
returns a pointer to the instance name of the specified object.
The storage is owned by the Intrinsics and must not be modified. The
name is not qualified by the names of any of the object's ancestors.
Several window attributes are locally cached in the widget instance.
Thus, they can be set by the resource manager and
XtSetValues
as well as used by routines that derive structures from these values
(for example, depth for deriving pixmaps,
background_pixel for deriving GCs, and so on) or in the
XtCreateWindow
call.
The x, y, width, height, and border_width
window attributes are available to
geometry managers.
These fields are maintained synchronously inside the Intrinsics.
When an
XConfigureWindow
is issued by the Intrinsics on the widget's window (on request of its parent),
these values are updated immediately rather than some time later
when the server generates a
ConfigureNotify
event.
(In fact, most widgets do not select
SubstructureNotify
events.)
This ensures that all geometry calculations are based on the internally
consistent toolkit world rather than on either
an inconsistent world updated by asynchronous
ConfigureNotify
events or a consistent, but slow, world in which geometry managers
ask the server
for window sizes whenever they need to lay out their managed children
(see Chapter 6, Geometry Management).
To destroy the windows associated with a widget and its
non-pop-up descendants, use
XtUnrealizeWidget
.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
If the widget is currently unrealized,
XtUnrealizeWidget
simply returns. Otherwise it performs the following:
Unmanages the widget if the widget is managed.
Makes a postorder (child-to-parent) traversal of the widget tree rooted at the specified widget and, for each widget that has declared a callback list resource named “unrealizeCallback”, executes the procedures on the XtNunrealizeCallback list.
Destroys the widget's window and any subwindows by calling
XDestroyWindow
with the specified widget's window field.
Any events in the queue or which arrive following a call to
XtUnrealizeWidget
will be dispatched as if the window(s) of the
unrealized widget(s) had never existed.
The Intrinsics provide support
To destroy all the pop-up children of the widget being destroyed and destroy all children of composite widgets.
To remove (and unmap) the widget from its parent.
To call the callback procedures that have been registered to trigger when the widget is destroyed.
To minimize the number of things a widget has to deallocate when destroyed.
To minimize the number of
XDestroyWindow
calls when destroying a widget tree.
To destroy a widget instance, use
XtDestroyWidget
.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
The
XtDestroyWidget
function provides the only method of destroying a widget,
including widgets that need to destroy themselves.
It can be called at any time,
including from an application callback routine of the widget being destroyed.
This requires a two-phase destroy process in order to avoid dangling
references to destroyed widgets.
In phase 1,
XtDestroyWidget
performs the following:
If the being_destroyed field of the widget is
True
,
it returns immediately.
Recursively descends the widget tree and
sets the being_destroyed field to
True
for the widget and all normal and pop-up children.
Adds the widget to a list of widgets (the destroy list) that should be destroyed when it is safe to do so.
Entries on the destroy list satisfy the invariant that if w2 occurs after w1 on the destroy list, then w2 is not a descendent, either normal or pop-up, of w1.
Phase 2 occurs when all procedures that should execute as a result of
the current event have been called, including all procedures registered with
the event and translation managers,
that is, when the current invocation of
XtDispatchEvent
is about to return, or immediately if not in
XtDispatchEvent
.
In phase 2,
XtDestroyWidget
performs the following on each entry in the destroy list in the order
specified:
If the widget is not a pop-up child and the widget's parent is a subclass of
compositeWidgetClass
,
and if the parent is not being destroyed,
it calls
XtUnmanageChild
on the widget and then calls the widget's parent's delete_child procedure
(see the section called “Deletion of Children: The delete_child Procedure”).
Calls the destroy callback procedures registered on the widget and all normal and pop-up descendants in postorder (it calls child callbacks before parent callbacks).
The
XtDestroyWidget
function then makes second traversal of the widget and all normal
and pop-up descendants to perform the following three items on each
widget in postorder:
If the widget is not a pop-up child and the widget's parent is a subclass of
constraintWidgetClass
,
it calls the
ConstraintClassPart
destroy procedure for the parent,
then for the parent's superclass,
until finally it calls the
ConstraintClassPart
destroy procedure for
constraintWidgetClass
.
Calls the
CoreClassPart
destroy procedure declared in the widget class,
then the destroy procedure declared in its superclass,
until finally it calls the destroy procedure declared in the Object
class record. Callback lists are deallocated.
If the widget class object class part contains an
ObjectClassExtension
record with the record_type
NULLQUARK
and the deallocate field is not NULL,
calls the deallocate procedure to deallocate the instance and if one
exists, the constraint record. Otherwise, the Intrinsics will deallocate
the widget instance record and if one exists, the constraint record.
Calls
XDestroyWindow
if the specified widget is realized (that is, has an X window).
The server recursively destroys all normal descendant windows.
(Windows of realized pop-up Shell children, and their
descendants, are destroyed by a shell class destroy procedure.)
When an application needs to perform additional processing during the destruction of a widget, it should register a destroy callback procedure for the widget. The destroy callback procedures use the mechanism described in Chapter 8, Callbacks. The destroy callback list is identified by the resource name XtNdestroyCallback.
For example, the following adds an application-supplied destroy callback
procedure ClientDestroy with client data to a widget by calling
XtAddCallback
.
XtAddCallback(w, XtNdestroyCallback, ClientDestroy, client_data)
Similarly, the following removes the application-supplied destroy callback
procedure ClientDestroy by calling
XtRemoveCallback
.
XtRemoveCallback(w, XtNdestroyCallback, ClientDestroy, client_data)
The ClientDestroy argument is of type
(*XtCallbackProc)
;
see the section called “Using Callback Procedure and Callback List Definitions”.
The destroy procedure pointers in the
ObjectClassPart
,
RectObjClassPart
,
and
CoreClassPart
structures are of type
XtWidgetProc
.
w | Specifies the widget being destroyed. |
The destroy procedures are called in subclass-to-superclass order. Therefore, a widget's destroy procedure should deallocate only storage that is specific to the subclass and should ignore the storage allocated by any of its superclasses. The destroy procedure should deallocate only resources that have been explicitly created by the subclass. Any resource that was obtained from the resource database or passed in an argument list was not created by the widget and therefore should not be destroyed by it. If a widget does not need to deallocate any storage, the destroy procedure entry in its class record can be NULL.
Deallocating storage includes, but is not limited to, the following steps:
Calling
XtFree
on dynamic storage allocated with
XtMalloc
,
XtCalloc
,
and so on.
Calling
XFreePixmap
on pixmaps created with direct X calls.
Calling
XtReleaseGC
on GCs allocated with
XtGetGC
.
Calling
XFreeGC
on GCs allocated with direct X calls.
Calling
XtRemoveEventHandler
on event handlers added to other widgets.
Calling
XtRemoveTimeOut
on timers created with
XtAppAddTimeOut
.
Calling
XtDestroyWidget
for each child if the widget has children
and is not a subclass of
compositeWidgetClass
.
During destroy phase 2 for each widget, the Intrinsics remove the widget from the modal cascade, unregister all event handlers, remove all key, keyboard, button, and pointer grabs and remove all callback procedures registered on the widget. Any outstanding selection transfers will time out.
The constraint destroy procedure identified in the
ConstraintClassPart
constraintWidgetClass
.
This constraint destroy procedure pointer is of type
XtWidgetProc
.
The constraint destroy procedures are called in subclass-to-superclass order,
starting at the class of the widget's parent and ending at
constraintWidgetClass
.
Therefore, a parent's constraint destroy procedure should deallocate only
storage that is specific to the constraint subclass
and not storage allocated by any of its superclasses.
If a parent does not need to deallocate any constraint storage, the constraint destroy procedure entry in its class record can be NULL.
The deallocate procedure pointer in the
ObjectClassExtension
record is of type
XtDeallocateProc
.
typedef void (*XtDeallocateProc)(
Widget widget, XtPointer more_bytes)
;
widget | Specifies the widget being destroyed. |
more_bytes | Specifies the auxiliary memory received from the corresponding allocator along with the widget, or NULL. |
When a widget is destroyed, if an
ObjectClassExtension
record exists in the object class part extension field
with record_type
NULLQUARK
and the deallocate field is not NULL, the
XtDeallocateProc
will be called.
If no ObjectClassPart extension record is declared with record_type
equal to
NULLQUARK,
then
XtInheritAllocate
and
XtInheritDeallocate
are assumed.
The responsibilities of the deallocate procedure are to deallocate the
memory specified by more_bytes if it is not NULL,
to deallocate the constraints record as specified by the
widget's core.constraints field if it is
not NULL, and to deallocate the widget instance itself.
If no
XtDeallocateProc
is found, it is assumed that the Intrinsics
originally allocated the memory and is responsible for freeing it.
All X Toolkit applications should terminate
by calling
XtDestroyApplicationContext
and then exiting
using the
standard method for their operating system (typically, by calling
exit
for POSIX-based systems).
The quickest way to make the windows disappear while exiting is to call
XtUnmapWidget
on each top-level shell widget.
The Intrinsics have no resources beyond those in the program image,
and the X server will free its resources when its connection
to the application is broken.
Depending upon the widget set in use, it may be necessary to explicitly
destroy individual widgets or widget trees with
XtDestroyWidget
before calling
XtDestroyApplicationContext
in order to ensure that any
required widget cleanup is properly executed. The application developer
must refer to the widget documentation to learn if a widget needs to
perform cleanup beyond that performed automatically by the
operating system. If the client is a session participant
(see the section called “Session Participation”), then the client may wish to resign from the session
before exiting. See the section called “Resigning from a Session” for details.
Table of Contents
Composite widgets (widgets whose class is a subclass of
compositeWidgetClass
)
can have an arbitrary number of children.
Consequently, they are responsible for much more than primitive widgets.
Their responsibilities (either implemented directly by the widget class
or indirectly by Intrinsics functions) include:
Overall management of children from creation to destruction.
Destruction of descendants when the composite widget is destroyed.
Physical arrangement (geometry management) of a displayable subset of children (that is, the managed children).
Mapping and unmapping of a subset of the managed children.
Overall management is handled by the generic procedures
XtCreateWidget
and
XtDestroyWidget
.
XtCreateWidget
adds children to their parent by calling the parent's insert_child
procedure.
XtDestroyWidget
removes children from their parent by calling the parent's delete_child
procedure and ensures that all children of a destroyed composite widget
also get destroyed.
Only a subset of the total number of children is actually managed by the geometry manager and hence possibly visible. For example, a composite editor widget supporting multiple editing buffers might allocate one child widget for each file buffer, but it might display only a small number of the existing buffers. Widgets that are in this displayable subset are called managed widgets and enter into geometry manager calculations. The other children are called unmanaged widgets and, by definition, are not mapped by the Intrinsics.
Children are added to and removed from their parent's managed set by using
XtManageChild
,
XtManageChildren
,
XtUnmanageChild
,
XtUnmanageChildren
,
and
XtChangeManagedSet
,
which notify the parent to recalculate the physical layout of its children
by calling the parent's change_managed procedure.
The
XtCreateManagedWidget
convenience function calls
XtCreateWidget
and
XtManageChild
on the result.
Most managed children are mapped,
but some widgets can be in a state where they take up physical space
but do not show anything.
Managed widgets are not mapped automatically
if their map_when_managed field is
False
.
The default is
True
and is changed by using
XtSetMappedWhenManaged
.
Each composite widget class declares a geometry manager, which is responsible for figuring out where the managed children should appear within the composite widget's window. Geometry management techniques fall into four classes:
Fixed boxes | Fixed boxes have a fixed number of children created by the parent. All these children are managed, and none ever makes geometry manager requests. |
Homogeneous boxes | Homogeneous boxes treat all children equally and apply the same geometry constraints to each child. Many clients insert and delete widgets freely. |
Heterogeneous boxes | Heterogeneous boxes have a specific location where each child is placed. This location usually is not specified in pixels, because the window may be resized, but is expressed rather in terms of the relationship between a child and the parent or between the child and other specific children. The class of heterogeneous boxes is usually a subclass of Constraint. |
Shell boxes |
Shell boxes typically have only one child,
and the child's size is usually
exactly the size of the shell.
The geometry manager must communicate with the window manager, if it exists,
and the box must also accept
|
To add a child to
the parent's list of children, the
XtCreateWidget
function calls the parent's class routine insert_child.
The insert_child procedure pointer in a composite widget is of type
XtWidgetProc
.
w | Passes the newly created child. |
Most composite widgets inherit their superclass's operation.
The insert_child routine in
CompositeWidgetClass calls the insert_position procedure
and inserts the child at the specified position
in the children list, expanding it if necessary.
Some composite widgets define their own insert_child routine
so that they can order their children in some convenient way,
create companion controller widgets for a new widget,
or limit the number or class of their child widgets.
A composite widget class that wishes
to allow nonwidget children (see Chapter 12, Nonwidget Objects) must specify a
CompositeClassExtension
extension record as described
in the section called “CompositeClassPart Structure”
and set the accepts_objects field in this record to
True
.
If the
CompositeClassExtension
record is not specified or the
accepts_objects field is
False
,
the composite widget can assume that all its children are of a subclass of Core
without an explicit subclass test in the insert_child procedure.
If there is not enough room to insert a new child in the children array (that is, num_children is equal to num_slots), the insert_child procedure must first reallocate the array and update num_slots. The insert_child procedure then places the child at the appropriate position in the array and increments the num_children field.
Instances of composite widgets sometimes need to specify more about the order in which their children are kept. For example, an application may want a set of command buttons in some logical order grouped by function, and it may want buttons that represent file names to be kept in alphabetical order without constraining the order in which the buttons are created.
An application controls the presentation order of a set of children by
supplying an
XtNinsertPosition
resource.
The insert_position procedure pointer in a composite widget instance is of type
(*XtOrderProc)
.
w | Passes the newly created widget. |
Composite widgets that allow clients to order their children (usually homogeneous boxes) can call their widget instance's insert_position procedure from the class's insert_child procedure to determine where a new child should go in its children array. Thus, a client using a composite class can apply different sorting criteria to widget instances of the class, passing in a different insert_position procedure resource when it creates each composite widget instance.
The return value of the insert_position procedure indicates how many children should go before the widget. Returning zero indicates that the widget should go before all other children, and returning num_children indicates that it should go after all other children. The default insert_position function returns num_children and can be overridden by a specific composite widget's resource list or by the argument list provided when the composite widget is created.
To remove the child from the parent's children list, the
XtDestroyWidget
function eventually causes a call to the Composite parent's class delete_child
procedure.
The delete_child procedure pointer is of type
XtWidgetProc
.
w | Passes the child being deleted. |
Most widgets inherit the delete_child procedure from their superclass. Composite widgets that create companion widgets define their own delete_child procedure to remove these companion widgets.
The Intrinsics provide a set of generic routines to permit the addition of
widgets to or the removal of widgets from a composite widget's managed set.
These generic routines eventually call the composite widget's change_managed
procedure if the procedure pointer is non-NULL.
The change_managed procedure pointer is of type
XtWidgetProc
.
The widget argument specifies the composite widget whose managed child
set has been modified.
To add a list of widgets to the geometry-managed (and hence displayable)
subset of their Composite parent, use
XtManageChildren
.
typedef Widget *WidgetList;
children | Specifies a list of child widgets. Each child must be of class RectObj or any subclass thereof. |
num_children | Specifies the number of children in the list. |
The
XtManageChildren
function performs the following:
Issues an error if the children do not all have the same parent or
if the parent's class is not a subclass of
compositeWidgetClass
.
Returns immediately if the common parent is being destroyed;
otherwise, for each unique child on the list,
XtManageChildren
ignores the child if it already is managed or is being destroyed,
and marks it if not.
If the parent is realized and after all children have been marked, it makes some of the newly managed children viewable:
Calls the change_managed routine of the widgets' parent.
Calls
XtRealizeWidget
on each previously unmanaged child that is unrealized.
Maps each previously unmanaged child that has map_when_managed
True
.
Managing children is independent of the ordering of children and
independent of creating and deleting children.
The layout routine of the parent
should consider children whose managed field is
True
and should ignore all other children.
Note that some composite widgets, especially fixed boxes, call
XtManageChild
from their insert_child procedure.
If the parent widget is realized,
its change_managed procedure is called to notify it
that its set of managed children has changed.
The parent can reposition and resize any of its children.
It moves each child as needed by calling
XtMoveWidget
,
which first updates the x and y fields and which then calls
XMoveWindow
.
If the composite widget wishes to change the size or border width of any of
its children, it calls
XtResizeWidget
,
which first updates the
width, height, and border_width
fields and then calls
XConfigureWindow
.
Simultaneous repositioning and resizing may be done with
XtConfigureWidget
;
see the section called “Widget Placement and Sizing”.
To add a single child to its parent widget's set of managed children, use
XtManageChild
.
child | Specifies the child. Must be of class RectObj or any subclass thereof. |
The
XtManageChild
function constructs a
WidgetList
of length 1 and calls
XtManageChildren
.
To create and manage a child widget in a single procedure, use
XtCreateManagedWidget
or
XtVaCreateManagedWidget
.
Widget XtCreateManagedWidget(
const char * name, WidgetClass widget_class, Widget parent, ArgList args, Cardinal num_args)
;
name | Specifies the resource instance name for the created widget. |
widget_class | Specifies the widget class pointer for the created widget. (rC |
parent | Specifies the parent widget. Must be of class Composite or any subclass thereof. |
args | Specifies the argument list to override any other resource specifications. |
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in the argument list. |
The
XtCreateManagedWidget
function is a convenience routine that calls
XtCreateWidget
and
XtManageChild
.
name | Specifies the resource instance name for the created widget. |
widget_class | Specifies the widget class pointer for the created widget. (rC |
parent | Specifies the parent widget. Must be of class Composite or any subclass thereof. |
... | Specifies the variable argument list to override any other resource specifications. |
XtVaCreateManagedWidget
is identical in function to
XtCreateManagedWidget
with the args and num_args parameters replaced
by a varargs list, as described in Section 2.5.1.
To remove a list of children from a parent widget's managed list, use
XtUnmanageChildren
.
children | Specifies a list of child widgets. Each child must be of class RectObj or any subclass thereof. |
num_children | Specifies the number of children. |
The
XtUnmanageChildren
function performs the following:
Returns immediately if the common parent is being destroyed.
Issues an error if the children do not all have the same parent
or if the parent is not a subclass of
compositeWidgetClass
.
For each unique child on the list,
XtUnmanageChildren
ignores the child if it is unmanaged; otherwise it performs the following:
Marks the child as unmanaged.
If the child is realized and the map_when_managed field is
True
,
it is unmapped.
If the parent is realized and if any children have become unmanaged, calls the change_managed routine of the widgets' parent.
XtUnmanageChildren
does not destroy the child widgets.
Removing widgets from a parent's managed set is often a temporary banishment,
and some time later the client may manage the children again.
To destroy widgets entirely,
XtDestroyWidget
should be called instead;
see the section called “Exiting from an Application”.
To remove a single child from its parent widget's managed set, use
XtUnmanageChild
.
child | Specifies the child. Must be of class RectObj or any subclass thereof. |
The
XtUnmanageChild
function constructs a widget list
of length 1 and calls
XtUnmanageChildren
.
These functions are low-level routines that are used by generic composite widget building routines. In addition, composite widgets can provide widget-specific, high-level convenience procedures.
A client may simultaneously unmanage and manage children with a single call to the Intrinsics. In this same call the client may provide a callback procedure that can modify the geometries of one or more children. The composite widget class defines whether this single client call results in separate invocations of the change_managed method, one to unmanage and the other to manage, or in just a single invocation.
To simultaneously remove from and add to the geometry-managed
set of children of a composite parent, use
XtChangeManagedSet
.
void XtChangeManagedSet(
WidgetList unmanage_children, Cardinal num_unmanage_children, XtDoChangeProc do_change_proc, XtPointer client_data, WidgetList manage_children, Cardinal num_manage_children)
;
unmanage_children | Specifies the list of widget children to initially remove from the managed set. |
num_unmanage_children | Specifies the number of entries in the unmanage_children list. |
do_change_proc | Specifies a procedure to invoke between unmanaging and managing the children, or NULL. |
client_data | Specifies client data to be passed to the do_change_proc. |
manage_children | Specifies the list of widget children to finally add to the managed set. |
num_manage_children | Specifies the number of entries in the manage_children list. |
The
XtChangeManagedSet
function performs the following:
Returns immediately if num_unmanage_children and num_manage_children are both 0.
Issues a warning and returns if the widgets specified in the
manage_children and
the unmanage_children lists do not all have the same parent or if
that parent is not a subclass of
compositeWidgetClass
.
Returns immediately if the common parent is being destroyed.
If do_change_proc is not NULL and the parent's
CompositeClassExtension
allows_change_managed_set field is
False
,
then
XtChangeManagedSet
performs the following:
Calls
XtUnmanageChildren
(unmanage_children, num_unmanage_children).
Calls the do_change_proc.
Calls
XtManageChildren
(manage_children, num_manage_children).
Otherwise, the following is performed:
For each child on the unmanage_children list; if the child is
already unmanaged it is ignored, otherwise it is marked as unmanaged,
and if it is realized and its map_when_managed field is
True
,
it is unmapped.
If do_change_proc is non-NULL, the procedure is invoked.
For each child on the manage_children list; if the child is already managed or is being destroyed, it is ignored; otherwise it is marked as managed.
If the parent is realized and after all children have been marked,
the change_managed method of the parent is invoked, and subsequently
some of the newly managed children are made viewable by calling
XtRealizeWidget
on each previously unmanaged child that is unrealized and
mapping each previously unmanaged child that has map_when_managed
True
.
If no
CompositeClassExtension
record is found in the parent's composite class part extension field
with record type
NULLQUARK
and version greater than 1, and if
XtInheritChangeManaged
was specified in the parent's class record during class initialization,
the value of the allows_change_managed_set
field is inherited from the superclass. The value inherited from
compositeWidgetClass
for the allows_change_managed_set field is
False
.
It is not an error to include a child in both the unmanage_children and the manage_children lists. The effect of such a call is that the child remains managed following the call, but the do_change_proc is able to affect the child while it is in an unmanaged state.
The do_change_proc is of type
XtDoChangeProc
.
typedef void *XtDoChangeProc(
Widget composite_parent, WidgetList unmange_children, Cardinal *num_unmanage_children, WidgetList manage_children, Cardinal *num_manage_children, XtPointer client_data)
;
composite_parent | Passes the composite parent whose managed set is being altered. |
unmanage_children | Passes the list of children just removed from the managed set. |
num_unmanage_children | Passes the number of entries in the unmanage_children list. |
manage_children | Passes the list of children about to be added to the managed set. |
num_manage_children | Passes the number of entries in the manage_children list. |
client_data |
Passes the client data passed to
|
The do_change_proc procedure is used by the caller of
XtChangeManagedSet
to make changes to one or more children at the point when the
managed set contains the fewest entries. These changes may
involve geometry requests, and in this case the caller of
XtChangeManagedSet
may take advantage of the fact that the Intrinsics internally grant
geometry requests made by unmanaged children without invoking
the parent's geometry manager. To achieve this advantage, if
the do_change_proc procedure
changes the geometry of a child or of a descendant of a child, then
that child should be included in the unmanage_children and
manage_children lists.
To determine the managed state of a given child widget, use
XtIsManaged
.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
The
XtIsManaged
function returns
True
if the specified widget is of class RectObj or any subclass thereof
and is managed, or
False
otherwise.
A widget is normally mapped if it is managed.
However,
this behavior can be overridden by setting the XtNmappedWhenManaged resource
for the widget when it is created
or by setting the map_when_managed field to
False
.
To change the value of a given widget's map_when_managed field, use
XtSetMappedWhenManaged
.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
map_when_managed | Specifies a Boolean value that indicates the new value that is stored into the widget's map_when_managed field. |
If the widget is realized and managed,
and if map_when_managed is
True
,
XtSetMappedWhenManaged
maps the window.
If the widget is realized and managed,
and if map_when_managed is
False
,
it unmaps the window.
XtSetMappedWhenManaged
is a convenience function that is equivalent to (but slightly faster than)
calling
XtSetValues
and setting the new value for the XtNmappedWhenManaged resource
then mapping the widget as appropriate.
As an alternative to using
XtSetMappedWhenManaged
to control mapping,
a client may set mapped_when_managed to
False
and use
XtMapWidget
and
XtUnmapWidget
explicitly.
To map a widget explicitly, use
XtMapWidget
.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
To unmap a widget explicitly, use
XtUnmapWidget
.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
The Constraint
widget class is a subclass of
compositeWidgetClass
.
The name is derived from the fact that constraint widgets
may manage the geometry
of their children based on constraints associated with each child.
These constraints can be as simple as the maximum width and height
the parent will allow the child to occupy or can be as complicated as
how other children should change if this child is moved or resized.
Constraint
widgets let a parent define constraints as resources that are supplied for their children.
For example, if the
Constraint
parent defines the maximum sizes for its children,
these new size resources are retrieved for each child as if they were
resources that were defined by the child widget's class.
Accordingly,
constraint resources may be included in the argument list or resource file just
like any other resource for the child.
Constraint widgets have all the responsibilities of normal composite widgets and, in addition, must process and act upon the constraint information associated with each of their children.
To make it easy for widgets and the Intrinsics to keep track of the
constraints associated with a child,
every widget has a constraints field,
which is the address of a parent-specific structure that contains
constraint information about the child.
If a child's parent does not belong to a subclass of
constraintWidgetClass
,
then the child's constraints field is NULL.
Subclasses of Constraint can add constraint data to the constraint record defined by their superclass. To allow this, widget writers should define the constraint records in their private .h file by using the same conventions as used for widget records. For example, a widget class that needs to maintain a maximum width and height for each child might define its constraint record as follows:
typedef struct { Dimension max_width, max_height; } MaxConstraintPart; typedef struct { MaxConstraintPart max; } MaxConstraintRecord, *MaxConstraint;
A subclass of this widget class that also needs to maintain a minimum size would define its constraint record as follows:
typedef struct { Dimension min_width, min_height; } MinConstraintPart; typedef struct { MaxConstraintPart max; MinConstraintPart min; } MaxMinConstraintRecord, *MaxMinConstraint;
Constraints are allocated, initialized, deallocated, and otherwise maintained
insofar as possible by the Intrinsics.
The Constraint class record part has several entries that facilitate this.
All entries in
ConstraintClassPart
are fields and procedures that are defined and implemented by the parent,
but they are called whenever actions are performed on the parent's children.
The
XtCreateWidget
function uses the constraint_size field in the parent's class record
to allocate a constraint record when a child is created.
XtCreateWidget
also uses the constraint resources to fill in resource fields in the
constraint record associated with a child.
It then calls the constraint initialize procedure so that the parent
can compute constraint fields that are derived from constraint resources
and can possibly move or resize the child to conform to the given constraints.
When the
XtGetValues
and
XtSetValues
functions are executed
on a child, they use the constraint resources to get the values or
set the values of constraints associated with that child.
XtSetValues
then calls the constraint set_values procedures so that the parent can
recompute derived constraint fields and move or resize the child
as appropriate.
If a
Constraint
widget class or any of its superclasses have declared a
ConstraintClassExtension
record in the
ConstraintClassPart
extension
fields with a record type of
NULLQUARK
and the get_values_hook field in
the extension record is non-NULL,
XtGetValues
calls the get_values_hook
procedure(s) to allow the parent to return derived constraint fields.
The
XtDestroyWidget
function calls the constraint destroy procedure to deallocate any
dynamic storage associated with a constraint record.
The constraint record itself must not be deallocated by the constraint
destroy procedure;
XtDestroyWidget
does this automatically.
Table of Contents
Shell widgets hold an application's top-level widgets to allow them to communicate with the window manager and session manager. Shells have been designed to be as nearly invisible as possible. Clients have to create them, but they should never have to worry about their sizes.
If a shell widget is resized from the outside (typically by a window manager), the shell widget also resizes its managed child widget automatically. Similarly, if the shell's child widget needs to change size, it can make a geometry request to the shell, and the shell negotiates the size change with the outer environment. Clients should never attempt to change the size of their shells directly.
The five types of public shells are:
OverrideShell | Used for shell windows that completely bypass the window manager (for example, pop-up menu shells). |
TransientShell | Used for shell windows that have the WM_TRANSIENT_FOR property set. The effect of this property is dependent upon the window manager being used. |
TopLevelShell | Used for normal top-level windows (for example, any additional top-level widgets an application needs). |
ApplicationShell | Formerly used for the single main top-level window that the window manager identifies as an application instance and made obsolete by SessionShell. |
SessionShell | Used for the single main top-level window that the window manager identifies as an application instance and that interacts with the session manager. |
Widgets negotiate their size and position with their parent widget, that is, the widget that directly contains them. Widgets at the top of the hierarchy do not have parent widgets. Instead, they must deal with the outside world. To provide for this, each top-level widget is encapsulated in a special widget, called a shell widget.
Shell widgets, whose class is a subclass of the Composite class, encapsulate other widgets and can allow a widget to avoid the geometry clipping imposed by the parent-child window relationship. They also can provide a layer of communication with the window manager.
The eight different types of shells are:
Shell | The base class for shell widgets; provides the fields needed for all types of shells. Shell is a direct subclass of compositeWidgetClass. |
OverrideShell | A subclass of Shell; used for shell windows that completely bypass the window manager. |
WMShell | A subclass of Shell; contains fields needed by the common window manager protocol. |
VendorShell | A subclass of WMShell; contains fields used by vendor-specific window managers. |
TransientShell | A subclass of VendorShell; used for shell windows that desire the WM_TRANSIENT_FOR property. |
TopLevelShell | A subclass of VendorShell; used for normal top-level windows. |
ApplicationShell | A subclass of TopLevelShell; may be used for an application's additional root windows. |
SessionShell | A subclass of ApplicationShell; used for an application's main root window. |
Note that the classes Shell, WMShell, and VendorShell are internal and should not be instantiated or subclassed. Only OverrrideShell, TransientShell, TopLevelShell, ApplicationShell, and SessionShell are intended for public use.
Only the Shell
class has additional class fields, which are all contained in the
ShellClassExtensionRec
.
None of the other Shell classes have any additional class fields:
typedef struct { XtPointer extension; } ShellClassPart, OverrideShellClassPart, WMShellClassPart, VendorShellClassPart, TransientShellClassPart, TopLevelShellClassPart, ApplicationShellClassPart, SessionShellClassPart;
The full Shell class record definitions are:
typedef struct _ShellClassRec { CoreClassPart core_class; CompositeClassPart composite_class; ShellClassPart shell_class; } ShellClassRec;
typedef struct { See the section called “Class Extension Records”
XtPointer next_extension;
XrmQuark record_type;
long version;
Cardinal record_size;
XtGeometryHandler root_geometry_manager; See below
} ShellClassExtensionRec, *ShellClassExtension;
typedef struct _OverrideShellClassRec { CoreClassPart core_class; CompositeClassPart composite_class; ShellClassPart shell_class; OverrideShellClassPart override_shell_class; } OverrideShellClassRec;
typedef struct _WMShellClassRec { CoreClassPart core_class; CompositeClassPart composite_class; ShellClassPart shell_class; WMShellClassPart wm_shell_class; } WMShellClassRec;
typedef struct _VendorShellClassRec { CoreClassPart core_class; CompositeClassPart composite_class; ShellClassPart shell_class; WMShellClassPart wm_shell_class; VendorShellClassPart vendor_shell_class; } VendorShellClassRec;
typedef struct _TransientShellClassRec { CoreClassPart core_class; CompositeClassPart composite_class; ShellClassPart shell_class; WMShellClassPart wm_shell_class; VendorShellClassPart vendor_shell_class; TransientShellClassPart transient_shell_class; } TransientShellClassRec;
typedef struct _TopLevelShellClassRec { CoreClassPart core_class; CompositeClassPart composite_class; ShellClassPart shell_class; WMShellClassPart wm_shell_class; VendorShellClassPart vendor_shell_class; TopLevelShellClassPart top_level_shell_class; } TopLevelShellClassRec;
typedef struct _ApplicationShellClassRec { CoreClassPart core_class; CompositeClassPart composite_class; ShellClassPart shell_class; WMShellClassPart wm_shell_class; VendorShellClassPart vendor_shell_class; TopLevelShellClassPart top_level_shell_class; ApplicationShellClassPart application_shell_class; } ApplicationShellClassRec;
typedef struct _SessionShellClassRec { CoreClassPart core_class; CompositeClassPart composite_class; ShellClassPart shell_class; WMShellClassPart wm_shell_class; VendorShellClassPart vendor_shell_class; TopLevelShellClassPart top_level_shell_class; ApplicationShellClassPart application_shell_class; SessionShellClassPart session_shell_class; } SessionShellClassRec;
The single occurrences of the class records and pointers for creating instances of shells are:
extern ShellClassRec shellClassRec; extern OverrideShellClassRec overrideShellClassRec; extern WMShellClassRec wmShellClassRec; extern VendorShellClassRec vendorShellClassRec; extern TransientShellClassRec transientShellClassRec; extern TopLevelShellClassRec topLevelShellClassRec; extern ApplicationShellClassRec applicationShellClassRec; extern SessionShellClassRec sessionShellClassRec; extern WidgetClass shellWidgetClass; extern WidgetClass overrideShellWidgetClass; extern WidgetClass wmShellWidgetClass; extern WidgetClass vendorShellWidgetClass; extern WidgetClass transientShellWidgetClass; extern WidgetClass topLevelShellWidgetClass; extern WidgetClass applicationShellWidgetClass; extern WidgetClass sessionShellWidgetClass;
The following opaque types and opaque variables are defined for generic operations on widgets whose class is a subclass of Shell.
Types | Variables |
---|---|
ShellWidget | shellWidgetClass |
OverrideShellWidget | overrideShellWidgetClass |
WMShellWidget | wmShellWidgetClass |
VendorShellWidget | vendorShellWidgetClass |
TransientShellWidget | transientShellWidgetClass |
TopLevelShellWidget | topLevelShellWidgetClass |
ApplicationShellWidget | applicationShellWidgetClass |
SessionShellWidget | sessionShellWidgetClass |
ShellWidgetClass | |
OverrideShellWidgetClass | |
WMShellWidgetClass | |
VendorShellWidgetClass | |
TransientShellWidgetClass | |
TopLevelShellWidgetClass | |
ApplicationShellWidgetClass | |
SessionShellWidgetClass |
The declarations for all Intrinsics-defined shells except
VendorShell appear in
Shell.h
and
ShellP.h
.
VendorShell has separate public and private .h files which are included by
Shell.h
and
ShellP.h
.
Shell.h
uses incomplete structure definitions to ensure that the
compiler catches attempts to access private data in any of the Shell
instance or class data structures.
The symbolic constant for the
ShellClassExtension
version identifier is
XtShellExtensionVersion
(see the section called “Class Extension Records”).
The root_geometry_manager procedure acts as
the parent geometry manager for geometry requests made by shell
widgets. When a shell widget calls either
XtMakeGeometryRequest
or
XtMakeResizeRequest
,
the root_geometry_manager procedure is invoked to
negotiate the new geometry with the window manager. If the window
manager permits the new geometry, the root_geometry_manager
procedure should
return
XtGeometryYes
;
if the window manager denies the geometry
request or does not change the window geometry within some timeout
interval (equal to wm_timeout in the case of WMShells), the
root_geometry_manager procedure should return
XtGeometryNo
.
If the window manager makes some alternative geometry change, the
root_geometry_manager procedure may return either
XtGeometryNo
and handle the new geometry as a resize or
XtGeometryAlmost
in anticipation that the shell will accept the compromise. If the
compromise is not accepted, the new size must then be handled as a
resize. Subclasses of
Shell
that wish to provide their own
root_geometry_manager procedures are strongly encouraged to use enveloping to
invoke their superclass's root_geometry_manager procedure under most
situations, as the window manager interaction may be very complex.
If no
ShellClassPart
extension record is declared with record_type
equal to
NULLQUARK,
then
XtInheritRootGeometryManager
is assumed.
The various shell widgets have the following additional instance fields defined in their widget records:
typedef struct { String geometry; XtCreatePopupChildProc create_popup_child_proc; XtGrabKind grab_kind; Boolean spring_loaded; Boolean popped_up; Boolean allow_shell_resize; Boolean client_specified; Boolean save_under; Boolean override_redirect; XtCallbackList popup_callback; XtCallbackList popdown_callback; Visual * visual; } ShellPart;
typedef struct { int empty; } OverrideShellPart;
typedef struct { String title; int wm_timeout; Boolean wait_for_wm; Boolean transient; Boolean urgency; Widget client_leader; String window_role; struct _OldXSizeHints { long flags; int x, y; int width, height; int min_width, min_height; int max_width, max_height; int width_inc, height_inc; struct { int x; int y; } min_aspect, max_aspect; } size_hints; XWMHints wm_hints; int base_width, base_height, win_gravity; Atom title_encoding; } WMShellPart;
typedef struct { int vendor_specific; } VendorShellPart;
typedef struct { Widget transient_for; } TransientShellPart; typedef struct { String icon_name; Boolean iconic; Atom icon_name_encoding; } TopLevelShellPart;
typedef struct { char * class; XrmClass xrm_class; int argc; char ** argv; } ApplicationShellPart;
typedef struct { SmcConn connection; String session_id; String * restart_command; String * clone_command; String * discard_command; String * resign_command; String * shutdown_command; String * environment; String current_dir; String program_path; unsigned char restart_style; Boolean join_session; XtCallbackList save_callbacks; XtCallbackList interact_callbacks; XtCallbackList cancel_callbacks; XtCallbackList save_complete_callbacks; XtCallbackList die_callbacks; XtCallbackList error_callbacks; } SessionShellPart;
The full shell widget instance record definitions are:
typedef struct { CorePart core; CompositePart composite; ShellPart shell; } ShellRec, *ShellWidget;
typedef struct { CorePart core; CompositePart composite; ShellPart shell; OverrideShellPart override; } OverrideShellRec, *OverrideShellWidget;
typedef struct { CorePart core; CompositePart composite; ShellPart shell; WMShellPart wm; } WMShellRec, *WMShellWidget;
typedef struct { CorePart core; CompositePart composite; ShellPart shell; WMShellPart wm; VendorShellPart vendor; } VendorShellRec, *VendorShellWidget;
typedef struct { CorePart core; CompositePart composite; ShellPart shell; WMShellPart wm; VendorShellPart vendor; TransientShellPart transient; } TransientShellRec, *TransientShellWidget;
typedef struct { CorePart core; CompositePart composite; ShellPart shell; WMShellPart wm; VendorShellPart vendor; TopLevelShellPart topLevel; } TopLevelShellRec, *TopLevelShellWidget;
typedef struct { CorePart core; CompositePart composite; ShellPart shell; WMShellPart wm; VendorShellPart vendor; TopLevelShellPart topLevel; ApplicationShellPart application; } ApplicationShellRec, *ApplicationShellWidget;
typedef struct { CorePart core; CompositePart composite; ShellPart shell; WMShellPart wm; VendorShellPart vendor; TopLevelShellPart topLevel; ApplicationShellPart application; SessionShellPart session; } SessionShellRec, *SessionShellWidget;
The resource names, classes, and representation types specified in
the
shellClassRec
resource list are:
Name | Class | Representation |
---|---|---|
XtNallowShellResize | XtCAllowShellResize | XtRBoolean |
XtNcreatePopupChildProc | XtCCreatePopupChildProc | XtRFunction |
XtNgeometry | XtCGeometry | XtRString |
XtNoverrideRedirect | XtCOverrideRedirect | XtRBoolean |
XtNpopdownCallback | XtCCallback | XtRCallback |
XtNpopupCallback | XtCCallback | XtRCallback |
XtNsaveUnder | XtCSaveUnder | XtRBoolean |
XtNvisual | XtCVisual | XtRVisual |
OverrideShell declares no additional resources beyond those defined by Shell.
The resource names, classes, and representation types specified in
the
wmShellClassRec
resource list are:
Name | Class | Representation |
---|---|---|
XtNbaseHeight | XtCBaseHeight | XtRInt |
XtNbaseWidth | XtCBaseWidth | XtRInt |
XtNclientLeader | XtCClientLeader | XtRWidget |
XtNheightInc | XtCHeightInc | XtRInt |
XtNiconMask | XtCIconMask | XtRBitmap |
XtNiconPixmap | XtCIconPixmap | XtRBitmap |
XtNiconWindow | XtCIconWindow | XtRWindow |
XtNiconX | XtCIconX | XtRInt |
XtNiconY | XtCIconY | XtRInt |
XtNinitialState | XtCInitialState | XtRInitialState |
XtNinput | XtCInput | XtRBool |
XtNmaxAspectX | XtCMaxAspectX | XtRInt |
XtNmaxAspectY | XtCMaxAspectY | XtRInt |
XtNmaxHeight | XtCMaxHeight | XtRInt |
XtNmaxWidth | XtCMaxWidth | XtRInt |
XtNminAspectX | XtCMinAspectX | XtRInt |
XtNminAspectY | XtCMinAspectY | XtRInt |
XtNminHeight | XtCMinHeight | XtRInt |
XtNminWidth | XtCMinWidth | XtRInt |
XtNtitle | XtCTitle | XtRString |
XtNtitleEncoding | XtCTitleEncoding | XtRAtom |
XtNtransient | XtCTransient | XtRBoolean |
XtNwaitforwm, XtNwaitForWm | XtCWaitforwm, XtCWaitForWm | XtRBoolean |
XtNwidthInc | XtCWidthInc | XtRInt |
XtNwindowRole | XtCWindowRole | XtRString |
XtNwinGravity | XtCWinGravity | XtRGravity |
XtNwindowGroup | XtCWindowGroup | XtRWindow |
XtNwmTimeout | XtCWmTimeout | XtRInt |
XtNurgency | XtCUrgency | XtRBoolean |
The class resource list for VendorShell is implementation-defined.
The resource names, classes, and representation types that are specified in the
transientShellClassRec
resource list are:
Name | Class | Representation |
---|---|---|
XtNtransientFor | XtCTransientFor | XtRWidget |
The resource names, classes, and representation types that are specified in the
topLevelShellClassRec
resource list are:
Name | Class | Representation |
---|---|---|
XtNiconName | XtCIconName | XtRString |
XtNiconNameEncoding | XtCIconNameEncoding | XtRAtom |
XtNiconic | XtCIconic | XtRBoolean |
The resource names, classes, and representation types that are specified in the
applicationShellClassRec
resource list are:
Name | Class | Representation |
---|---|---|
XtNargc | XtCArgc | XtRInt |
XtNargv | XtCArgv | XtRStringArray |
The resource names, classes, and representation types that are specified
in the
sessionShellClassRec
resource list are:
Name | Class | Representation |
---|---|---|
XtNcancelCallback | XtCCallback | XtRCallback |
XtNcloneCommand | XtCCloneCommand | XtRCommandArgArray |
XtNconnection | XtCConnection | XtRSmcConn |
XtNcurrentDirectory | XtCCurrentDirectory | XtRDirectoryString |
XtNdieCallback | XtCCallback | XtRCallback |
XtNdiscardCommand | XtCDiscardCommand | XtRCommandArgArray |
XtNenvironment | XtCEnvironment | XtREnvironmentArray |
XtNerrorCallback | XtCCallback | XtRCallback |
XtNinteractCallback | XtCCallback | XtRCallback |
XtNjoinSession | XtCJoinSession | XtRBoolean |
XtNprogramPath | XtCProgramPath | XtRString |
XtNresignCommand | XtCResignCommand | XtRCommandArgArray |
XtNrestartCommand | XtCRestartCommand | XtRCommandArgArray |
XtNrestartStyle | XtCRestartStyle | XtRRestartStyle |
XtNsaveCallback | XtCCallback | XtRCallback |
XtNsaveCompleteCallback | XtCCallback | XtRCallback |
XtNsessionID | XtCSessionID | XtRString |
XtNshutdownCommand | XtCShutdownCommand | XtRCommandArgArray |
The default values for fields common to all classes of public shells (filled in by the Shell resource lists and the Shell initialize procedures) are:
Field | Default Value |
---|---|
geometry | NULL |
create_popup_child_proc | NULL |
grab_kind | (none) |
spring_loaded | (none) |
popped_up | False |
allow_shell_resize | False |
client_specified | (internal) |
save_under | True
for OverrideShell and TransientShell,
False
otherwise |
override_redirect | True
for OverrideShell,
False
otherwise |
popup_callback | NULL |
popdown_callback | NULL |
visual | CopyFromParent |
The geometry field specifies the size and position
and is usually given only on a command line or in a defaults file.
If the geometry field is non-NULL when
a widget of class WMShell
is realized, the geometry specification is parsed using
XWMGeometry
with a default geometry
string constructed from the values of x, y, width,
height, width_inc,
and height_inc and the size and position flags in the window manager
size hints are set. If the geometry specifies an x or y position,
then
USPosition
is set. If the geometry specifies a width or height, then
USSize
is set. Any fields in the geometry specification
override the corresponding values in the
Core x, y, width, and height fields.
If geometry is NULL or contains only a partial specification, then the
Core x, y, width, and height fields are used and
PPosition
and
PSize
are set as appropriate.
The geometry string is not copied by any of the Intrinsics
Shell classes; a client specifying the string in an arglist
or varargs list must ensure
that the value remains valid until the shell widget is realized.
For further information on the geometry string, see
Parsing the Window Geometry
in Xlib — C Language X Interface.
The create_popup_child_proc procedure is called by the
XtPopup
procedure and may remain NULL.
The grab_kind, spring_loaded,
and popped_up fields maintain widget
state information as described under
XtPopup
,
XtMenuPopup
,
XtPopdown
,
and
XtMenuPopdown
.
The allow_shell_resize field controls whether the widget contained
by the shell is allowed to try to resize itself.
If allow_shell_resize is
False
,
any geometry requests made by the child will always return
XtGeometryNo
without interacting with the window manager.
Setting save_under
True
instructs the server to attempt
to save the contents of windows obscured by the shell when it is mapped
and to restore those contents automatically when the shell is unmapped.
It is useful for pop-up menus.
Setting override_redirect
True
determines
whether the window manager can intercede when the shell window
is mapped.
For further information on override_redirect,
see Window Attributes in
Xlib — C Language X Interface
and
Pop-up Windows and
Redirection of Operations in the
Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual.
The pop-up and pop-down callbacks are called during
XtPopup
and
XtPopdown
.
The default value of the visual resource is the symbolic value
CopyFromParent
.
The Intrinsics do not need to query the parent's visual type when the
default value is used; if a client using
XtGetValues
to examine the visual type receives the value
CopyFromParent
,
it must then use
XGetWindowAttributes
if it needs the actual visual type.
The default values for Shell fields in WMShell and its subclasses are:
Field | Default Value |
---|---|
title | Icon name, if specified, otherwise the application's name |
wm_timeout | Five seconds, in units of milliseconds |
wait_for_wm | True |
transient | True
for TransientShell,
False
otherwise |
urgency | False |
client_leader | NULL |
window_role | NULL |
min_width | XtUnspecifiedShellInt |
min_height | XtUnspecifiedShellInt |
max_width | XtUnspecifiedShellInt |
max_height | XtUnspecifiedShellInt |
width_inc | XtUnspecifiedShellInt |
height_inc | XtUnspecifiedShellInt |
min_aspect_x | XtUnspecifiedShellInt |
min_aspect_y | XtUnspecifiedShellInt |
max_aspect_x | XtUnspecifiedShellInt |
max_aspect_y | XtUnspecifiedShellInt |
input | False |
initial_state | Normal |
icon_pixmap | None |
icon_window | None |
icon_x | XtUnspecifiedShellInt |
icon_y | XtUnspecifiedShellInt |
icon_mask | None |
window_group | XtUnspecifiedWindow |
base_width | XtUnspecifiedShellInt |
base_height | XtUnspecifiedShellInt |
win_gravity | XtUnspecifiedShellInt |
title_encoding | See text |
The title and
title_encoding fields are stored in the
WM_NAME
property on the shell's window by the WMShell realize procedure.
If the title_encoding field is
None
,
the title string is assumed to be in the encoding of the current
locale and the encoding of the
WM_NAME
property is set to
XStdICCTextStyle
.
If a language procedure has not been set
the default value of title_encoding is
XA_STRING, otherwise the default value is
None
.
The wm_timeout field specifies, in milliseconds,
the amount of time a shell is to wait for
confirmation of a geometry request to the window manager.
If none comes back within that time,
the shell assumes the window manager is not functioning properly
and sets wait_for_wm to
False
(later events may reset this value).
When wait_for_wm is
False
,
the shell does not wait for a response, but relies on asynchronous
notification.
If transient is
True
,
the
WM_TRANSIENT_FOR
property
will be stored on the shell window with a value as specified below.
The interpretation of this property is specific to the window manager
under which the application is run; see the
Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual
for more details.
The realize and set_values procedures of WMShell store the WM_CLIENT_LEADER property on the shell window. When client_leader is not NULL and the client leader widget is realized, the property will be created with the value of the window of the client leader widget. When client_leader is NULL and the shell widget has a NULL parent, the widget's window is used as the value of the property. When client_leader is NULL and the shell widget has a non-NULL parent, a search is made for the closest shell ancestor with a non-NULL client_leader, and if none is found the shell ancestor with a NULL parent is the result. If the resulting widget is realized, the property is created with the value of the widget's window.
When the value of window_role is not NULL, the realize and set_values procedures store the WM_WINDOW_ROLE property on the shell's window with the value of the resource.
All other resources specify fields in the window manager hints
and the window manager size hints.
The realize and set_values procedures of
WMShell
set the corresponding flag bits in the
hints if any of the fields contain nondefault values. In addition, if
a flag bit is set that refers to a field with the value
XtUnspecifiedShellInt
,
the value of the field is modified as follows:
Field | Replacement |
---|---|
base_width, base_height | 0 |
width_inc, height_inc | 1 |
max_width, max_height | 32767 |
min_width, min_height | 1 |
min_aspect_x, min_aspect_y | -1 |
max_aspect_x, max_aspect_y | -1 |
icon_x, icon_y | -1 |
win_gravity | Value returned by
XWMGeometry
if called,
else NorthWestGravity |
If the shell widget has a non-NULL parent, then the
realize and set_values procedures replace the value
XtUnspecifiedWindow
in the window_group field with the window id of the root widget
of the widget tree if the
root widget is realized. The symbolic constant
XtUnspecifiedWindowGroup
may be used to indicate that the window_group hint flag bit is not
to be set. If transient is
True
,
the shell's class is not a subclass of
TransientShell,
and window_group is not
XtUnspecifiedWindowGroup
,
the WMShell realize and set_values procedures then store the
WM_TRANSIENT_FOR
property with the value of window_group.
Transient shells have the following additional resource:
Field | Replacement |
---|---|
transient_for | NULL |
The realize and set_values procedures of
TransientShell
store the
WM_TRANSIENT_FOR
property on the shell window if transient is
True
.
If transient_for is non-NULL and the widget specified by
transient_for is realized, then its window is used as the value of the
WM_TRANSIENT_FOR
property; otherwise, the value of window_group is used.
TopLevel
shells have the the following additional resources:
Field | Default Value |
---|---|
icon_name | Shell widget's name |
iconic | False |
icon_name_encoding | See text |
The icon_name
and icon_name_encoding fields are stored in the
WM_ICON_NAME
property on the shell's window by the TopLevelShell realize
procedure.
If the icon_name_encoding field is
None
,
the icon_name string is assumed to be in the encoding of the
current locale and the encoding of the
WM_ICON_NAME
property is set to
XStdICCTextStyle
.
If a language procedure has not been set,
the default value of icon_name_encoding is
XA_STRING, otherwise the default value is
None
.
The iconic field may be used by a client to request
that the window manager iconify or deiconify the shell; the
TopLevelShell
set_values procedure will send the appropriate
WM_CHANGE_STATE
message (as specified by the Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual)
if this resource is changed from
False
to
True
and will call
XtPopup
specifying grab_kind as
XtGrabNone
if iconic is changed from
True
to
False
.
The XtNiconic resource is also an alternative way to set
the XtNinitialState resource
to indicate that a shell should be initially displayed as an icon; the
TopLevelShell
initialize procedure will set initial_state to
IconicState
if iconic is
True
.
Application shells have the following additional resources:
Field | Default Value |
---|---|
argc | 0 |
argv | NULL |
The argc and argv fields are used to initialize the standard property WM_COMMAND. See the Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual for more information.
The default values for the SessionShell instance fields, which are filled in from the resource lists and by the initialize procedure, are
Field | Default Value |
---|---|
cancel_callbacks | NULL |
clone_command | See text |
connection | NULL |
current_dir | NULL |
die_callbacks | NULL |
discard_command | NULL |
environment | NULL |
error_callbacks | NULL |
interact_callbacks | NULL |
join_session | True |
program_path | NULL |
resign_command | NULL |
restart_command | See text |
restart_style | SmRestartIfRunning |
save_callbacks | NULL |
save_complete_callbacks | NULL |
session_id | NULL |
shutdown_command | NULL |
The connection field contains the session connection object or NULL if a session connection is not being managed by this widget.
The session_id is an identification assigned to the session participant by the session manager. The session_id will be passed to the session manager as the client identifier of the previous session. When a connection is established with the session manager, the client id assigned by the session manager is stored in the session_id field. When not NULL, the session_id of the Session shell widget that is at the root of the widget tree of the client leader widget will be used to create the SM_CLIENT_ID property on the client leader's window.
If join_session is
False
,
the widget will not attempt to establish a
connection to the session manager at shell creation time.
See the section called “Joining a Session” and
the section called “Resigning from a Session”
for more information on the functionality of this resource.
The restart_command, clone_command, discard_command, resign_command, shutdown_command, environment, current_dir, program_path, and restart_style fields contain standard session properties.
When a session connection is established or newly managed by the shell, the shell initialize and set_values methods check the values of the restart_command, clone_command, and program_path resources. At that time, if restart_command is NULL, the value of the argv resource will be copied to restart_command. Whether or not restart_command was NULL, if “-xtsessionID” “<session id>” does not already appear in the restart_command, it will be added by the initialize and set_values methods at the beginning of the command arguments; if the “-xtsessionID” argument already appears with an incorrect session id in the following argument, that argument will be replaced with the current session id.
After this, the shell initialize and set_values procedures check the clone_command. If clone_command is NULL, restart_command will be copied to clone_command, except the “-xtsessionID” and following argument will not be copied.
Finally, the shell initialize and set_values procedures check the program_path. If program_path is NULL, the first element of restart_command is copied to program_path.
The possible values of restart_style are
SmRestartIfRunning
,
SmRestartAnyway
,
SmRestartImmediately
,
and
SmRestartNever
.
A resource converter is registered for this resource;
for the strings that it recognizes,
see the section called “Predefined Resource Converters”.
The resource type EnvironmentArray is a NULL-terminated array of pointers to strings; each string has the format “name=value”. The `=' character may not appear in the name, and the string is terminated by a null character.
Applications can participate in a user's session, exchanging messages with the session manager as described in the X Session Management Protocol and the X Session Management Library.
When a widget of
sessionShellWidgetClass
or a subclass is created, the widget provides support for the application
as a session participant and continues to provide support until the
widget is destroyed.
When a Session shell is created,
if connection is NULL,
and if join_session is
True
,
and if argv or restart_command is not NULL,
and if in POSIX environments the
SESSION_MANAGER
environment variable is defined,
the shell will attempt to establish a new connection with the session manager.
To transfer management of an existing session connection from an application to the shell at widget creation time, pass the existing session connection ID as the connection resource value when creating the Session shell, and if the other creation-time conditions on session participation are met, the widget will maintain the connection with the session manager. The application must ensure that only one Session shell manages the connection.
In the Session shell set_values procedure,
if join_session changes from
False
to
True
and connection is NULL and when in POSIX environments the
SESSION_MANAGER
environment variable is defined,
the shell will attempt to open a connection to the session manager.
If connection changes from NULL to non-NULL, the
Session shell
will take over management of that session connection and will set
join_session to
True
.
If join_session changes from
False
to
True
and connection is not NULL, the
Session shell will take over management of the session connection.
When a successful connection has been established, connection
contains the session connection ID for the session participant.
When the shell begins to manage the connection, it will call
XtAppAddInput
to register the handler which watches for protocol messages
from the session manager.
When the attempt to connect fails, a warning message is issued
and connection is set to NULL.
While the connection is being managed, if a
SaveYourself
,
SaveYourselfPhase2
,
Interact
,
ShutdownCancelled
,
SaveComplete
,
or
Die
message is received from the session manager, the Session shell will
call out to application callback procedures registered
on the respective callback list of the Session shell and will
send
SaveYourselfPhase2Request
,
InteractRequest
,
InteractDone
,
SaveYourselfDone
,
and
ConnectionClosed
messages as appropriate.
Initially, all of the client's session properties are undefined.
When any of the session property resource values are defined or change,
the Session shell initialize and set_values procedures
will update the client's session property value by a
SetProperties
or a
DeleteProperties
message, as appropriate.
The session ProcessID and UserID properties are always set by the shell
when it is possible to determine the value of these properties.
The session manager instigates an application checkpoint by sending a
SaveYourself
request.
Applications are responsible for saving their state in response to the
request.
When the
SaveYourself
request arrives, the procedures registered on the
Session shell's save callback list are called.
If the application does not register any save callback procedures on
the save callback list, the shell will report to the session manager
that the application failed to save its state.
Each procedure on the save callback list receives a token
in the call_data parameter.
The checkpoint token in the call_data parameter is of type
XtCheckpointToken
.
typedef struct { int save_type; int interact_style; Boolean shutdown; Boolean fast; Boolean cancel_shutdown int phase; int interact_dialog_type; /* return */ Boolean request_cancel; /* return */ Boolean request_next_phase; /* return */ Boolean save_success; /* return */ } XtCheckpointTokenRec, *XtCheckpointToken;
The save_type, interact_style, shutdown, and fast
fields of the token contain the parameters of the
SaveYourself
message.
The possible values of save_type are
SmSaveLocal
,
SmSaveGlobal
,
and
SmSaveBoth
;
these indicate the type of information to be saved.
The possible values of interact_style are
SmInteractStyleNone
,
SmInteractStyleErrors
,
and
SmInteractStyleAny
;
these indicate whether user interaction would be permitted
and, if so, what kind of interaction.
If shutdown is
True
,
the checkpoint is being performed in preparation for the end of the session.
If fast is
True
,
the client should perform the checkpoint as quickly as possible.
If cancel_shutdown is
True
,
a
ShutdownCancelled
message has been received for the current save operation.
(See the section called “Resigning from a Session”.)
The phase is used by manager clients, such as a window manager,
to distinguish between the first and second phase of a save operation.
The phase will be either 1 or 2.
The remaining fields in the checkpoint token structure are provided for
the application to communicate with the shell.
Upon entry to the first application save callback procedure, the return
fields in the token have the following initial values:
interact_dialog_type is
SmDialogNormal
;
request_cancel is
False
;
request_next_phase is
False
;
and save_success is
True
.
When a token is returned with any of the four return fields containing
a noninitial value, and when the field is applicable, subsequent tokens
passed to the application during the current save operation
will always contain the noninitial value.
The purpose of the token's save_success field is to
indicate the outcome of the entire operation to the
session manager and ultimately, to the user.
Returning
False
indicates some portion of the application state
could not be successfully saved. If any token is returned
to the shell with save_success
False
,
tokens subsequently received
by the application for the current save operation will show
save_success as
False
.
When the shell sends the final status of the checkpoint to the
session manager, it will indicate failure to save application state
if any token was returned with save_success
False
.
Session participants that manage and save the state of other clients
should structure their save or interact callbacks to
set request_next_phase to
True
when phase is 1, which will cause the shell to send the
SaveYourselfPhase2Request
when the first phase is complete. When the
SaveYourselfPhase2
message is received, the shell will invoke the save callbacks a
second time with phase equal to 2.
Manager clients should save the state of other clients
when the callbacks are invoked the second time and phase equal to 2.
The application may request additional tokens while a checkpoint is under way, and these additional tokens must be returned by an explicit call.
To request an additional token for a save callback response that has a
deferred outcome, use
XtSessionGetToken
.
widget | Specifies the Session shell widget which manages session participation. |
The
XtSessionGetToken
function will return NULL if no checkpoint operation is currently under way.
To indicate the completion of checkpoint processing including user
interaction, the application must signal the Session shell
by returning all tokens.
(See the section called “Interacting with the User during a Checkpoint” and
the section called “Completing a Save”).
To return a token, use
XtSessionReturnToken
.
token |
Specifies a token that was received as the call_data by a procedure
on the interact callback list or a token that was received by a call to
|
Tokens passed as call_data to save callbacks are implicitly
returned when the save callback procedure returns.
A save callback procedure should not call
XtSessionReturnToken
on the token passed in its call_data.
When the token interact_style allows user interaction,
the application may
interact with the user during the checkpoint, but must wait for permission
to interact.
Applications request permission to interact with the user during the
checkpointing operation by registering a procedure on the Session
shell's interact callback list. When all save callback procedures have
returned, and each time a token that was granted by a call to
XtSessionGetToken
is returned, the Session shell examines the interact callback list.
If interaction is permitted and the interact callback list is not empty,
the shell will send an
InteractRequest
to the session manager when an interact request is not already outstanding
for the application.
The type of interaction dialog that will be requested is specified by
the interact_dialog_type field in the checkpoint token.
The possible values for interact_dialog_type are
SmDialogError
and
SmDialogNormal
.
If a token is returned with interact_dialog_type containing
SmDialogError
,
the interact request and any subsequent interact requests will be for
an error dialog; otherwise, the request will be for a normal dialog with
the user.
When a token is returned with save_success
False
or interact_dialog_type
SmDialogError
,
tokens subsequently passed to callbacks during the same active
SaveYourself
response will reflect these changed values, indicating that
an error condition has occurred during the checkpoint.
The request_cancel field is a return value for interact callbacks only.
Upon return from a procedure on the save callback list, the value
of the token's request_cancel field is not examined by the shell.
This is also true of tokens received through a call to
XtSessionGetToken
.
When the session manager grants the application's request for user interaction,
the Session shell receives an
Interact
message.
The procedures registered on the interact callback list are executed,
but not as if executing a typical callback list.
These procedures are individually executed in
sequence, with a checkpoint token functioning as the sequencing mechanism.
Each step in the sequence begins by removing a procedure
from the interact callback list
and executing it with a token passed in the call_data.
The interact callback will typically pop up a dialog box and return.
When the user interaction and associated application checkpointing has
completed, the application must return the token by calling
XtSessionReturnToken
.
Returning the token completes the current step and triggers the next step
in the sequence.
During interaction the client may request cancellation of a shutdown.
When a token passed as call_data to an interact procedure is returned,
if shutdown is
True
and cancel_shutdown is
False
,
request_cancel indicates whether the
application requests that the pending shutdown be cancelled.
If request_cancel is
True
,
the field will also be
True
in any tokens subsequently granted during the checkpoint operation.
When a token is returned requesting cancellation of
the session shutdown, pending interact procedures will still be
called by the Session shell.
When all interact procedures have been removed from the interact callback
list, executed, and the final interact token returned to the shell, an
InteractDone
message is sent to the session manager, indicating whether
a pending session shutdown is requested to be cancelled.
Callbacks registered on the cancel callback list are invoked when the
Session shell processes a
ShutdownCancelled
message from the session manager. This may occur during the
processing of save callbacks, while waiting for interact permission,
during user interaction, or after the save operation is complete and
the application is expecting a
SaveComplete
or a
Die
message.
The call_data for these callbacks is NULL.
When the shell notices that a pending shutdown has been cancelled,
the token cancel_shutdown field will be
True
in tokens subsequently given to the application.
Receiving notice of a shutdown cancellation does not cancel the
pending execution of save callbacks or interact callbacks.
After the cancel callbacks execute, if interact_style is not
SmInteractStyleNone
and the interact list is not empty,
the procedures on the interact callback list will be executed
and passed a token with interact_style
SmInteractStyleNone
.
The application should not interact with the user, and the Session shell
will not send an
InteractDone
message.
When there is no user interaction, the shell regards the application
as having finished saving state when all callback procedures
on the save callback list have returned, and any additional tokens
passed out by
XtSessionGetToken
have been returned by corresponding calls to
XtSessionReturnToken
.
If the save operation involved user interaction,
the above completion conditions apply, and in addition, all requests for
interaction have been granted or cancelled,
and all tokens passed to interact callbacks have been returned
through calls to
XtSessionReturnToken
.
If the save operation involved a manager client that requested the
second phase, the above conditions apply to both the first and second
phase of the save operation.
When the application has finished saving state,
the Session shell will report the result to the session manager by
sending the
SaveYourselfDone
message.
If the session is continuing, the shell will receive the
SaveComplete
message when all applications have completed saving state.
This message indicates that applications may again allow changes
to their state. The shell will execute the save_complete callbacks.
The call_data for these callbacks is NULL.
Callbacks registered on the die callback list are invoked when the
session manager sends a
Die
message.
The callbacks on this list should do whatever is appropriate to quit
the application.
Before executing procedures on the die callback list,
the Session shell will close the connection to the session manager
and will remove the handler that watches for protocol messages.
The call_data for these callbacks is NULL.
When the Session shell widget is destroyed, the destroy method will
close the connection to the session manager by sending a
ConnectionClosed
protocol message and will remove the input callback
that was watching for session protocol messages.
When
XtSetValues
is used to set join_session to
False
,
the set_values method of the Session shell will close the
connection to the session manager if one exists by sending a
ConnectionClosed
message, and connection will be set to NULL.
Applications that exit in response to user actions and that do not
wait for phase 2 destroy to complete on
the Session shell should set join_session to
False
before exiting.
When
XtSetValues
is used to set connection to NULL,
the Session shell will stop managing the connection, if one exists.
However, that session connection will not be closed.
Applications that wish to ensure continuation of a session connection beyond the destruction of the shell should first retrieve the connection resource value, then set the connection resource to NULL, and then they may safely destroy the widget without losing control of the session connection.
The error callback list will be called if an unrecoverable communications error occurs while the shell is managing the connection. The shell will close the connection, set connection to NULL, remove the input callback, and call the procedures registered on the error callback list. The call_data for these callbacks is NULL.
Table of Contents
Pop-up widgets are used to create windows outside of the window hierarchy defined by the widget tree. Each pop-up child has a window that is a descendant of the root window, so that the pop-up window is not clipped by the pop-up widget's parent window. Therefore, pop-ups are created and attached differently to their widget parent than normal widget children.
A parent of a pop-up widget does not actively manage its pop-up children;
in fact, it usually does not operate upon them in any way.
The popup_list field in the
CorePart
structure contains the list of its pop-up children.
This pop-up list exists mainly to provide the proper place in the widget
hierarchy for the pop-up to get resources and to provide a place for
XtDestroyWidget
to look for all extant children.
A composite widget can have both normal and pop-up children. A pop-up can be popped up from almost anywhere, not just by its parent. The term child always refers to a normal, geometry-managed widget on the composite widget's list of children, and the term pop-up child always refers to a widget on the pop-up list.
There are three kinds of pop-up widgets:
Modeless pop-ups
A modeless pop-up (for example, a dialog box that does not prevent continued interaction with the rest of the application) can usually be manipulated by the window manager and looks like any other application window from the user's point of view. The application main window itself is a special case of a modeless pop-up.
Modal pop-ups
A modal pop-up (for example, a dialog box that requires user input to continue) can sometimes be manipulated by the window manager, and except for events that occur in the dialog box, it disables user-event distribution to the rest of the application.
Spring-loaded pop-ups
A spring-loaded pop-up (for example, a menu) can seldom be manipulated by the window manager, and except for events that occur in the pop-up or its descendants, it disables user-event distribution to all other applications.
Modal pop-ups and spring-loaded pop-ups are very similar and should be coded as if they were the same. In fact, the same widget (for example, a ButtonBox or Menu widget) can be used both as a modal pop-up and as a spring-loaded pop-up within the same application. The main difference is that spring-loaded pop-ups are brought up with the pointer and, because of the grab that the pointer button causes, require different processing by the Intrinsics. Furthermore, all user input remap events occurring outside the spring-loaded pop-up (e.g., in a descendant) are also delivered to the spring-loaded pop-up after they have been dispatched to the appropriate descendant, so that, for example, button-up can take down a spring-loaded pop-up no matter where the button-up occurs.
Any kind of pop-up, in turn, can pop up other widgets. Modal and spring-loaded pop-ups can constrain user events to the most recent such pop-up or allow user events to be dispatched to any of the modal or spring-loaded pop-ups currently mapped.
Regardless of their type, all pop-up widget classes are responsible for communicating with the X window manager and therefore are subclasses of one of the Shell widget classes.
For a widget to be popped up, it must be the child of a pop-up shell widget. None of the Intrinsics-supplied shells will simultaneously manage more than one child. Both the shell and child taken together are referred to as the pop-up. When you need to use a pop-up, you always refer to the pop-up by the pop-up shell, not the child.
To create a pop-up shell, use
XtCreatePopupShell
.
Widget XtCreatePopupShell(
const char * name, WidgetClass widget_class, Widget parent, ArgList args, Cardinal num_args)
;
name | Specifies the instance name for the created shell widget. |
widget_class | Specifies the widget class pointer for the created shell widget. |
parent | Specifies the parent widget. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
args | Specifies the argument list to override any other resource specifications. |
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in the argument list. |
The
XtCreatePopupShell
function ensures that the specified class is a subclass of
Shell
and, rather than using insert_child to attach the widget to the parent's
children list,
attaches the shell to the parent's popup_list directly.
The screen resource for this widget is determined by first scanning
args for the XtNscreen argument. If no XtNscreen argument is
found, the resource database associated with the parent's screen
is queried for the resource name.screen, class
Class.Screen where Class is the class_name
field from the
CoreClassPart
of the specified widget_class.
If this query fails, the parent's screen is used.
Once the screen is determined,
the resource database associated with that screen is used to retrieve
all remaining resources for the widget not specified in
args.
A spring-loaded pop-up invoked from a translation table via
XtMenuPopup
must already exist
at the time that the translation is invoked,
so the translation manager can find the shell by name.
Pop-ups invoked in other ways can be created when
the pop-up actually is needed.
This delayed creation of the shell is particularly useful when you pop up
an unspecified number of pop-ups.
You can look to see if an appropriate unused shell (that is, not
currently popped up) exists and create a new shell if needed.
To create a pop-up shell using varargs lists, use
XtVaCreatePopupShell
.
name | Specifies the instance name for the created shell widget. |
widget_class | Specifies the widget class pointer for the created shell widget. |
parent | Specifies the parent widget. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
... | Specifies the variable argument list to override any other resource specifications. |
XtVaCreatePopupShell
is identical in function to
XtCreatePopupShell
with the args and num_args parameters replaced by a varargs list as
described in Section 2.5.1.
Once a pop-up shell is created, the single child of the pop-up shell can be created either statically or dynamically.
At startup,
an application can create the child of the pop-up shell,
which is appropriate for pop-up children composed of a fixed set
of widgets.
The application can change the state of the subparts of
the pop-up child as the application state changes.
For example, if an application creates a static menu,
it can call
XtSetSensitive
(or, in general,
XtSetValues
)
on any of the buttons that make up the menu.
Creating the pop-up child early means that pop-up time is minimized,
especially if the application calls
XtRealizeWidget
on the pop-up shell at startup.
When the menu is needed,
all the widgets that make up the menu already exist and need only be mapped.
The menu should pop up as quickly as the X server can respond.
Alternatively, an application can postpone the creation of the child until it is needed, which minimizes application startup time and allows the pop-up child to reconfigure itself each time it is popped up. In this case, the pop-up child creation routine might poll the application to find out if it should change the sensitivity of any of its subparts.
Pop-up child creation does not map the pop-up,
even if you create the child and call
XtRealizeWidget
on the pop-up shell.
All shells have pop-up and pop-down callbacks, which provide the opportunity either to make last-minute changes to a pop-up child before it is popped up or to change it after it is popped down. Note that excessive use of pop-up callbacks can make popping up occur more slowly.
Pop-ups can be popped up through several mechanisms:
A call to
XtPopup
or
XtPopupSpringLoaded
.
One of the supplied callback procedures
XtCallbackNone
,
XtCallbackNonexclusive
,
or
XtCallbackExclusive
.
The standard translation action
XtMenuPopup
.
Some of these routines take an argument of type
XtGrabKind
,
which is defined as
typedef enum {XtGrabNone, XtGrabNonexclusive, XtGrabExclusive} XtGrabKind;
The create_popup_child_proc procedure pointer
in the shell widget instance record is of type
XtCreatePopupChildProc
.
w | Specifies the shell widget being popped up. |
To map a pop-up from within an application, use
XtPopup
.
popup_shell | Specifies the shell widget. |
grab_kind | Specifies the way in which user events should be constrained. |
The
XtPopup
function performs the following:
Calls
XtCheckSubclass
to ensure popup_shell's class is a subclass of
shellWidgetClass
.
Raises the window and returns if the shell's popped_up field is already
True
.
Calls the callback procedures on the shell's popup_callback list, specifying a pointer to the value of grab_kind as the call_data argument.
Sets the shell popped_up field to
True
,
the shell spring_loaded field to
False
,
and the shell grab_kind field from grab_kind.
If the shell's create_popup_child_proc field is non-NULL,
XtPopup
calls it with popup_shell as the parameter.
If grab_kind is either
XtGrabNonexclusive
or
XtGrabExclusive
,
it calls
XtAddGrab(popup_shell, (grab_kind == XtGrabExclusive), False)
Calls
XtRealizeWidget
with popup_shell specified.
Calls
XMapRaised
with the window of popup_shell.
To map a spring-loaded pop-up from within an application, use
XtPopupSpringLoaded
.
popup_shell | Specifies the shell widget to be popped up. |
The
XtPopupSpringLoaded
function performs exactly as
XtPopup
except that it sets the shell spring_loaded field to
True
and always calls
XtAddGrab
with exclusive
True
and spring-loaded
True
.
To map a pop-up from a given widget's callback list,
you also can register one of the
XtCallbackNone
,
XtCallbackNonexclusive
,
or
XtCallbackExclusive
convenience routines as callbacks, using the pop-up shell widget as the
client data.
w | Specifies the widget. |
client_data | Specifies the pop-up shell. |
call_data | Specifies the callback data argument, which is not used by this procedure. |
w | Specifies the widget. |
client_data | Specifies the pop-up shell. |
call_data | Specifies the callback data argument, which is not used by this procedure. |
w | Specifies the widget. |
client_data | Specifies the pop-up shell. |
call_data | Specifies the callback data argument, which is not used by this procedure. |
The
XtCallbackNone
,
XtCallbackNonexclusive
,
and
XtCallbackExclusive
functions call
XtPopup
with the shell specified by the client_data argument
and grab_kind set as the name specifies.
XtCallbackNone
,
XtCallbackNonexclusive
,
and
XtCallbackExclusive
specify
XtGrabNone
,
XtGrabNonexclusive
,
and
XtGrabExclusive
,
respectively.
Each function then sets the widget that executed the callback list
to be insensitive by calling
XtSetSensitive
.
Using these functions in callbacks is not required.
In particular,
an application must provide customized code for
callbacks that create pop-up shells dynamically or that must do more than
desensitizing the button.
Within a translation table,
to pop up a menu when a key or pointer button is pressed or when the pointer
is moved into a widget, use
XtMenuPopup
,
or its synonym,
MenuPopup
.
From a translation writer's point of view,
the definition for this translation action is
shell_name | Specifies the name of the shell widget to pop up. |
XtMenuPopup
is known to the translation manager,
which registers the corresponding built-in action procedure
XtMenuPopupAction
using
XtRegisterGrabAction
specifying owner_events
True
,
event_mask
ButtonPressMask
|
ButtonReleaseMask
,
and pointer_mode and keyboard_mode
GrabModeAsync
.
If
XtMenuPopup
is invoked on
ButtonPress
,
it calls
XtPopupSpringLoaded
on the specified shell widget.
If
XtMenuPopup
is invoked on
KeyPress
or
EnterWindow
,
it calls
XtPopup
on the specified shell widget with grab_kind set to
XtGrabNonexclusive
.
Otherwise, the translation manager generates a
warning message and ignores the action.
XtMenuPopup
tries to find the shell by searching the widget tree starting at
the widget in which it is invoked.
If it finds a shell with the specified name in the pop-up children of
that widget, it pops up the shell with the appropriate parameters.
Otherwise, it moves up the parent chain to find a pop-up child with the
specified name.
If
XtMenuPopup
gets to the application top-level shell widget and has not
found a matching shell, it generates a warning and returns immediately.
Pop-ups can be popped down through several mechanisms:
A call to
XtPopdown
The supplied callback procedure
XtCallbackPopdown
The standard translation action
XtMenuPopdown
To unmap a pop-up from within an application, use
XtPopdown
.
popup_shell | Specifies the shell widget to pop down. |
The
XtPopdown
function performs the following:
Calls
XtCheckSubclass
to ensure popup_shell's class is a subclass of
shellWidgetClass
.
Checks that the popped_up field of popup_shell is
True
;
otherwise, it returns immediately.
Unmaps popup_shell's window and, if override_redirect is
False
,
sends a synthetic
UnmapNotify
event as specified by the Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual.
If popup_shell's grab_kind is either
XtGrabNonexclusive
or
XtGrabExclusive
,
it calls
XtRemoveGrab
.
Sets popup_shell's popped_up field to
False
.
Calls the callback procedures on the shell's popdown_callback list, specifying a pointer to the value of the shell's grab_kind field as the call_data argument.
To pop down a pop-up from a callback list, you may use the callback
XtCallbackPopdown
.
w | Specifies the widget. |
client_data |
Specifies a pointer to the
|
call_data | Specifies the callback data argument, which is not used by this procedure. |
The
XtCallbackPopdown
function casts the client_data parameter to a pointer of type
XtPopdownID
.
typedef struct { Widget shell_widget; Widget enable_widget; } XtPopdownIDRec, *XtPopdownID;
The shell_widget is the pop-up shell to pop down, and the enable_widget is usually the widget that was used to pop it up in one of the pop-up callback convenience procedures.
XtCallbackPopdown
calls
XtPopdown
with the specified shell_widget
and then calls
XtSetSensitive
to resensitize enable_widget.
Within a translation table,
to pop down a spring-loaded menu when a key or pointer button is
released or when the
pointer is moved into a widget, use
XtMenuPopdown
or its synonym,
MenuPopdown
.
From a translation writer's point of view,
the definition for this translation action is
shell_name | Specifies the name of the shell widget to pop down. |
If a shell name is not given,
XtMenuPopdown
calls
XtPopdown
with the widget for which the translation is specified.
If shell_name is specified in the translation table,
XtMenuPopdown
tries to find the shell by looking up the widget tree starting at the
widget in which it is invoked.
If it finds a shell with the specified name in the pop-up children
of that widget, it pops down the shell;
otherwise, it moves up the parent chain to find a pop-up child with the
specified name.
If
XtMenuPopdown
gets to the application top-level shell widget
and cannot find a matching shell,
it generates a warning and returns immediately.
Table of Contents
A widget does not directly control its size and location; rather, its parent is responsible for controlling them. Although the position of children is usually left up to their parent, the widgets themselves often have the best idea of their optimal sizes and, possibly, preferred locations.
To resolve physical layout conflicts between sibling widgets and between a widget and its parent, the Intrinsics provide the geometry management mechanism. Almost all composite widgets have a geometry manager specified in the geometry_manager field in the widget class record that is responsible for the size, position, and stacking order of the widget's children. The only exception is fixed boxes, which create their children themselves and can ensure that their children will never make a geometry request.
Parents, children, and clients each initiate geometry changes differently.
Because a parent has absolute control of its children's geometry,
it changes the geometry directly by calling
XtMoveWidget
,
XtResizeWidget
,
or
XtConfigureWidget
.
A child must ask its parent for a geometry change by calling
XtMakeGeometryRequest
or
XtMakeResizeRequest
.
An application or other client code initiates a geometry change by calling
XtSetValues
on the appropriate geometry fields,
thereby giving the widget the opportunity to modify or reject the client
request before it gets propagated to the parent and the opportunity
to respond appropriately to the parent's reply.
When a widget that needs to change its size, position, border width, or stacking depth asks its parent's geometry manager to make the desired changes, the geometry manager can allow the request, disallow the request, or suggest a compromise.
When the geometry manager is asked to change the geometry of a child,
the geometry manager may also rearrange and resize any or all
of the other children that it controls.
The geometry manager can move children around freely using
XtMoveWidget
.
When it resizes a child (that is, changes the width, height, or
border width) other than the one making the request,
it should do so by calling
XtResizeWidget
.
The requesting child may be given special treatment; see
the section called “Child Geometry Management: The geometry_manager Procedure”.
It can simultaneously move and resize a child with a single call to
XtConfigureWidget
.
Often, geometry managers find that they can satisfy a request only if they can reconfigure a widget that they are not in control of; in particular, the composite widget may want to change its own size. In this case, the geometry manager makes a request to its parent's geometry manager. Geometry requests can cascade this way to arbitrary depth.
Because such cascaded arbitration of widget geometry can involve extended negotiation, windows are not actually allocated to widgets at application startup until all widgets are satisfied with their geometry; see the section called “Creating Widgets” and the section called “Realizing Widgets”.
The Intrinsics treatment of stacking requests is deficient in several areas.
Stacking requests for unrealized widgets are granted but will have no effect.
In addition, there is no way to do an
XtSetValues
that will generate a stacking geometry request.
After a successful geometry request (one that returned
XtGeometryYes
),
a widget does not know whether its resize procedure has been called.
Widgets should have resize procedures that can be called more than once
without ill effects.
When making a geometry request, the child specifies an
XtWidgetGeometry
structure.
typedef unsigned long XtGeometryMask; typedef struct { XtGeometryMask request_mode; Position x, y; Dimension width, height; Dimension border_width; Widget sibling; int stack_mode; } XtWidgetGeometry;
To make a general geometry manager request from a widget, use
XtMakeGeometryRequest
.
XtGeometryResult XtMakeGeometryRequest(
Widget w, XtWidgetGeometry *request, XtWidgetGeometry *reply_return)
;
w | Specifies the widget making the request. Must be of class RectObj or any subclass thereof. |
request | Specifies the desired widget geometry (size, position, border width, and stacking order). |
reply_return |
Returns the allowed widget size, or may be NULL
if the requesting widget is not interested in handling
|
Depending on the condition,
XtMakeGeometryRequest
performs the following:
If the widget is unmanaged or the widget's parent is not realized,
it makes the changes and returns
XtGeometryYes
.
If the parent's class is not a subclass of
compositeWidgetClass
or the parent's geometry_manager field is NULL,
it issues an error.
If the widget's being_destroyed field is
True
,
it returns
XtGeometryNo
.
If the widget x, y, width, height, and
border_width fields are
all equal to the requested values,
it returns
XtGeometryYes
;
otherwise, it calls the parent's geometry_manager procedure
with the given parameters.
If the parent's geometry manager returns
XtGeometryYes
and if
XtCWQueryOnly
is not set in request->request_mode
and if the widget is realized,
XtMakeGeometryRequest
calls the
XConfigureWindow
Xlib function to reconfigure the widget's window (set its size, location,
and stacking order as appropriate).
If the geometry manager returns
XtGeometryDone
,
the change has been approved and actually has been done.
In this case,
XtMakeGeometryRequest
does no configuring and returns
XtGeometryYes
.
XtMakeGeometryRequest
never returns
XtGeometryDone
.
Otherwise,
XtMakeGeometryRequest
just returns the resulting value from the parent's geometry manager.
Children of primitive widgets are always unmanaged; therefore,
XtMakeGeometryRequest
always returns
XtGeometryYes
when called by a child of a primitive widget.
The return codes from geometry managers are
typedef enum { XtGeometryYes, XtGeometryNo, XtGeometryAlmost, XtGeometryDone } XtGeometryResult;
The request_mode definitions are from
<X11/X.h>
.
#define | CWX | (1<<0) |
#define | CWY | (1<<1) |
#define | CWWidth | (1<<2) |
#define | CWHeight | (1<<3) |
#define | CWBorderWidth | (1<<4) |
#define | CWSibling | (1<<5) |
#define | CWStackMode | (1<<6) |
The Intrinsics also support the following value.
#define | XtCWQueryOnly | (1<<7) |
XtCWQueryOnly
indicates that the corresponding geometry request is only a query
as to what would happen if this geometry request were made
and that no widgets should actually be changed.
XtMakeGeometryRequest
,
like the
XConfigureWindow
Xlib function, uses request_mode to determine which fields in the
XtWidgetGeometry
structure the caller wants to specify.
The stack_mode definitions are from
<X11/X.h>
:
#define | Above | 0 |
#define | Below | 1 |
#define | TopIf | 2 |
#define | BottomIf | 3 |
#define | Opposite | 4 |
The Intrinsics also support the following value.
#define | XtSMDontChange | 5 |
For definition and behavior of
Above
,
Below
,
TopIf
,
BottomIf
,
and
Opposite
,
BLAH
in Xlib — C Language X Interface.
XtSMDontChange
indicates that the widget wants its current stacking order preserved.
To make a simple resize request from a widget, you can use
XtMakeResizeRequest
as an alternative to
XtMakeGeometryRequest
.
w | Specifies the widget making the request. Must be of class RectObj or any subclass thereof. |
width | Specify the desired widget width and height. |
height | |
width_return | Return the allowed widget width and height. |
height_return |
The
XtMakeResizeRequest
function, a simple interface to
XtMakeGeometryRequest
,
creates an
XtWidgetGeometry
structure and specifies that width and height should change
by setting request_mode to
CWWidth
|
CWHeight
.
The geometry manager is free to modify any of the other window attributes
(position or stacking order) to satisfy the resize request.
If the return value is
XtGeometryAlmost
,
width_return and height_return contain a compromise width and height.
If these are acceptable,
the widget should immediately call
XtMakeResizeRequest
again and request that the compromise width and height be applied.
If the widget is not interested in
XtGeometryAlmost
replies,
it can pass NULL for width_return and height_return.
Sometimes a geometry manager cannot respond to
a geometry request from a child without first making a geometry request
to the widget's own parent (the original requestor's grandparent).
If the request to the grandparent would allow the parent to satisfy the
original request,
the geometry manager can make the intermediate geometry request
as if it were the originator.
On the other hand,
if the geometry manager already has determined that the original request
cannot be completely satisfied (for example, if it always denies
position changes),
it needs to tell the grandparent to respond to the intermediate request
without actually changing the geometry
because it does not know if the child will accept the compromise.
To accomplish this, the geometry manager uses
XtCWQueryOnly
in the intermediate request.
When
XtCWQueryOnly
is used, the geometry manager needs to cache
enough information to exactly reconstruct the intermediate request.
If the grandparent's response to the intermediate query was
XtGeometryAlmost
,
the geometry manager needs to cache the entire
reply geometry in the event the child accepts the parent's compromise.
If the grandparent's response was
XtGeometryAlmost
,
it may also be necessary to cache the entire reply geometry from
the grandparent when
XtCWQueryOnly
is not used.
If the geometry manager is still able to satisfy the original request,
it may immediately accept the grandparent's compromise
and then act on the child's request.
If the grandparent's compromise geometry is insufficient to allow
the child's request and if the geometry manager is willing to offer
a different compromise to the child,
the grandparent's compromise should not be accepted until the child
has accepted the new compromise.
Note that a compromise geometry returned with
XtGeometryAlmost
is guaranteed only for the next call to the same widget;
therefore, a cache of size 1 is sufficient.
The geometry_manager procedure pointer in a composite widget class is of type
XtGeometryHandler
.
typedef XtGeometryResult *XtGeometryHandler(
Widget w, XtWidgetGeometry *request, XtWidgetGeometry *geometry_return)
;
w | Passes the widget making the request. |
request | Passes the new geometry the child desires. |
geometry_return | Passes a geometry structure in which the geometry manager may store a compromise. |
A class can inherit its superclass's geometry manager during class initialization.
A bit set to zero in the request's request_mode field means that the child widget does not care about the value of the corresponding field, so the geometry manager can change this field as it wishes. A bit set to 1 means that the child wants that geometry element set to the value in the corresponding field.
If the geometry manager can satisfy all changes requested
and if
XtCWQueryOnly
is not specified,
it updates the widget's x, y, width, height,
and border_width fields
appropriately.
Then, it returns
XtGeometryYes
,
and the values pointed to by the geometry_return argument are undefined.
The widget's window is moved and resized automatically by
XtMakeGeometryRequest
.
Homogeneous composite widgets often find it convenient to treat the widget
making the request the same as any other widget, including reconfiguring
it using
XtConfigureWidget
or
XtResizeWidget
as part of its layout process, unless
XtCWQueryOnly
is specified.
If it does this,
it should return
XtGeometryDone
to inform
XtMakeGeometryRequest
that it does not need to do the configuration itself.
To remain
compatible with layout techniques used in older widgets (before
XtGeometryDone
was added to the Intrinsics), a geometry manager should avoid using
XtResizeWidget
or
XtConfigureWidget
on the child making
the request because the layout process of the child may be in an
intermediate state in which it is not prepared to handle a call to its
resize procedure. A self-contained widget set may choose this
alternative geometry management scheme, however, provided that it
clearly warns widget developers of the compatibility consequences.
Although
XtMakeGeometryRequest
resizes the widget's window
(if the geometry
manager returns
XtGeometryYes
),
it does not call the widget class's resize procedure.
The requesting widget must perform whatever
resizing calculations are needed explicitly.
If the geometry manager disallows the request,
the widget cannot change its geometry.
The values pointed to by geometry_return are undefined,
and the geometry manager returns
XtGeometryNo
.
Sometimes the geometry manager cannot satisfy the request exactly
but may be able to satisfy a similar request.
That is,
it could satisfy only a subset of the requests (for example,
size but not position) or a lesser request
(for example, it cannot make the child as big as the
request but it can make the child bigger than its current size).
In such cases,
the geometry manager fills in the structure pointed to by
geometry_return with the actual changes
it is willing to make, including an appropriate request_mode mask, and returns
XtGeometryAlmost
.
If a bit in geometry_return->request_mode is zero,
the geometry manager agrees not to change the corresponding value
if geometry_return is used immediately
in a new request.
If a bit is 1,
the geometry manager does change that element to the corresponding
value in geometry_return.
More bits may be set in geometry_return->request_mode
than in the original request if
the geometry manager intends to change other fields should the
child accept the compromise.
When
XtGeometryAlmost
is returned,
the widget must decide if the compromise suggested in geometry_return
is acceptable.
If it is, the widget must not change its geometry directly;
rather, it must make another call to
XtMakeGeometryRequest
.
If the next geometry request from this child uses the
geometry_return values filled in by the geometry manager with an
XtGeometryAlmost
return and if there have been no intervening geometry requests on
either its parent or any of its other children,
the geometry manager must grant the request, if possible.
That is, if the child asks immediately with the returned geometry,
it should get an answer of
XtGeometryYes
.
However,
dynamic behavior in
the user's window manager may affect the final outcome.
To return
XtGeometryYes
,
the geometry manager frequently rearranges the position of other managed
children by calling
XtMoveWidget
.
However, a few geometry managers may sometimes change the
size of other managed children by calling
XtResizeWidget
or
XtConfigureWidget
.
If
XtCWQueryOnly
is specified,
the geometry manager must return data describing
how it would react to this geometry
request without actually moving or resizing any widgets.
Geometry managers must not assume that the request and geometry_return arguments point to independent storage. The caller is permitted to use the same field for both, and the geometry manager must allocate its own temporary storage, if necessary.
To move a sibling widget of the child making the geometry request,
the parent uses
XtMoveWidget
.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class RectObj or any subclass thereof. |
x | |
y | Specify the new widget x and y coordinates. |
The
XtMoveWidget
function returns immediately if the specified geometry fields
are the same as the old values.
Otherwise,
XtMoveWidget
writes the new x and y values into the object
and, if the object is a widget and is realized, issues an Xlib
XMoveWindow
call on the widget's window.
To resize a sibling widget of the child making the geometry request,
the parent uses
XtResizeWidget
.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class RectObj or any subclass thereof. |
width | |
height | |
border_width | Specify the new widget size. |
The
XtResizeWidget
function returns immediately if the specified geometry fields
are the same as the old values.
Otherwise,
XtResizeWidget
writes the new width, height, and border_width values into
the object and, if the object is a widget and is realized, issues an
XConfigureWindow
call on the widget's window.
If the new width or height is different from the old values,
XtResizeWidget
calls the object's resize procedure to notify it of the size change.
To move and resize the sibling widget of the child making the geometry request,
the parent uses
XtConfigureWidget
.
void XtConfigureWidget(
Widget w, Position x, Position y, Dimension width, Dimension height, Dimension border_width)
;
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class RectObj or any subclass thereof. |
x | |
y | Specify the new widget x and y coordinates. |
width | |
height | |
border_width | Specify the new widget size. |
The
XtConfigureWidget
function returns immediately if the specified new geometry fields
are all equal to the current values.
Otherwise,
XtConfigureWidget
writes the new x, y, width, height,
and border_width values
into the object and, if the object is a widget and is realized, makes an Xlib
XConfigureWindow
call on the widget's window.
If the new width or height is different from its old value,
XtConfigureWidget
calls the object's resize procedure to notify it of the size change;
otherwise, it simply returns.
To resize a child widget that already has the new values of its width,
height, and border width, the parent uses
XtResizeWindow
.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
The
XtResizeWindow
function calls the
XConfigureWindow
Xlib function to make the window of the specified widget match its width,
height, and border width.
This request is done unconditionally because there is no
inexpensive way to tell if these
values match the current values.
Note that the widget's resize procedure is not called.
There are very few times to use
XtResizeWindow
;
instead, the parent should use
XtResizeWidget
.
Some parents may be willing to adjust their layouts to accommodate the
preferred geometries of their children.
They can use
XtQueryGeometry
to obtain the preferred geometry
and, as they see fit, can use or ignore any portion of the response.
To query a child widget's preferred geometry, use
XtQueryGeometry
.
XtGeometryResult XtQueryGeometry(
Widget w, XtWidgetGeometry *intended, XtWidgetGeometry *preferred_return)
;
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class RectObj or any subclass thereof. |
intended | Specifies the new geometry the parent plans to give to the child, or NULL. |
preferred_return | Returns the child widget's preferred geometry. |
To discover a child's preferred geometry,
the child's parent stores the new
geometry in the corresponding fields of
the intended structure, sets the corresponding bits in intended.request_mode,
and calls
XtQueryGeometry
.
The parent should set only those fields that are important to it so
that the child can determine whether it may be able to attempt changes to
other fields.
XtQueryGeometry
clears all bits in the preferred_return->request_mode
field and checks the
query_geometry field of the specified widget's class record.
If query_geometry is not NULL,
XtQueryGeometry
calls the query_geometry procedure and passes as arguments the
specified widget, intended, and preferred_return structures.
If the intended argument is NULL,
XtQueryGeometry
replaces it with a pointer to an
XtWidgetGeometry
structure with request_mode equal to zero before calling the
query_geometry procedure.
If
XtQueryGeometry
is called from within a geometry_manager
procedure for the widget that issued
XtMakeGeometryRequest
or
XtMakeResizeRequest
,
the results
are not guaranteed to be consistent with the requested changes. The
change request passed to the geometry manager takes precedence over
the preferred geometry.
The query_geometry procedure pointer is of type
XtGeometryHandler
.
typedef XtGeometryResult (*XtGeometryHandler)(
Widget w, XtWidgetGeometry *request, XtWidgetGeometry *preferred_return)
;
w | Passes the child widget whose preferred geometry is required. |
request | Passes the geometry changes that the parent plans to make. |
preferred_return | Passes a structure in which the child returns its preferred geometry. |
The query_geometry procedure is expected to examine the bits set in
request->request_mode, evaluate the preferred geometry of the widget,
and store the result in preferred_return
(setting the bits in preferred_return->request_mode corresponding
to those geometry fields that it cares about).
If the proposed geometry change is acceptable without modification,
the query_geometry procedure should return
XtGeometryYes
.
If at least one field in preferred_return
with a bit set in preferred_return->request_mode
is different
from the corresponding field in request
or if a bit was set in preferred_return->request_mode
that was not set in the request,
the query_geometry procedure should return
XtGeometryAlmost
.
If the preferred geometry is identical to the current geometry,
the query_geometry procedure should return
XtGeometryNo
.
The query_geometry procedure may assume
that no
XtMakeResizeRequest
or
XtMakeGeometryRequest
is in progress
for the specified widget; that is, it is not required to construct
a reply consistent with the requested geometry if such a request
were actually outstanding.
After calling the query_geometry procedure
or if the query_geometry field is NULL,
XtQueryGeometry
examines all the unset bits in preferred_return->request_mode
and sets the corresponding fields in preferred_return
to the current values from the widget instance.
If
CWStackMode
is not set,
the stack_mode field is set to
XtSMDontChange
.
XtQueryGeometry
returns the value returned by the query_geometry procedure or
XtGeometryYes
if the query_geometry field is NULL.
Therefore, the caller can interpret a return of
XtGeometryYes
as not needing to evaluate the contents of the reply and, more important,
not needing to modify its layout plans.
A return of
XtGeometryAlmost
means either that both the parent and the child expressed interest
in at least one common field and the child's preference does not match
the parent's intentions or that the child expressed interest in a field that
the parent might need to consider.
A return value of
XtGeometryNo
means that both the parent and the child expressed interest in a field and
that the child suggests that the field's current value in the widget instance
is its preferred value.
In addition, whether or not the caller ignores the return value or the
reply mask, it is guaranteed that the preferred_return structure contains complete
geometry information for the child.
Parents are expected to call
XtQueryGeometry
in their layout routine and wherever else the information is significant
after change_managed has been called.
The first time it is invoked,
the changed_managed procedure may assume that the child's current geometry
is its preferred geometry.
Thus, the child is still responsible for storing values
into its own geometry during its initialize procedure.
A child can be resized by its parent at any time.
Widgets usually need to know when they have changed size
so that they can lay out their displayed data again to match the new size.
When a parent resizes a child, it calls
XtResizeWidget
,
which updates the geometry fields in the widget,
configures the window if the widget is realized,
and calls the child's resize procedure to notify the child.
The resize procedure pointer is of type
XtWidgetProc
.
If a class need not recalculate anything when a widget is resized,
it can specify NULL for the resize field in its class record.
This is an unusual case and should occur only for widgets
with very trivial display semantics.
The resize procedure takes a widget as its only argument.
The x, y, width, height,
and border_width fields of the widget contain the new values.
The resize procedure should recalculate the layout of internal data
as needed.
(For example, a centered Label in a window that changes size
should recalculate the starting position of the text.)
The widget must obey resize as a command and must not treat it as a request.
A widget must not issue an
XtMakeGeometryRequest
or
XtMakeResizeRequest
call from its resize procedure.
Table of Contents
While Xlib allows the reading and processing of events anywhere in an application, widgets in the X Toolkit neither directly read events nor grab the server or pointer. Widgets register procedures that are to be called when an event or class of events occurs in that widget.
A typical application consists of startup code followed by an event loop
that reads events and dispatches them by calling
the procedures that widgets have registered.
The default event loop provided by the Intrinsics is
XtAppMainLoop
.
The event manager is a collection of functions to perform the following tasks:
Add or remove event sources other than X server events (in particular, timer interrupts, file input, or POSIX signals).
Query the status of event sources.
Add or remove procedures to be called when an event occurs for a particular widget.
Enable and disable the dispatching of user-initiated events (keyboard and pointer events) for a particular widget.
Constrain the dispatching of events to a cascade of pop-up widgets.
Register procedures to be called when specific events arrive.
Register procedures to be called when the Intrinsics will block.
Enable safe operation in a multi-threaded environment.
Most widgets do not need to call any of the event handler functions explicitly.
The normal interface to X events is through the higher-level
translation manager,
which maps sequences of X events, with modifiers, into procedure calls.
Applications rarely use any of the event manager routines besides
XtAppMainLoop
.
While most applications are driven only by X events, some applications need to incorporate other sources of input into the Intrinsics event-handling mechanism. The event manager provides routines to integrate notification of timer events and file data pending into this mechanism.
The next section describes functions that provide input gathering from files. The application registers the files with the Intrinsics read routine. When input is pending on one of the files, the registered callback procedures are invoked.
To register a new file as an input source for a given application context, use
XtAppAddInput
.
XtInputId XtAppAddInput(
XtAppContext app_context, int source, XtPointer condition, XtInputCallbackProc proc, XtPointer client_data)
;
app_context | Specifies the application context that identifies the application. |
source | Specifies the source file descriptor on a POSIX-based system or other operating-system-dependent device specification. |
condition | Specifies the mask that indicates a read, write, or exception condition or some other operating-system-dependent condition. |
proc | Specifies the procedure to be called when the condition is found. |
client_data | Specifies an argument passed to the specified procedure when it is called. |
The
XtAppAddInput
function registers with the Intrinsics read routine a new source of events,
which is usually file input but can also be file output.
Note that file should be loosely interpreted to mean any sink
or source of data.
XtAppAddInput
also specifies the conditions under which the source can generate events.
When an event is pending on this source,
the callback procedure is called.
The legal values for the condition argument are operating-system-dependent. On a POSIX-based system, source is a file number and the condition is some union of the following:
XtInputReadMask | Specifies that proc is to be called when source has data to be read. |
XtInputWriteMask | Specifies that proc is to be called when source is ready for writing. |
XtInputExceptMask | Specifies that proc is to be called when source has exception data. |
Callback procedure pointers used to handle file events are of
type
(*XtInputCallbackProc)
.
client_data |
Passes the client data argument that was registered for this procedure in
|
source | Passes the source file descriptor generating the event. |
id |
Passes the id returned from the corresponding
|
See the section called “Using the Intrinsics in a Multi-Threaded Environment”
for information regarding the use of
XtAppAddInput
in multiple threads.
To discontinue a source of input, use
XtRemoveInput
.
id |
Specifies the id returned from the corresponding
|
The
XtRemoveInput
function causes the Intrinsics read routine to stop watching for events
from the file source specified by id.
See the section called “Using the Intrinsics in a Multi-Threaded Environment”
for information regarding the use of
XtRemoveInput
in multiple threads.
Occasionally it is desirable for an application to receive notification when the Intrinsics event manager detects no pending input from file sources and no pending input from X server event sources and is about to block in an operating system call.
To register a hook that is called immediately prior to event blocking, use
XtAppAddBlockHook
.
XtBlockHookId XtAppAddBlockHook(
XtAppContext app_context, XtBlockHookProc proc, XtPointer client_data)
;
app_context | Specifies the application context that identifies the application. |
proc | Specifies the procedure to be called before blocking. |
client_data | Specifies an argument passed to the specified procedure when it is called. |
The
XtAppAddBlockHook
function registers the specified procedure and returns an identifier for it.
The hook procedure proc is called at any time in the future when
the Intrinsics are about to block pending some input.
The procedure pointers used to provide notification of event blocking
are of type
XtBlockHookProc
.
client_data |
Passes the client data argument that was registered for this procedure in
|
To discontinue the use of a procedure for blocking notification, use
XtRemoveBlockHook
.
id |
Specifies the identifier returned from the corresponding call to
|
The
XtRemoveBlockHook
function removes the specified procedure from the list of procedures
that are called by the Intrinsics read routine before blocking on event sources.
The timeout facility notifies the application or the widget through a callback procedure that a specified time interval has elapsed. Timeout values are uniquely identified by an interval id.
To register a timeout callback, use
XtAppAddTimeOut
.
XtIntervalId XtAppAddTimeOut(
XtAppContext app_context, unsigned long interval, XtTimerCallbackProc proc, XtPointer client_data)
;
app_context | Specifies the application context for which the timer is to be set. |
interval | Specifies the time interval in milliseconds. |
proc | Specifies the procedure to be called when the time expires. |
client_data | Specifies an argument passed to the specified procedure when it is called. |
The
XtAppAddTimeOut
function creates a timeout and returns an identifier for it.
The timeout value is set to interval.
The callback procedure proc is called when
XtAppNextEvent
or
XtAppProcessEvent
is next called after the time interval elapses,
and then the timeout is removed.
Callback procedure pointers used with timeouts are of
type
XtTimerCallbackProc
.
client_data |
Passes the client data argument that was registered for this procedure in
|
timer |
Passes the id returned from the corresponding
|
See the section called “Using the Intrinsics in a Multi-Threaded Environment”
for information regarding the use of
XtAppAddTimeOut
in multiple threads.
To clear a timeout value, use
XtRemoveTimeOut
.
timer | Specifies the id for the timeout request to be cleared. |
The
XtRemoveTimeOut
function removes the pending timeout.
Note that timeouts are automatically removed once they trigger.
Please refer to Section 7.12 for information regarding the use of
XtRemoveTimeOut
in multiple threads.
The signal facility notifies the application or the widget through a callback procedure that a signal or other external asynchronous event has occurred. The registered callback procedures are uniquely identified by a signal id.
Prior to establishing a signal handler, the application or widget should
call
XtAppAddSignal
and store the resulting identifier in a place accessible to the signal
handler. When a signal arrives, the signal handler should call
XtNoticeSignal
to notify the Intrinsics that a signal has occurred. To register a signal
callback use
XtAppAddSignal
.
XtSignalId XtAppAddSignal(
XtAppContext app_context, XtSignalCallbackProc proc, XtPointer client_data)
;
app_context | Specifies the application context that identifies the application. |
proc | Specifies the procedure to be called when the signal is noticed. |
client_data | Specifies an argument passed to the specified procedure when it is called. |
The callback procedure pointers used to handle signal events are of type
(*XtSignalCallbackProc)
.
client_data |
Passes the client data argument that was registered for this procedure in
|
id |
Passes the id returned from the corresponding
|
To notify the Intrinsics that a signal has occurred, use
XtNoticeSignal
.
id |
Specifies the id returned from the corresponding
|
On a POSIX-based system,
XtNoticeSignal
is the only Intrinsics function that can safely be called from a signal handler.
If
XtNoticeSignal
is invoked multiple times before the Intrinsics are able to invoke the
registered callback, the callback is only called once.
Logically, the Intrinsics maintain “pending” flag for each registered callback.
This flag is initially
False
and is set to
True
by
XtNoticeSignal
.
When
XtAppNextEvent
or
XtAppProcessEvent
(with a mask including
XtIMSignal
)
is called, all registered callbacks with “pending”
True
are invoked and the flags are reset to
False
.
If the signal handler wants to track how many times the signal has been
raised, it can keep its own private counter. Typically the handler would
not do any other work; the callback does the actual processing for the
signal. The Intrinsics never block signals from being raised, so if a given
signal can be raised multiple times before the Intrinsics can invoke the
callback for that signal, the callback must be designed to deal with
this. In another case, a signal might be raised just after the Intrinsics
sets the pending flag to
False
but before the callback can get control, in which case the pending flag
will still be
True
after the callback returns, and the Intrinsics will invoke the callback
again, even though all of the signal raises have been handled. The
callback must also be prepared to handle this case.
To remove a registered signal callback, call
XtRemoveSignal
.
id |
Specifies the id returned by the corresponding call to
|
The client should typically disable the source of the signal before calling
XtRemoveSignal
.
If the signal could have been raised again before the source was disabled
and the client wants to process it, then after disabling the source but
before calling
XtRemoveSignal
the client can test for signals with
XtAppPending
and process them by calling
XtAppProcessEvent
with the mask
XtIMSignal
.
Modal widgets are widgets that, except for the input directed to them, lock out user input to the application.
When a modal menu or modal dialog box is popped up using
XtPopup
,
user events (keyboard and pointer events) that occur outside the modal
widget should be delivered to the modal widget or ignored.
In no case will user events be delivered to a widget outside
the modal widget.
Menus can pop up submenus, and dialog boxes can pop up further dialog boxes to create a pop-up cascade. In this case, user events may be delivered to one of several modal widgets in the cascade.
Display-related events should be delivered outside the modal cascade so that
exposure events and the like keep the application's display up-to-date.
Any event that occurs within the cascade is delivered as usual.
The user events delivered to the most recent spring-loaded shell
in the cascade when they occur outside the cascade are called remap events
and are
KeyPress
,
KeyRelease
,
ButtonPress
,
and
ButtonRelease
.
The user events ignored when they occur outside the cascade are
MotionNotify
and
EnterNotify
.
All other events are delivered normally.
In particular, note that this is one
way in which widgets can receive
LeaveNotify
events without first receiving
EnterNotify
events; they should be prepared to deal with
this, typically by ignoring any unmatched
LeaveNotify
events.
XtPopup
uses the
XtAddGrab
and
XtRemoveGrab
functions to constrain user events to a modal cascade
and subsequently to remove a grab when the modal widget is popped down.
To constrain or redirect user input to a modal widget, use
XtAddGrab
.
w | Specifies the widget to add to the modal cascade. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
exclusive | Specifies whether user events should be dispatched exclusively to this widget or also to previous widgets in the cascade. |
spring_loaded | Specifies whether this widget was popped up because the user pressed a pointer button. |
The
XtAddGrab
function appends the widget to the modal cascade
and checks that exclusive is
True
if spring_loaded is
True
.
If this condition is not met,
XtAddGrab
generates a warning message.
The modal cascade is used by
XtDispatchEvent
when it tries to dispatch a user event.
When at least one modal widget is in the widget cascade,
XtDispatchEvent
first determines if the event should be delivered.
It starts at the most recent cascade entry and follows the cascade up to and
including the most recent cascade entry added with the exclusive parameter
True
.
This subset of the modal cascade along with all descendants of these widgets
comprise the active subset.
User events that occur outside the widgets in this subset are ignored
or remapped.
Modal menus with submenus generally add a submenu widget to the cascade
with exclusive
False
.
Modal dialog boxes that need to restrict user input to the most deeply nested
dialog box add a subdialog widget to the cascade with exclusive
True
.
User events that occur within the active subset are delivered to the
appropriate widget, which is usually a child or further descendant of the modal
widget.
Regardless of where in the application they occur,
remap events are always delivered to the most recent widget in the active
subset of the cascade registered with spring_loaded
True
,
if any such widget exists.
If the event
occurred in the active subset of the cascade but outside the
spring-loaded widget, it is delivered normally before being
delivered also to the spring-loaded widget.
Regardless of where it is dispatched, the Intrinsics do not modify
the contents of the event.
To remove the redirection of user input to a modal widget, use
XtRemoveGrab
.
w | Specifies the widget to remove from the modal cascade. |
The
XtRemoveGrab
function removes widgets from the modal cascade starting
at the most recent widget up to and including the specified widget.
It issues a warning if the specified widget is not on the modal cascade.
The Intrinsics provide a set of key and button grab interfaces that are parallel to those provided by Xlib and that allow the Intrinsics to modify event dispatching when necessary. X Toolkit applications and widgets that need to passively grab keys or buttons or actively grab the keyboard or pointer should use the following Intrinsics routines rather than the corresponding Xlib routines.
To passively grab a single key of the keyboard, use
XtGrabKey
.
void XtGrabKey(
Widget widget, KeyCode keycode, Modifiers modifiers, Boolean owner_events, int pointer_mode, int keyboard_mode)
;
widget | Specifies the widget in whose window the key is to be grabbed. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
keycode , modifiers , owner_events , pointer_mode , keyboard_mode |
Specify arguments to
|
XtGrabKey
calls
XGrabKey
specifying the widget's window as the grab
window if the widget is realized. The remaining arguments are exactly
as for
XGrabKey
.
If the widget is not realized, or is later unrealized, the call to
XGrabKey
is performed (again) when
the widget is realized and its window becomes mapped. In the future,
if
XtDispatchEvent
is called with a
KeyPress
event matching the specified keycode and modifiers (which may be
AnyKey
or
AnyModifier
,
respectively) for the
widget's window, the Intrinsics will call
XtUngrabKeyboard
with the timestamp from the
KeyPress
event if either of the following conditions is true:
There is a modal cascade and the widget is not in the active subset of the cascade and the keyboard was not previously grabbed, or
XFilterEvent
returns
True
.
To cancel a passive key grab, use
XtUngrabKey
.
widget | Specifies the widget in whose window the key was grabbed. |
keycode , modifiers |
Specify arguments to
|
The
XtUngrabKey
procedure calls
XUngrabKey
specifying the widget's
window as the ungrab window if the widget is realized. The remaining
arguments are exactly as for
XUngrabKey
.
If the widget is not realized,
XtUngrabKey
removes a deferred
XtGrabKey
request, if any, for the specified widget, keycode, and modifiers.
To actively grab the keyboard, use
XtGrabKeyboard
.
int XtGrabKeyboard(
Widget widget, Boolean owner_events, int pointer_mode, int keyboard_mode, Time time)
;
widget | Specifies the widget for whose window the keyboard is to be grabbed. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
owner_events , pointer_mode , keyboard_mode , time |
Specify arguments to
|
If the specified widget is realized,
XtGrabKeyboard
calls
XGrabKeyboard
specifying the widget's window as the grab window. The remaining
arguments and return value are exactly as for
XGrabKeyboard
.
If the widget is not realized,
XtGrabKeyboard
immediately returns
GrabNotViewable
.
No future automatic ungrab is implied by
XtGrabKeyboard
.
To cancel an active keyboard grab, use
XtUngrabKeyboard
.
widget | Specifies the widget that has the active keyboard grab. |
time |
Specifies the additional argument to
|
XtUngrabKeyboard
calls
XUngrabKeyboard
with the specified time.
To passively grab a single pointer button, use
XtGrabButton
.
void XtGrabButton(
Widget widget, int button, Modifiers modifiers, Boolean owner_events, unsigned int event_mask, int pointer_mode, int keyboard_mode, Window confine_to, Cursor cursor)
;
widget | Specifies the widget in whose window the button is to be grabbed. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
button , modifiers , owner_events , event_mask , pointer_mode , keyboard_mode , confine_to , cursor |
Specify arguments to
|
XtGrabButton
calls
XGrabButton
specifying the widget's window as the
grab window if the widget is realized. The remaining arguments are
exactly as for
XGrabButton
.
If the widget is not realized, or is later unrealized, the call to
XGrabButton
is performed (again)
when the widget is realized and its window becomes mapped. In the
future, if
XtDispatchEvent
is called with a
ButtonPress
event matching the specified button and modifiers (which may be
AnyButton
or
AnyModifier
,
respectively)
for the widget's window, the Intrinsics will call
XtUngrabPointer
with the timestamp from the
ButtonPress
event if either of the following conditions is true:
There is a modal cascade and the widget is not in the active subset of the cascade and the pointer was not previously grabbed, or
XFilterEvent
returns
True
.
To cancel a passive button grab, use
XtUngrabButton
.
widget | Specifies the widget in whose window the button was grabbed. |
button , modifiers |
Specify arguments to
|
The
XtUngrabButton
procedure calls
XUngrabButton
specifying the
widget's window as the ungrab window if the widget is realized. The
remaining arguments are exactly as for
XUngrabButton
.
If the widget is not realized,
XtUngrabButton
removes a deferred
XtGrabButton
request, if any, for the specified widget, button, and modifiers.
To actively grab the pointer, use
XtGrabPointer
.
int XtGrabPointer(
Widget widget, Boolean owner_events, unsigned int event_mask, int pointer_mode, int keyboard_mode, Window confine_to, Cursor cursor, Time time)
;
widget | Specifies the widget for whose window the pointer is to be grabbed. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
owner_events , event_mask , pointer_mode , keyboard_mode , confine_to , cursor , time |
Specify arguments to
|
If the specified widget is realized,
XtGrabPointer
calls
XGrabPointer
,
specifying the widget's window as the grab window. The remaining
arguments and return value are exactly as for
XGrabPointer
.
If the widget is not realized,
XtGrabPointer
immediately returns
GrabNotViewable
.
No future automatic ungrab is implied by
XtGrabPointer
.
To cancel an active pointer grab, use
XtUngrabPointer
.
widget | Specifies the widget that has the active pointer grab. |
time |
Specifies the time argument to
|
XtUngrabPointer
calls
XUngrabPointer
with the specified time.
To redirect keyboard input to a normal descendant of a
widget without calling
XSetInputFocus
,
use
XtSetKeyboardFocus
.
subtree | Specifies the subtree of the hierarchy for which the keyboard focus is to be set. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
descendant |
Specifies either the normal (non-pop-up) descendant of subtree to which
keyboard events are logically directed, or
|
XtSetKeyboardFocus
causes
XtDispatchEvent
to remap keyboard events occurring within the specified subtree
and dispatch them to the specified descendant widget or to an ancestor.
If the descendant's class is not a subclass of Core, the descendant is
replaced by its closest windowed ancestor.
When there is no modal cascade, keyboard events can be dispatched to a widget in one of five ways. Assume the server delivered the event to the window for widget E (because of X input focus, key or keyboard grabs, or pointer position).
If neither E nor any of E's ancestors have redirected the keyboard
focus, or if the event activated a grab for E as specified by a call
to
XtGrabKey
with any value of owner_events, or
if the keyboard is actively grabbed by E with owner_events
False
via
XtGrabKeyboard
or
XtGrabKey
on a previous key press, the event is dispatched to E.
Beginning with the ancestor of E closest to the root that has redirected the keyboard focus or E if no such ancestor exists, if the target of that focus redirection has in turn redirected the keyboard focus, recursively follow this focus chain to find a widget F that has not redirected focus.
If E is the final focus target widget F or a descendant of F, the event is dispatched to E.
If E is not F, an ancestor of F, or a descendant of F, and the event
activated a grab for E as specified by a call to
XtGrabKey
for E,
XtUngrabKeyboard
is called.
If E is an ancestor of F, and the event is a key press, and either
Otherwise, define A as the closest common ancestor of E and F:
If there is an active keyboard grab for any widget via either
XtGrabKeyboard
or
XtGrabKey
on a previous key press, or
if no widget between F and A (noninclusive) has grabbed
the key and modifier combination with
XtGrabKey
and any value of owner_events, the event is dispatched to F.
Else, the event is dispatched to the ancestor of F closest to A
that has grabbed the key and modifier combination with
XtGrabKey
.
When there is a modal cascade, if the final destination widget as identified above is in the active subset of the cascade, the event is dispatched; otherwise the event is remapped to a spring-loaded shell or discarded. Regardless of where it is dispatched, the Intrinsics do not modify the contents of the event.
When subtree or one of its descendants acquires the X input focus
or the pointer moves into the subtree such that keyboard events would
now be delivered to the subtree, a
FocusIn
event is generated for the descendant if
FocusChange
events have been selected by the descendant.
Similarly, when subtree loses the X input focus
or the keyboard focus for one of its ancestors, a
FocusOut
event is generated for descendant if
FocusChange
events have been selected by the descendant.
A widget tree may also actively manage the X server input focus. To do so, a widget class specifies an accept_focus procedure.
The accept_focus procedure pointer is of type
XtAcceptFocusProc
.
w | Specifies the widget. |
time | Specifies the X time of the event causing the accept focus. |
Widgets that need the input focus can call
XSetInputFocus
explicitly, pursuant to the restrictions of the Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual.
To allow outside agents, such as the parent,
to cause a widget to take the input focus,
every widget exports an accept_focus procedure.
The widget returns a value indicating
whether it actually took the focus or not,
so that the parent can give the focus to another widget.
Widgets that need to know when they lose the input focus must use
the Xlib focus notification mechanism explicitly
(typically by specifying translations for
FocusIn
and
FocusOut
events).
Widgets classes that never want the input focus should set the
accept_focus field to NULL.
To call a widget's accept_focus procedure, use
XtCallAcceptFocus
.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
time | Specifies the X time of the event that is causing the focus change. |
The
XtCallAcceptFocus
function calls the specified widget's accept_focus procedure,
passing it the specified widget and time, and returns what the accept_focus
procedure returns.
If accept_focus is NULL,
XtCallAcceptFocus
returns
False
.
Sometimes an application must handle events for drawables that are not
associated with widgets in its widget tree. Examples include handling
GraphicsExpose
and
NoExpose
events on Pixmaps, and handling
PropertyNotify
events on the root window.
To register a drawable with the Intrinsics event dispatching, use
XtRegisterDrawable
.
display | Specifies the drawable's display. |
drawable | Specifies the drawable to register. |
widget | Specifies the widget to register the drawable for. |
XtRegisterDrawable
associates the specified drawable with the specified widget
so that future calls to
XtWindowToWidget
with the drawable will return the widget.
The default event dispatcher will dispatch future events that
arrive for the drawable to the widget in the same manner as
events that contain the widget's window.
If the drawable is already registered with another widget, or if the
drawable is the window of a widget in the client's widget tree, the
results of calling
XtRegisterDrawable
are undefined.
To unregister a drawable with the Intrinsics event dispatching, use
XtUnregisterDrawable
.
display | Specifies the drawable's display. |
drawable | Specifies the drawable to unregister. |
XtUnregisterDrawable
removes an association created with
XtRegisterDrawable
.
If the drawable is the window of a widget in the client's widget tree
the results of calling
XtUnregisterDrawable
are undefined.
The event manager provides several functions to examine and read events
(including file and timer events) that are in the queue.
The next three functions are Intrinsics equivalents of the
XPending
,
XPeekEvent
,
and
XNextEvent
Xlib calls.
To determine if there are any events on the input queue for a given application,
use
XtAppPending
.
app_context | Specifies the application context that identifies the application to check. |
The
XtAppPending
function returns a nonzero value if there are
events pending from the X server, timer pending, other input sources
pending, or signal sources pending. The
value returned is a bit mask that is the OR of
XtIMXEvent
,
XtIMTimer
,
XtIMAlternateInput
,
and
XtIMSignal
(see
XtAppProcessEvent ).
If there are no events pending,
XtAppPending
flushes the output buffers of each Display in the application context
and returns zero.
To return the event from the head of a given application's input queue
without removing input from the queue, use
XtAppPeekEvent
.
app_context | Specifies the application context that identifies the application. |
event_return | Returns the event information to the specified event structure. |
If there is an X event in the queue,
XtAppPeekEvent
copies it into event_return and returns
True
.
If no X input is on the queue,
XtAppPeekEvent
flushes the output buffers of each Display in the application context
and blocks until some input is available
(possibly calling some timeout callbacks in the interim).
If the next available input is an X event,
XtAppPeekEvent
fills in event_return and returns
True
.
Otherwise, the input is for an input source
registered with
XtAppAddInput
,
and
XtAppPeekEvent
returns
False
.
The sample implementations provides XtAppPeekEvent as described. Timeout callbacks
are called while blocking for input. If some input for an input source is
available,
XtAppPeekEvent
will return
True
without returning an event.
To remove and return the event
from the head of a given application's X event queue,
use
XtAppNextEvent
.
app_context | Specifies the application context that identifies the application. |
event_return | Returns the event information to the specified event structure. |
If the X event queue is empty,
XtAppNextEvent
flushes the X output buffers of each Display in the application context
and waits for an X event while looking at the other input sources
and timeout values and calling any callback procedures triggered by them.
This wait time can be used for background processing;
see the section called “Adding Background Work Procedures”.
The Intrinsics provide functions that dispatch events
to widgets or other application code.
Every client interested in X events on a widget uses
XtAddEventHandler
to register which events it is
interested in and a procedure (event handler) to be called
when the event happens in that window.
The translation manager automatically registers event handlers for widgets
that use translation tables; see Chapter 10, Translation Management.
Applications that need direct control of the processing of different types
of input should use
XtAppProcessEvent
.
app_context | Specifies the application context that identifies the application for which to process input. |
mask |
Specifies what types of events to process.
The mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of any combination of
|
The
XtAppProcessEvent
function processes one timer, input source, signal source, or X event.
If there is no event or input of the appropriate type to process, then
XtAppProcessEvent
blocks until there is.
If there is more than one type of input available to process,
it is undefined which will get processed.
Usually, this procedure is not called by client applications; see
XtAppMainLoop
.
XtAppProcessEvent
processes timer events by calling any appropriate timer callbacks,
input sources by calling any appropriate input callbacks,
signal source by calling any appropriate signal callbacks,
and X events by
calling
XtDispatchEvent
.
When an X event is received,
it is passed to
XtDispatchEvent
,
which calls the appropriate event handlers
and passes them the widget, the event, and client-specific data
registered with each procedure.
If no handlers for that event are registered,
the event is ignored and the dispatcher simply returns.
To dispatch an event returned by
XtAppNextEvent
,
retrieved directly from the Xlib queue, or synthetically constructed,
to any registered event filters or event handlers, call
XtDispatchEvent
.
event | Specifies a pointer to the event structure to be dispatched to the appropriate event handlers. |
The
XtDispatchEvent
function first calls
XFilterEvent
with the event and the window of the widget to which the
Intrinsics intend to dispatch the event, or the event window if
the Intrinsics would not dispatch the event to any handlers.
If
XFilterEvent
returns
True
and the event activated a server grab as identified
by a previous call to
XtGrabKey
or
XtGrabButton
,
XtDispatchEvent
calls
XtUngrabKeyboard
or
XtUngrabPointer
with the timestamp from the event and immediately returns
True
.
If
XFilterEvent
returns
True
and a grab was not activated,
XtDispatchEvent
just immediately returns
True
.
Otherwise,
XtDispatchEvent
sends the event to the event handler functions that
have been previously registered with the dispatch routine.
XtDispatchEvent
returns
True
if
XFilterEvent
returned
True
,
or if the event was dispatched to some handler, and
False
if it found no handler to which to dispatch the event.
XtDispatchEvent
records the last timestamp in any event that
contains a timestamp (see
XtLastTimestampProcessed
),
regardless of whether it was filtered or dispatched.
If a modal cascade is active with spring_loaded
True
,
and if the event is a remap event as defined by
XtAddGrab
,
XtDispatchEvent
may dispatch the event a second time. If it does so,
XtDispatchEvent
will call
XFilterEvent
again with the window of the spring-loaded widget prior to the second
dispatch, and if
XFilterEvent
returns
True
,
the second dispatch will not be performed.
To process all input from a given application in a continuous loop,
use the convenience procedure
XtAppMainLoop
.
app_context | Specifies the application context that identifies the application. |
The XtAppMainLoop
function processes events using
XtAppProcessEvent
,
varying the mask parameter
and using XtAppPending
to ensure that it has a chance to handle events of all types,
i.e., X events, timer events, input events and signal sources.
This constitutes the main loop of X Toolkit applications.
There is nothing special about
XtAppMainLoop
;
it simply processes events in a conditional loop.
At the bottom of the loop, it checks to see if the specified
application context's destroy flag is set.
If the flag is set, the loop breaks.
The whole loop is enclosed between a matching
XtAppLock
and
XtAppUnlock
.
Applications can provide their own version of this loop, which tests some global termination flag or tests that the number of top-level widgets is larger than zero before circling back for the next event.
The design of
XtAppMainLoop
has changed since Release 6.
Originally it looped over calls to
XtAppNextEvent
,
and
XtDispatchEvent
,
but because the latter returns only after an X event
(not for timers, signals, inputs),
it was modified to allow any type of event to break out of the loop.
Many widgets have a mode in which they assume a different appearance (for example, are grayed out or stippled), do not respond to user events, and become dormant.
When dormant,
a widget is considered to be insensitive.
If a widget is insensitive,
the event manager does not dispatch any events to the widget
with an event type of
KeyPress
,
KeyRelease
,
ButtonPress
,
ButtonRelease
,
MotionNotify
,
EnterNotify
,
LeaveNotify
,
FocusIn
,
or
FocusOut
.
A widget can be insensitive because its sensitive field is
False
or because one of its ancestors is insensitive and thus the widget's
ancestor_sensitive field also is
False
.
A widget can but does not need to distinguish these two cases visually.
Pop-up shells will have
ancestor_sensitive
False
if the parent was insensitive when the shell
was created. Since
XtSetSensitive
on the parent will not
modify the resource of the pop-up child, clients are advised to include
a resource specification of the form
“*TransientShell.ancestorSensitive: True”
in the application defaults resource file or to
otherwise ensure that the parent is
sensitive when creating pop-up shells.
To set the sensitivity state of a widget, use
XtSetSensitive
.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class RectObj or any subclass thereof. |
sensitive | Specifies whether the widget should receive keyboard, pointer, and focus events. |
The
XtSetSensitive
function first calls
XtSetValues
on the current widget with an argument list specifying the
XtNsensitive resource and the new value.
If sensitive is
False
and the widget's class is a subclass of
Composite,
XtSetSensitive
recursively propagates the new value
down the child tree by calling
XtSetValues
on each child to set ancestor_sensitive to
False
.
If sensitive is
True
and the widget's class is a subclass of
Composite
and the widget's ancestor_sensitive field is
True
,
XtSetSensitive
sets the ancestor_sensitive of each child to
True
and then recursively calls
XtSetValues
on each normal descendant that is now sensitive to set
ancestor_sensitive to
True
.
XtSetSensitive
calls
XtSetValues
to change the sensitive and ancestor_sensitive fields
of each affected widget.
Therefore, when one of these changes,
the widget's set_values procedure should
take whatever display actions are needed
(for example, graying out or stippling the widget).
XtSetSensitive
maintains the invariant that, if the parent has either sensitive
or ancestor_sensitive
False
,
then all children have ancestor_sensitive
False
.
To check the current sensitivity state of a widget,
use
XtIsSensitive
.
w | Specifies the object. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
The
XtIsSensitive
function returns
True
or
False
to indicate whether user input events are being dispatched.
If object's class is a subclass of RectObj and
both sensitive and ancestor_sensitive are
True
,
XtIsSensitive
returns
True
;
otherwise, it returns
False
.
The Intrinsics have some limited support for background processing.
Because most applications spend most of their time waiting for input,
you can register an idle-time work procedure
that is called when the toolkit would otherwise block in
XtAppNextEvent
or
XtAppProcessEvent
.
Work procedure pointers are of type
(*XtWorkProc)
.
client_data | Passes the client data specified when the work procedure was registered. |
This procedure should return
True
when it is done to indicate that it
should be removed.
If the procedure returns
False
,
it will remain registered and called again when the
application is next idle.
Work procedures should be very judicious about how much they do.
If they run for more than a small part of a second,
interactive feel is likely to suffer.
To register a work procedure for a given application, use
XtAppAddWorkProc
.
app_context | Specifies the application context that identifies the application. |
proc | Specifies the procedure to be called when the application is idle. |
client_data | Specifies the argument passed to the specified procedure when it is called. |
The
XtAppAddWorkProc
function adds the specified work procedure for the application identified
by app_context
and returns an opaque unique identifier for this work procedure.
Multiple work procedures can be registered,
and the most recently added one is always the one that is called.
However, if a work procedure adds another work procedure,
the newly added one has lower priority than the current one.
To remove a work procedure, either return
True
from the procedure when it is called or use
XtRemoveWorkProc
outside of the procedure.
id | Specifies which work procedure to remove. |
The
XtRemoveWorkProc
function explicitly removes the specified background work procedure.
The event manager provides filters that can be applied to specific X events. The filters, which screen out events that are redundant or are temporarily unwanted, handle pointer motion compression, enter/leave compression, and exposure compression.
Widgets can have a hard time keeping up with a rapid stream of
pointer motion events. Furthermore,
they usually do not care about every motion event. To throw out
redundant motion events, the widget class field compress_motion should be
True
.
When a request for an event would return a motion event,
the Intrinsics check if there are any other motion events
for the same widget immediately
following the current one and, if so, skip all but the last of them.
To throw out pairs of enter and leave events that have no intervening events,
as can happen when the user moves the pointer across a widget
without stopping in it,
the widget class field compress_enterleave should be
True
.
These enter and leave events are not delivered to the client
if they are found together in the input queue.
Many widgets prefer to process a series of exposure events as a single expose region rather than as individual rectangles. Widgets with complex displays might use the expose region as a clip list in a graphics context, and widgets with simple displays might ignore the region entirely and redisplay their whole window or might get the bounding box from the region and redisplay only that rectangle.
In either case, these widgets do not care about getting partial exposure events. The compress_exposure field in the widget class structure specifies the type and number of exposure events that are dispatched to the widget's expose procedure. This field must be initialized to one of the following values:
#define XtExposeNoCompress ((XtEnum)False) #define XtExposeCompressSeries ((XtEnum)True) #define XtExposeCompressMultiple <implementation-defined> #define XtExposeCompressMaximal <implementation-defined>
optionally ORed with any combination of the following flags (all with
implementation-defined values):
XtExposeGraphicsExpose
,
XtExposeGraphicsExposeMerged
,
XtExposeNoExpose
,
and
XtExposeNoRegion
.
If the compress_exposure field in the widget class structure does not
specify
XtExposeNoCompress
,
the event manager calls the widget's expose procedure only
once for a series of exposure events.
In this case, all
Expose
or
GraphicsExpose
events are accumulated into a region.
When the final event is received,
the event manager replaces the rectangle in the event with the
bounding box for the region
and calls the widget's expose procedure,
passing the modified exposure event and (unless
XtExposeNoRegion
is specified) the region.
For more information on regions, see
Section 16.5 in
Xlib — C Language X Interface.
The values have the following interpretation:
XtExposeNoCompress
No exposure compression is performed; every selected event is individually dispatched to the expose procedure with a region argument of NULL.
XtExposeCompressSeries
Each series of exposure events is coalesced into a single event, which is dispatched when an exposure event with count equal to zero is reached.
XtExposeCompressMultiple
Consecutive series of exposure events are coalesced into a single event, which is dispatched when an exposure event with count equal to zero is reached and either the event queue is empty or the next event is not an exposure event for the same widget.
XtExposeCompressMaximal
All expose series currently in the queue for the widget are coalesced into a single event without regard to intervening nonexposure events. If a partial series is in the end of the queue, the Intrinsics will block until the end of the series is received.
The additional flags have the following meaning:
XtExposeGraphicsExpose
Specifies that
GraphicsExpose
events are also to be dispatched to
the expose procedure.
GraphicsExpose
events are compressed, if specified, in the same manner as
Expose
events.
XtExposeGraphicsExposeMerged
Specifies in the case of
XtExposeCompressMultiple
and
XtExposeCompressMaximal
that series of
GraphicsExpose
and
Expose
events are to be compressed together, with the final event type
determining the type of the event passed to the expose procedure.
If this flag is not set, then only series of the same event type
as the event at the head of the queue are coalesced. This flag
also implies
XtExposeGraphicsExpose
.
XtExposeNoExpose
Specifies that
NoExpose
events are also to be dispatched to the expose procedure.
NoExpose
events are never coalesced with
other exposure events or with each other.
XtExposeNoRegion
Specifies that the final region argument passed to the expose procedure is NULL. The rectangle in the event will still contain bounding box information for the entire series of compressed exposure events. This option saves processing time when the region is not needed by the widget.
Every primitive widget and some composite widgets display data on the screen by means of direct Xlib calls. Widgets cannot simply write to the screen and forget what they have done. They must keep enough state to redisplay the window or parts of it if a portion is obscured and then reexposed.
The expose procedure pointer in a widget class is of type
(*XtExposeProc)
.
w | Specifies the widget instance requiring redisplay. |
event | Specifies the exposure event giving the rectangle requiring redisplay. |
region | Specifies the union of all rectangles in this exposure sequence. |
The redisplay of a widget upon exposure is the responsibility of the expose procedure in the widget's class record. If a widget has no display semantics, it can specify NULL for the expose field. Many composite widgets serve only as containers for their children and have no expose procedure.
If the expose procedure is NULL,
XtRealizeWidget
fills in a default bit gravity of
NorthWestGravity
before it calls the widget's realize procedure.
If the widget's compress_exposure class field specifies
XtExposeNoCompress
or
XtExposeNoRegion
,
or if the event type is
NoExpose
(see the section called “Exposure Compression”),
region is NULL. If
XtExposeNoCompress
is not specified and the event type is not
NoExpose
,
the event is the final event in the compressed series
but x, y, width, and height contain
the bounding box for all the compressed events.
The region is created and destroyed by the Intrinsics, but
the widget is permitted to modify the region contents.
A small simple widget (for example, Label) can ignore the bounding box information in the event and redisplay the entire window. A more complicated widget (for example, Text) can use the bounding box information to minimize the amount of calculation and redisplay it does. A very complex widget uses the region as a clip list in a GC and ignores the event information. The expose procedure is not chained and is therefore responsible for exposure of all superclass data as well as its own.
However, it often is possible to anticipate the display needs of several levels of subclassing. For example, rather than implement separate display procedures for the widgets Label, Pushbutton, and Toggle, you could write a single display routine in Label that uses display state fields like
Boolean invert; Boolean highlight; Dimension highlight_width;
Label would have invert and highlight always
False
and highlight_width zero.
Pushbutton would dynamically set highlight and highlight_width,
but it would leave invert always
False
.
Finally, Toggle would dynamically set all three.
In this case,
the expose procedures for Pushbutton and Toggle inherit
their superclass's expose procedure;
see the section called “Inheritance of Superclass Operations”.
Some widgets may use substantial computing resources to produce the data they will display. However, this effort is wasted if the widget is not actually visible on the screen, that is, if the widget is obscured by another application or is iconified.
The visible field in the
core
widget structure provides a hint to the widget that it need not compute
display data.
This field is guaranteed to be
True
by the time an
exposure
event is processed if any part of the widget is visible,
but is
False
if the widget is fully obscured.
Widgets can use or ignore the visible hint.
If they ignore it,
they should have visible_interest in their widget class record set
False
.
In such cases,
the visible field is initialized
True
and never changes.
If visible_interest is
True
,
the event manager asks for
VisibilityNotify
events for the widget and sets visible to
True
on
VisibilityUnobscured
or
VisibilityPartiallyObscured
events and
False
on
VisibilityFullyObscured
events.
Event handlers are procedures called when specified events
occur in a widget.
Most widgets need not use event handlers explicitly.
Instead, they use the Intrinsics translation manager.
Event handler procedure pointers are of the type
(*XtEventHandler)
.
typedef void (*XtEventHandler)(
Widget w, XtPointer client_data, XEvent *event, Boolean *continue_to_dispatch)
;
w | Specifies the widget for which the event arrived. |
client_data | Specifies any client-specific information registered with the event handler. |
event | Specifies the triggering event. |
continue_to_dispatch | Specifies whether the remaining event handlers registered for the current event should be called. |
After receiving an event and before calling any event handlers, the
Boolean pointed to by continue_to_dispatch is initialized to
True
.
When an event handler is called, it may decide that further processing
of the event is not desirable and may store
False
in this Boolean, in
which case any handlers remaining to be called for the event are
ignored.
The circumstances under which the Intrinsics may add event handlers
to a widget are currently implementation-dependent. Clients must
therefore be aware that storing
False
into the continue_to_dispatch argument can lead to portability problems.
To register an event handler procedure with the dispatch mechanism, use
XtAddEventHandler
.
void XtAddEventHandler(
Widget w, EventMask event_mask, Boolean nonmaskable, XtEventHandler proc, XtPointer client_data)
;
w | Specifies the widget for which this event handler is being registered. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
event_mask | Specifies the event mask for which to call this procedure. |
nonmaskable |
Specifies whether this procedure should be
called on the nonmaskable events
|
proc | Specifies the procedure to be called. |
client_data | Specifies additional data to be passed to the event handler. |
The
XtAddEventHandler
function registers a procedure with the dispatch mechanism that is
to be called when an event that matches the mask occurs on the specified
widget.
Each widget has a single registered event handler list, which will
contain any procedure/client_data pair exactly once regardless of
the manner in which it is registered.
If the procedure is already registered with the same client_data
value,
the specified mask augments the existing mask.
If the widget is realized,
XtAddEventHandler
calls
XSelectInput
,
if necessary.
The order in which this procedure is called relative to other handlers
registered for the same event is not defined.
To remove a previously registered event handler, use
XtRemoveEventHandler
.
void XtRemoveEventHandler(
Widget w, EventMask event_mask, Boolean nonmaskable, XtEventHandler proc, XtPointer client_data)
;
w | Specifies the widget for which this procedure is registered. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
event_mask | Specifies the event mask for which to unregister this procedure. |
nonmaskable |
Specifies whether this procedure should be
removed on the nonmaskable events
|
proc | Specifies the procedure to be removed. |
client_data | Specifies the registered client data. |
The
XtRemoveEventHandler
function unregisters an event handler registered with
XtAddEventHandler
or
XtInsertEventHandler
for the specified events.
The request is ignored if client_data does not match the value given
when the handler was registered.
If the widget is realized and no other event handler requires the event,
XtRemoveEventHandler
calls
XSelectInput
.
If the specified procedure has not been registered
or if it has been registered with a different value of client_data,
XtRemoveEventHandler
returns without reporting an error.
To stop a procedure registered with
XtAddEventHandler
or
XtInsertEventHandler
from receiving all selected events, call
XtRemoveEventHandler
with an event_mask of
XtAllEvents
and nonmaskable
True
.
The procedure will continue to receive any events
that have been specified in calls to
XtAddRawEventHandler
or
XtInsertRawEventHandler
.
To register an event handler procedure that receives events before or
after all previously registered event handlers, use
XtInsertEventHandler
.
typedef enum {XtListHead, XtListTail} XtListPosition;
void XtInsertEventHandler(
Widget w, EventMask event_mask, Boolean nonmaskable, XtEventHandler proc, XtPointer client_data, XtListPosition position)
;
w | Specifies the widget for which this event handler is being registered. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
event_mask | Specifies the event mask for which to call this procedure. |
nonmaskable |
Specifies whether this procedure should be
called on the nonmaskable events
|
proc | Specifies the procedure to be called. |
client_data | Specifies additional data to be passed to the client's event handler. |
position | Specifies when the event handler is to be called relative to other previously registered handlers. |
XtInsertEventHandler
is identical to
XtAddEventHandler
with the additional position argument. If position is
XtListHead
,
the event
handler is registered so that it is called before any event
handlers that were previously registered for the same widget. If
position is
XtListTail
,
the event handler is registered to be called
after any previously registered event handlers. If the procedure is
already registered with the same client_data value, the specified mask
augments the existing mask and the procedure is repositioned in
the list.
On occasion,
clients need to register an event handler procedure with the
dispatch mechanism without explicitly
causing the X server to select for that event.
To do this, use
XtAddRawEventHandler
.
void XtAddRawEventHandler(
Widget w, EventMask event_mask, Boolean nonmaskable, XtEventHandler proc, XtPointer client_data)
;
w | Specifies the widget for which this event handler is being registered. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
event_mask | Specifies the event mask for which to call this procedure. |
nonmaskable |
Specifies whether this procedure should be
called on the nonmaskable events
|
proc | Specifies the procedure to be called. |
client_data | Specifies additional data to be passed to the client's event handler. |
The
XtAddRawEventHandler
function is similar to
XtAddEventHandler
except that it does not affect the widget's event mask and never causes an
XSelectInput
for its events.
Note that the widget might already have those mask bits set
because of other nonraw event handlers registered on it.
If the procedure is already registered with the same client_data,
the specified mask augments the existing mask.
The order in which this procedure is called relative to other handlers
registered for the same event is not defined.
To remove a previously registered raw event handler, use
XtRemoveRawEventHandler
.
void XtRemoveRawEventHandler(
Widget w, EventMask event_mask, Boolean nonmaskable, XtEventHandler proc, XtPointer client_data)
;
w | Specifies the widget for which this procedure is registered. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
event_mask | Specifies the event mask for which to unregister this procedure. |
nonmaskable |
Specifies whether this procedure should be
removed on the nonmaskable events
|
proc | Specifies the procedure to be registered. |
client_data | Specifies the registered client data. |
The
XtRemoveRawEventHandler
function unregisters an event handler registered with
XtAddRawEventHandler
or
XtInsertRawEventHandler
for the specified events without changing
the window event mask.
The request is ignored if client_data does not match the value given
when the handler was registered.
If the specified procedure has not been registered
or if it has been registered with a different value of client_data,
XtRemoveRawEventHandler
returns without reporting an error.
To stop a procedure
registered with
XtAddRawEventHandler
or
XtInsertRawEventHandler
from receiving all nonselected events, call
XtRemoveRawEventHandler
with an event_mask of
XtAllEvents
and nonmaskable
True
.
The procedure
will continue to receive any events that have been specified in calls to
XtAddEventHandler
or
XtInsertEventHandler
.
To register an event handler procedure that receives events before or
after all previously registered event handlers without selecting for
the events, use
XtInsertRawEventHandler
.
void XtInsertRawEventHandler(
Widget w, EventMask event_mask, Boolean nonmaskable, XtEventHandler proc, XtPointer client_data, XtListPosition position)
;
w | Specifies the widget for which this event handler is being registered. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
event_mask | Specifies the event mask for which to call this procedure. |
nonmaskable |
Specifies whether this procedure should be
called on the nonmaskable events
|
proc | Specifies the procedure to be registered. |
client_data | Specifies additional data to be passed to the client's event handler. |
position | Specifies when the event handler is to be called relative to other previously registered handlers. |
The
XtInsertRawEventHandler
function is similar to
XtInsertEventHandler
except that it does not modify the widget's event
mask and never causes an
XSelectInput
for the specified events. If
the procedure is already registered with the same client_data
value, the
specified mask augments the existing mask and the procedure is
repositioned in the list.
To retrieve the event mask for a given widget, use
XtBuildEventMask
.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
The
XtBuildEventMask
function returns the event mask representing the logical OR
of all event masks for event handlers registered on the widget with
XtAddEventHandler
and
XtInsertEventHandler
and all event translations, including accelerators,
installed on the widget.
This is the same event mask stored into the
XSetWindowAttributes
structure by
XtRealizeWidget
and sent to the server when event handlers and translations are installed or
removed on the realized widget.
To register an event handler procedure with the Intrinsics dispatch
mechanism according to an event type, use
XtInsertEventTypeHandler
.
void XtInsertEventTypeHandler(
Widget widget, int event_type, XtPointer select_data, XtEventHandler proc, XtPointer client_data, XtListPosition position)
;
widget | Specifies the widget for which this event handler is being registered. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
event_type | Specifies the event type for which to call this event handler. |
select_data | Specifies data used to request events of the specified type from the server, or NULL. |
proc | Specifies the event handler to be called. |
client_data | Specifies additional data to be passed to the event handler. |
position | Specifies when the event handler is to be called relative to other previously registered handlers. |
XtInsertEventTypeHandler
registers a procedure with the
dispatch mechanism that is to be called when an event that matches the
specified event_type is dispatched to the specified widget.
If event_type specifies one of the core X protocol events, then
select_data must be a pointer to a value of type
EventMask
,
indicating
the event mask to be used to select for the desired event. This event
mask is included in the value returned by
XtBuildEventMask
.
If the widget is realized,
XtInsertEventTypeHandler
calls
XSelectInput
if necessary. Specifying NULL for select_data is equivalent to
specifying a pointer to an event mask containing 0. This is similar
to the
XtInsertRawEventHandler
function.
If event_type specifies an extension event type, then the semantics of the data pointed to by select_data are defined by the extension selector registered for the specified event type.
In either case the Intrinsics are not required to copy the data pointed to by select_data, so the caller must ensure that it remains valid as long as the event handler remains registered with this value of select_data.
The position argument allows the client to control the order of
invocation of event handlers registered for the same event type. If
the client does not care about the order, it should normally specify
XtListTail
,
which registers this event handler after any previously
registered handlers for this event type.
Each widget has a single registered event handler list, which will
contain any procedure/client_data pair exactly once if it is
registered with
XtInsertEventTypeHandler
,
regardless of the manner
in which it is registered and regardless of the value(s)
of select_data. If the procedure is already registered with the
same client_data value, the specified mask augments the existing
mask and the procedure is repositioned in the list.
To remove an event handler registered with
XtInsertEventTypeHandler
,
use
XtRemoveEventTypeHandler
.
void XtRemoveEventTypeHandler(
Widget widget, int event_type, XtPointer select_data, XtEventHandler proc, XtPointer client_data)
;
widget | Specifies the widget for which the event handler was registered. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
event_type | Specifies the event type for which the handler was registered. |
select_data | Specifies data used to deselect events of the specified type from the server, or NULL. |
proc | Specifies the event handler to be removed. |
client_data | Specifies the additional client data with which the procedure was registered. |
The
XtRemoveEventTypeHandler
function unregisters an event handler
registered with
XtInsertEventTypeHandler
for the specified event type.
The request is ignored if client_data does not match the value given
when the handler was registered.
If event_type specifies one of the core X protocol events,
select_data must be a pointer to a value of type
EventMask, indicating the event
mask to be used to deselect for the appropriate event. If the widget
is realized,
XtRemoveEventTypeHandler
calls
XSelectInput
if necessary.
Specifying NULL for select_data is equivalent to specifying a pointer
to an event mask containing 0. This is similar to the
XtRemoveRawEventHandler
function.
If event_type specifies an extension event type, then the semantics of the data pointed to by select_data are defined by the extension selector registered for the specified event type.
To register a procedure to select extension events for a widget, use
XtRegisterExtensionSelector
.
void XtRegisterExtensionSelector(
Display *display, int min_event_type, int max_event_type, XtExtensionSelectProc proc, XtPointer client_data)
;
display | Specifies the display for which the extension selector is to be registered. |
min_event_type | |
max_event_type | Specifies the range of event types for the extension. |
proc | Specifies the extension selector procedure. |
client_data | Specifies additional data to be passed to the extension selector. |
The
XtRegisterExtensionSelector
function registers a procedure to arrange
for the delivery of extension events to widgets.
If min_event_type and max_event_type match the parameters
to a previous call to
XtRegisterExtensionSelector
for the same display, then proc and client_data
replace the previously
registered values. If the range specified by min_event_type
and max_event_type overlaps the range of the parameters to a
previous call for the same display in any other way, an error results.
When a widget is realized, after the core.realize method is called, the Intrinsics check to see if any event handler specifies an event type within the range of a registered extension selector. If so, the Intrinsics call each such selector. If an event type handler is added or removed, the Intrinsics check to see if the event type falls within the range of a registered extension selector, and if it does, calls the selector. In either case the Intrinsics pass a list of all the widget's event types that are within the selector's range. The corresponding select data are also passed. The selector is responsible for enabling the delivery of extension events required by the widget.
An extension selector is of type
(*XtExtensionSelectProc)
.
typedef void (*XtExtensionSelectProc)(
Widget widget, int *event_types, XtPointer *select_data, int count, XtPointer client_data)
;
widget | Specifies the widget that is being realized or is having an event handler added or removed. |
event_types | Specifies a list of event types that the widget has registered event handlers for. |
select_data |
Specifies a list of the select_data parameters specified in
|
count | Specifies the number of entries in the event_types and select_data lists. |
client_data | Specifies the additional client data with which the procedure was registered. |
The event_types and select_data lists will always have the
same number of elements, specified by count.
Each event type/select data pair represents one call to
XtInsertEventTypeHandler
.
To register a procedure to dispatch events of a specific type within
XtDispatchEvent
,
use
XtSetEventDispatcher
.
XtEventDispatchProc XtSetEventDispatcher(
Display *display, int event_type, XtEventDispatchProc proc)
;
display | Specifies the display for which the event dispatcher is to be registered. |
event_type | Specifies the event type for which the dispatcher should be invoked. |
proc | Specifies the event dispatcher procedure. |
The
XtSetEventDispatcher
function registers the event dispatcher procedure specified by proc
for events with the type event_type. The previously registered
dispatcher (or the default dispatcher if there was no previously registered
dispatcher) is returned. If proc is NULL, the default procedure is
restored for the specified type.
In the future, when
XtDispatchEvent
is called with an event type of event_type, the specified proc
(or the default dispatcher) is invoked to determine a widget
to which to dispatch the event.
The default dispatcher handles the Intrinsics modal cascade and keyboard focus mechanisms, handles the semantics of compress_enterleave and compress_motion, and discards all extension events.
An event dispatcher procedure pointer is of type
(*XtEventDispatchProc)
.
event | Passes the event to be dispatched. |
The event dispatcher procedure should determine whether this event is of a type that should be dispatched to a widget.
If the event should be dispatched to a widget, the event dispatcher
procedure should determine the appropriate widget to receive the
event, call
XFilterEvent
with the window of this widget, or
None
if the event is to be discarded, and if
XFilterEvent
returns
False
,
dispatch the event to the widget using
XtDispatchEventToWidget
.
The procedure should return
True
if either
XFilterEvent
or
XtDispatchEventToWidget
returned
True
and
False
otherwise.
If the event should not be dispatched to a widget, the event
dispatcher procedure should attempt to dispatch the event elsewhere as
appropriate and return
True
if it successfully dispatched the event and
False
otherwise.
Some dispatchers for extension events may wish to forward events
according to the Intrinsics' keyboard focus mechanism. To determine
which widget is the end result of keyboard event forwarding, use
XtGetKeyboardFocusWidget
.
widget | Specifies the widget to get forwarding information for. |
The
XtGetKeyboardFocusWidget
function returns the widget that would be the end result of keyboard
event forwarding for a keyboard event for the specified widget.
To dispatch an event to a specified widget, use
XtDispatchEventToWidget
.
widget | Specifies the widget to which to dispatch the event. |
event | Specifies a pointer to the event to be dispatched. |
The
XtDispatchEventToWidget
function scans the list of registered event handlers for the
specified widget and calls each handler that has been registered
for the specified event type, subject to the continue_to_dispatch
value returned by each handler.
The Intrinsics behave as if event handlers were registered at the head
of the list for
Expose
,
NoExpose
,
GraphicsExpose
,
and
VisibilityNotify
events to invoke the widget's expose procedure according to the exposure
compression rules and to update the widget's visible field
if visible_interest is
True
.
These internal event handlers never set continue_to_dispatch to
False
.
XtDispatchEventToWidget
returns
True
if any event handler was called and
False
otherwise.
The Intrinsics may be used in environments that offer multiple threads
of execution within the context of a single process. A multi-threaded
application using the Intrinsics must explicitly initialize the toolkit
for mutually exclusive access by calling
XtToolkitThreadInitialize
.
To test and initialize Intrinsics support for mutually exclusive thread
access, call
XtToolkitThreadInitialize
.
XtToolkitThreadInitialize
returns True
if the Intrinsics support mutually exclusive thread
access, otherwise it returns False
. XtToolkitThreadInitialize
must be called before
XtCreateApplicationContext
,
XtAppInitialize
,
XtOpenApplication
,
or
XtSetLanguageProc
is called. XtToolkitThreadInitialize
may be called more than once;
however, the application writer must ensure that it is not called
simultaneously by two or more threads.
The Intrinsics employs two levels of locking: application context and process. Locking an application context ensures mutually exclusive access by a thread to the state associated with the application context, including all displays and widgets associated with it. Locking a process ensures mutually exclusive access by a thread to Intrinsics process global data.
A client may acquire a lock multiple times and the effect is cumulative. The client must ensure that the lock is released an equal number of times in order for the lock to be acquired by another thread.
Most application writers will have little need to use locking as the Intrinsics performs the necessary locking internally. Resource converters are an exception. They require the application context or process to be locked before the application can safely call them directly, for example:
... XtAppLock(app_context); XtCvtStringToPixel(dpy, args, num_args, fromVal, toVal, closure_ret); XtAppUnlock(app_context); ...
When the application relies upon
XtConvertAndStore
or a converter to provide the storage for the results of a
conversion, the application should acquire the process lock before
calling out and hold the lock until the results have been copied.
Application writers who write their own utility functions, such as one which retrieves the being_destroyed field from a widget instance, must lock the application context before accessing widget internal data. For example:
#include <X11/CoreP.h> Boolean BeingDestroyed (Widget widget) { Boolean ret; XtAppLock(XtWidgetToApplicationContext(widget)); ret = widget->core.being_destroyed; XtAppUnlock(XtWidgetToApplicationContext(widget)); return ret; }
A client that wishes to atomically call two or more Intrinsics functions must lock the application context. For example:
... XtAppLock(XtWidgetToApplicationContext(widget)); XtUnmanageChild (widget1); XtManageChild (widget2); XtAppUnlock(XtWidgetToApplicationContext(widget)); ...
To ensure mutual exclusion of application context, display, or
widget internal state, use
XtAppLock.
app_context | Specifies the application context to lock. |
XtAppLock
blocks until it is able to acquire the lock. Locking the
application context also ensures that only the thread holding the lock
makes Xlib calls from within Xt. An application that makes its own
direct Xlib calls must either lock the application context around every
call or enable thread locking in Xlib.
To unlock a locked application context, use
XtAppUnlock.
app_context | Specifies the application context that was previously locked. |
To ensure mutual exclusion of X Toolkit process global data, a
widget writer must use
XtProcessLock.
XtProcessLock
blocks until it is able to acquire the lock.
Widget writers may use XtProcessLock to guarantee mutually exclusive
access to widget static data.
To unlock a locked process, use
XtProcessUnlock
.
To lock both an application context and the process at the same
time, call
XtAppLock
first and then
XtProcessLock
.
To release both locks, call
XtProcessUnlock
first and then
XtAppUnlock
.
The order is important to avoid deadlock.
In a nonthreaded environment an application writer could reasonably assume that it is safe to exit the application from a quit callback. This assumption may no longer hold true in a multi-threaded environment; therefore it is desirable to provide a mechanism to terminate an event-processing loop without necessarily terminating its thread.
To indicate that the event loop should terminate after the current
event dispatch has completed, use
XtAppSetExitFlag
.
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
XtAppMainLoop
tests the value of the flag and will return if the flag is True
.
Application writers who implement their own main loop may test the
value of the exit flag with
XtAppGetExitFlag
.
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
XtAppGetExitFlag
will normally return False
, indicating that event processing
may continue. When
XtAppGetExitFlag
returns True
, the loop must terminate and return to the caller,
which might then destroy the application context.
Application writers should be aware that, if a thread is blocked in
XtAppNextEvent
,
XtAppPeekEvent
,
or
XtAppProcessEvent
and another thread in the same application context opens a new display,
adds an alternate input, or a timeout, any new source(s) will not
normally be “noticed” by the blocked thread. Any new sources are
“noticed” the next time one of these functions is called.
The Intrinsics manage access to events on a last-in, first-out basis. If
multiple threads in the same application context block in
XtAppNextEvent
,
XtAppPeekEvent
,
or
XtAppProcessEvent
,
the last thread to call one of these functions is the first
thread to return.
Table of Contents
Applications and other widgets often need to register a procedure with a widget that gets called under certain prespecified conditions. For example, when a widget is destroyed, every procedure on the widget's destroy_callbacks list is called to notify clients of the widget's impending doom.
Every widget has an XtNdestroyCallbacks callback list resource. Widgets can define additional callback lists as they see fit. For example, the Pushbutton widget has a callback list to notify clients when the button has been activated.
Except where otherwise noted, it is the intent that all Intrinsics functions may be called at any time, including from within callback procedures, action routines, and event handlers.
Callback procedure pointers for use in callback lists are of type
(*XtCallbackProc)
.
w | Specifies the widget owning the list in which the callback is registered. |
client_data | Specifies additional data supplied by the client when the procedure was registered. |
call_data | Specifies any callback-specific data the widget wants to pass to the client. For example, when Scrollbar executes its XtNthumbChanged callback list, it passes the new position of the thumb. |
The client_data argument provides a way for the
client registering the callback procedure also to register client-specific data,
for example, a pointer to additional information about the widget,
a reason for invoking the callback, and so on.
The client_data value may be NULL
if all necessary information is in the widget.
The call_data argument is a convenience to avoid having simple
cases where the client could otherwise always call
XtGetValues
or a widget-specific function to retrieve data from the widget.
Widgets should generally avoid putting complex state information
in call_data.
The client can use the more general data retrieval methods, if necessary.
Whenever a client wants to pass a callback list as an argument in an
XtCreateWidget
,
XtSetValues
,
or
XtGetValues
call, it should specify the address
of a NULL-terminated array of type
XtCallbackList
.
typedef struct { XtCallbackProc callback; XtPointer closure; } XtCallbackRec, *XtCallbackList;
For example, the callback list for procedures A and B with client data clientDataA and clientDataB, respectively, is
static XtCallbackRec callbacks[] = { {A, (XtPointer) clientDataA}, {B, (XtPointer) clientDataB}, {(XtCallbackProc) NULL, (XtPointer) NULL} };
Although callback lists are passed by address in arglists and varargs lists, the Intrinsics recognize callback lists through the widget resource list and will copy the contents when necessary. Widget initialize and set_values procedures should not allocate memory for the callback list contents. The Intrinsics automatically do this, potentially using a different structure for their internal representation.
Whenever a widget contains a callback list for use by clients,
it also exports in its public .h file the resource name of the callback list.
Applications and client widgets never access callback list fields directly.
Instead, they always identify the desired callback list by using the exported
resource name.
All the callback manipulation functions described in this chapter
except
XtCallCallbackList
check
to see that the requested callback list is indeed implemented by the widget.
For the Intrinsics to find and correctly handle callback lists,
they must be declared with a resource type of
XtRCallback
.
The internal representation of a callback list is
implementation-dependent; widgets may make no assumptions about the
value stored in this resource if it is non-NULL. Except to compare
the value to NULL (which is equivalent to
XtCallbackStatus
XtCallbackHasNone
),
access to callback list resources must be made
through other Intrinsics procedures.
To add a callback procedure to a widget's callback list, use
XtAddCallback
.
void XtAddCallback(
Widget w, const char * callback_name, XtCallbackProc callback, XtPointer client_data)
;
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
callback_name | Specifies the callback list to which the procedure is to be appended. |
callback | Specifies the callback procedure. |
client_data | Specifies additional data to be passed to the specified procedure when it is invoked, or NULL. |
A callback will be invoked as many times as it occurs in the callback list.
To add a list of callback procedures to a given widget's callback list, use
XtAddCallbacks
.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
callback_name | Specifies the callback list to which the procedures are to be appended. |
callbacks | Specifies the null-terminated list of callback procedures and corresponding client data. |
To delete a callback procedure from a widget's callback list, use
XtRemoveCallback
.
void XtRemoveCallback(
Widget w, const char * callback_name, XtCallbackProc callback, XtPointer client_data)
;
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
callback_name | Specifies the callback list from which the procedure is to be deleted. |
callback | Specifies the callback procedure. |
client_data | Specifies the client data to match with the registered callback entry. |
The
XtRemoveCallback
function removes a callback only if both the procedure and the client
data match.
To delete a list of callback procedures from a given widget's callback list, use
XtRemoveCallbacks
.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
callback_name | Specifies the callback list from which the procedures are to be deleted. |
callbacks | Specifies the null-terminated list of callback procedures and corresponding client data. |
To delete all callback procedures from a given widget's callback list
and free all storage associated with the callback list, use
XtRemoveAllCallbacks
.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
callback_name | Specifies the callback list to be cleared. |
To execute the procedures in a given widget's callback list,
specifying the callback list by resource name, use
XtCallCallbacks
.
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
callback_name | Specifies the callback list to be executed. |
call_data | Specifies a callback-list-specific data value to pass to each of the callback procedure in the list, or NULL. |
XtCallCallbacks
calls each of the callback procedures in the list
named by callback_name in the specified widget, passing the client
data registered with the procedure and call-data.
To execute the procedures in a callback list, specifying the callback
list by address, use
XtCallCallbackList
.
widget | Specifies the widget instance that contains the callback list. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
callbacks | Specifies the callback list to be executed. |
call_data | Specifies a callback-list-specific data value to pass to each of the callback procedures in the list, or NULL. |
The callbacks parameter must specify the contents of a widget or
object resource declared with representation type
XtRCallback
.
If callbacks is NULL,
XtCallCallbackList
returns immediately; otherwise it calls each of the callback
procedures in the list, passing the client data and call_data.
To find out the status of a given widget's callback list, use
XtHasCallbacks
.
typedef enum {XtCallbackNoList, XtCallbackHasNone, XtCallbackHasSome} XtCallbackStatus;
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
callback_name | Specifies the callback list to be checked. |
The
XtHasCallbacks
function first checks to see if the widget has a callback list identified
by callback_name.
If the callback list does not exist,
XtHasCallbacks
returns
XtCallbackNoList
.
If the callback list exists but is empty,
it returns
XtCallbackHasNone
.
If the callback list exists and has at least one callback registered,
it returns
XtCallbackHasSome
.
Table of Contents
A resource is a field in the widget record with a corresponding
resource entry in the resources list of the widget or any of its
superclasses.
This means that the field is
settable by
XtCreateWidget
(by naming the field in the argument list), by an
entry in a resource file (by using either the name or class), and by
XtSetValues
.
In addition, it is readable by
XtGetValues
.
Not all fields in a widget record are resources.
Some are for bookkeeping use by the
generic routines (like managed and being_destroyed).
Others can be for local bookkeeping,
and still others are derived from resources
(many graphics contexts and pixmaps).
Widgets typically need to obtain a large set of resources at widget
creation time.
Some of the resources come from the argument list supplied in the call to
XtCreateWidget
,
some from the resource database,
and some from the internal defaults specified by the widget.
Resources are obtained first from the argument list,
then from the resource database for all resources not specified
in the argument list,
and last, from the internal default, if needed.
A resource entry specifies a field in the widget,
the textual name and class of the field that argument lists
and external resource files use to refer to the field,
and a default value that the field should get if no value is specified.
The declaration for the
XtResource
structure is
typedef struct { String resource_name; String resource_class; String resource_type; Cardinal resource_size; Cardinal resource_offset; String default_type; XtPointer default_addr; } XtResource, *XtResourceList;
When the resource list is specified as the
CoreClassPart
,
ObjectClassPart
,
RectObjClassPart
,
or
ConstraintClassPart
resources field, the strings pointed to by resource_name,
resource_class, resource_type, and default_type must
be permanently allocated prior to or during the execution of the class
initialization procedure and must not be subsequently deallocated.
The resource_name field contains the name used by clients to access the field
in the widget.
By convention, it starts with a lowercase letter
and is spelled exactly like the field name,
except all underscores (_) are deleted and the next letter is replaced by its
uppercase counterpart.
For example, the resource name for background_pixel becomes backgroundPixel.
Resource names beginning with the two-character
sequence “xt”, and resource classes beginning with the two-character
sequence “Xt” are reserved to the Intrinsics for future standard and
implementation-dependent uses.
Widget header files typically contain a symbolic name for each resource name.
All resource names, classes, and types used by the Intrinsics are named in
<X11/StringDefs.h>
.
The Intrinsics's symbolic resource names begin with
“XtN”
and are followed by the string name (for example, XtNbackgroundPixel
for backgroundPixel).
The resource_class field contains the class string used in resource specification files to identify the field. A resource class provides two functions:
It isolates an application from different representations that widgets can use for a similar resource.
It lets you specify values for several actual resources with a single name. A resource class should be chosen to span a group of closely related fields.
For example, a widget can have several pixel resources: background, foreground, border, block cursor, pointer cursor, and so on. Typically, the background defaults to white and everything else to black. The resource class for each of these resources in the resource list should be chosen so that it takes the minimal number of entries in the resource database to make the background ivory and everything else darkblue.
In this case, the background pixel should have a resource class of “Background” and all the other pixel entries a resource class of “Foreground”. Then, the resource file needs only two lines to change all pixels to ivory or darkblue:
*Background: ivory *Foreground: darkblue
Similarly, a widget may have several font resources (such as normal and bold), but all fonts should have the class Font. Thus, changing all fonts simply requires only a single line in the default resource file:
*Font: 6x13
By convention, resource classes are always spelled starting with a capital letter to distinguish them from resource names. Their symbolic names are preceded with “XtC” (for example, XtCBackground).
The resource_type field gives the physical representation type of the resource
and also encodes information about the specific usage of the field.
By convention, it starts with an uppercase letter and is
spelled identically to the type name of the field.
The resource type is used when resources are fetched to
convert from the resource database format (usually
String
)
or the format of the resource default value
(almost anything, but often
String
)
to the desired
physical representation (see the section called “Resource Conversions”).
The Intrinsics define the following resource types:
Resource Type | Structure or Field Type |
---|---|
XtRAcceleratorTable | XtAccelerators |
XtRAtom | Atom |
XtRBitmap | Pixmap, depth=1 |
XtRBoolean | Boolean |
XtRBool | Bool |
XtRCallback | XtCallbackList |
XtRCardinal | Cardinal |
XtRColor | XColor |
XtRColormap | Colormap |
XtRCommandArgArray | String* |
XtRCursor | Cursor |
XtRDimension | Dimension |
XtRDirectoryString | String |
XtRDisplay | Display* |
XtREnum | XtEnum |
XtREnvironmentArray | String* |
XtRFile | FILE* |
XtRFloat | float |
XtRFont | Font |
XtRFontSet | XFontSet |
XtRFontStruct | XFontStruct* |
XtRFunction | (*)(Widget) |
XtRGeometry | char*, format as defined by
XParseGeometry |
XtRGravity | int |
XtRInitialState | int |
XtRInt | int |
XtRLongBoolean | long |
XtRObject | Object |
XtRPixel | Pixel |
XtRPixmap | Pixmap |
XtRPointer | XtPointer |
XtRPosition | Position |
XtRRestartStyle | unsigned char |
XtRScreen | Screen* |
XtRShort | short |
XtRSmcConn | XtPointer |
XtRString | String |
XtRStringArray | String* |
XtRStringTable | String* |
XtRTranslationTable | XtTranslations |
XtRUnsignedChar | unsigned char |
XtRVisual | Visual* |
XtRWidget | Widget |
XtRWidgetClass | WidgetClass |
XtRWidgetList | WidgetList |
XtRWindow | Window |
<X11/StringDefs.h>
also defines the following resource types as a
convenience for widgets, although they do not have any corresponding
data type assigned:
XtREditMode
,
XtRJustify
,
and
XtROrientation
.
The resource_size field is the size of the physical representation in bytes;
you should specify it as
sizeof
(type) so that the
compiler fills in the value.
The resource_offset field is the offset in bytes of the field
within the widget.
You should use the
XtOffsetOf
macro to retrieve this value.
The default_type field is the representation type of the default
resource value.
If default_type is different from resource_type and the default value
is needed,
the resource manager invokes a conversion procedure from default_type
to resource_type.
Whenever possible,
the default type should be identical to the resource type in order
to minimize widget creation time.
However, there are sometimes no values of the type that the program
can easily specify.
In this case,
it should be a value for which the converter is guaranteed to work (for example,
XtDefaultForeground
for a pixel resource).
The default_addr field specifies the address of the default resource value.
As a special case, if default_type is
XtRString
,
then the value in the default_addr field is the pointer to
the string rather than a pointer to the pointer.
The default is used if a resource is not specified in the argument list
or in the resource database or if the conversion from the representation
type stored in the resource database fails,
which can happen for various reasons (for example, a misspelled entry in a
resource file).
Two special representation types
(XtRImmediate
and
XtRCallProc)
are usable only as default resource types.
XtRImmediate
indicates that the value in the default_addr field is the actual value of
the resource rather than the address of the value.
The value must be in the correct representation type for the resource,
coerced to an
XtPointer
.
No conversion is possible, since there is no source representation type.
XtRCallProc
indicates that the value in the default_addr field is a procedure
pointer.
This procedure is automatically invoked with the widget,
resource_offset, and a pointer to an
XrmValue
in which to store the result.
XtRCallProc
procedure pointers are of type
(*XtResourceDefaultProc)
.
w | Specifies the widget whose resource value is to be obtained. |
offset | Specifies the offset of the field in the widget record. |
value | Specifies the resource value descriptor to return. |
The
(*XtResourceDefaultProc)
procedure should fill in the value->addr field with a pointer
to the resource value in its correct representation type.
To get the resource list structure for a particular class, use
XtGetResourceList
.
void XtGetResourceList(
WidgetClass class, XtResourceList *resources_return, Cardinal *num_resources_return)
;
class |
Specifies the object class to be queried. It must be
|
resources_return | Returns the resource list. |
num_resources_return | Returns the number of entries in the resource list. |
If
XtGetResourceList
is called before the class is initialized,
it returns the resource list as specified in the class record.
If it is called after the class has been initialized,
XtGetResourceList
returns a merged resource list that includes the resources
for all superclasses.
The list returned by
XtGetResourceList
should be freed using
XtFree
when it is no longer needed.
To get the constraint resource list structure for a particular widget
class, use
XtGetConstraintResourceList
.
void XtGetConstraintResourceList(
WidgetClass class, XtResourceList *resources_return, Cardinal *num_resources_return)
;
class |
Specifies the object class to be queried. It must be
|
resources_return | Returns the constraint resource list. |
num_resources_return | Returns the number of entries in the constraint resource list. |
If
XtGetConstraintResourceList
is called before the widget class is
initialized, the resource list as specified in the widget
class Constraint part is returned. If
XtGetConstraintResourceList
is called after the widget class has been initialized, the merged
resource list for the class and all Constraint superclasses is
returned. If the
specified class is not a subclass of
constraintWidgetClass
,
*resources_return is set to NULL
and *num_resources_return is set to zero.
The list returned by
XtGetConstraintResourceList
should be freed using
XtFree
when it is no longer needed.
The routines
XtSetValues
and
XtGetValues
also use the resource list to set and get widget state;
see the section called “Obtaining Widget State” and
the section called “Setting Widget State”.
Here is an abbreviated version of a possible resource list for a Label widget:
/* Resources specific to Label */ static XtResource resources[] = { {XtNforeground, XtCForeground, XtRPixel, sizeof(Pixel), XtOffsetOf(LabelRec, label.foreground), XtRString, XtDefaultForeground}, {XtNfont, XtCFont, XtRFontStruct, sizeof(XFontStruct*), XtOffsetOf(LabelRec, label.font), XtRString, XtDefaultFont}, {XtNlabel, XtCLabel, XtRString, sizeof(String), XtOffsetOf(LabelRec, label.label), XtRString, NULL}, . . . }
The complete resource name for a field of a widget instance is the
concatenation of the application shell name (from
XtAppCreateShell
),
the instance names of all the widget's parents up to the
top of the widget tree,
the instance name of the widget itself,
and the resource name of the specified field of the widget.
Similarly,
the full resource class of a field of a widget instance is the
concatenation of the application class (from
XtAppCreateShell
),
the widget class names of all the widget's parents up to the
top of the widget tree,
the widget class name of the widget itself,
and the resource class of the specified field of the widget.
To determine the byte offset of a field within a structure type, use
XtOffsetOf
.
structure_type | Specifies a type that is declared as a structure. |
field_name | Specifies the name of a member within the structure. |
The
XtOffsetOf
macro expands to a constant expression that gives the
offset in bytes to the specified structure member from the beginning
of the structure. It is normally used to statically initialize
resource lists and is more portable than
XtOffset
,
which serves the same function.
To determine the byte offset of a field within a structure pointer type, use
XtOffset
.
pointer_type | Specifies a type that is declared as a pointer to a structure. |
field_name | Specifies the name of a member within the structure. |
The
XtOffset
macro expands to a constant expression that gives the
offset in bytes to the specified structure member from the beginning
of the structure. It may be used to statically initialize
resource lists.
XtOffset
is less portable than
XtOffsetOf
.
The
XtCreateWidget
function gets resources as a superclass-to-subclass chained operation.
That is, the resources specified in the
objectClass
resource list are fetched,
then those in
rectObjClass
,
and so on down to the resources specified
for this widget's class. Within a class, resources are fetched in the order
they are declared.
In general, if a widget resource field is declared in a superclass, that field is included in the superclass's resource list and need not be included in the subclass's resource list. For example, the Core class contains a resource entry for background_pixel. Consequently, the implementation of Label need not also have a resource entry for background_pixel. However, a subclass, by specifying a resource entry for that field in its own resource list, can override the resource entry for any field declared in a superclass. This is most often done to override the defaults provided in the superclass with new ones. At class initialization time, resource lists for that class are scanned from the superclass down to the class to look for resources with the same offset. A matching resource in a subclass will be reordered to override the superclass entry. If reordering is necessary, a copy of the superclass resource list is made to avoid affecting other subclasses of the superclass.
Also at class initialization time, the Intrinsics produce an internal representation of the resource list to optimize access time when creating widgets. In order to save memory, the Intrinsics may overwrite the storage allocated for the resource list in the class record; therefore, widgets must allocate resource lists in writable storage and must not access the list contents directly after the class_initialize procedure has returned.
A widget does not do anything to retrieve its own resources;
instead,
XtCreateWidget
does this automatically before calling the class initialize procedure.
Some widgets have subparts that are not widgets but for which the widget
would like to fetch resources.
Such widgets call
XtGetSubresources
to accomplish this.
void XtGetSubresources(
Widget w, XtPointer base, const char * name, const char * class, XtResourceList resources, Cardinal num_resources, ArgList args, Cardinal num_args)
;
w | Specifies the object used to qualify the subpart resource name and class. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
base | Specifies the base address of the subpart data structure into which the resources will be written. |
name | Specifies the name of the subpart. |
class | Specifies the class of the subpart. |
resources | Specifies the resource list for the subpart. |
num_resources | Specifies the number of entries in the resource list. |
args | Specifies the argument list to override any other resource specifications. |
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in the argument list. |
The
XtGetSubresources
function constructs a name and class list from the application name and class,
the names and classes of all the object's ancestors, and the object itself.
Then it appends to this list the name and class pair passed in.
The resources are fetched from the argument list, the resource database,
or the default values in the resource list.
Then they are copied into the subpart record.
If args is NULL,
num_args must be zero.
However, if num_args is zero,
the argument list is not referenced.
XtGetSubresources
may overwrite the specified resource list with an
equivalent representation in an internal format, which optimizes access
time if the list is used repeatedly. The resource list must be
allocated in writable storage, and the caller must not modify the list
contents after the call if the same list is to be used again.
Resources fetched by
XtGetSubresources
are reference-counted as
if they were referenced by the specified object. Subresources might
therefore be freed from the conversion cache and destroyed
when the object is destroyed, but not before then.
To fetch resources for widget subparts using varargs lists, use
XtVaGetSubresources
.
void XtVaGetSubresources(
Widget w, XtPointer base, const char * name, const char * class, XtResourceList resources, Cardinal num_resources, ...)
;
w | Specifies the object used to qualify the subpart resource name and class. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
base | Specifies the base address of the subpart data structure into which the resources will be written. |
name | Specifies the name of the subpart. |
class | Specifies the class of the subpart. |
resources | Specifies the resource list for the subpart. |
num_resources | Specifies the number of entries in the resource list. |
... | Specifies the variable argument list to override any other resource specifications. |
XtVaGetSubresources
is identical in function to
XtGetSubresources
with the args and num_args parameters replaced by a varargs list, as
described in Section 2.5.1.
To retrieve resources that are not specific to a widget
but apply to the overall application, use
XtGetApplicationResources
.
void XtGetApplicationResources(
Widget w, XtPointer base, XtResourceList resources, Cardinal num_resources, ArgList args, Cardinal num_args)
;
w | Specifies the object that identifies the resource database to search (the database is that associated with the display for this object). Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
base | Specifies the base address into which the resource values will be written. |
resources | Specifies the resource list. |
num_resources | Specifies the number of entries in the resource list. |
args | Specifies the argument list to override any other resource specifications. |
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in the argument list. |
The
XtGetApplicationResources
function first uses the passed object,
which is usually an application shell widget,
to construct a resource name and class list.
The full name and class of the specified object (that is, including its
ancestors, if any) is logically added to the
front of each resource name and class.
Then it retrieves the resources from the argument list,
the resource database, or the resource list default values.
After adding base to each address,
XtGetApplicationResources
copies the resources into the addresses
obtained by adding base to each offset in the resource list.
If args is NULL,
num_args must be zero.
However, if num_args is zero,
the argument list is not referenced.
The portable way to specify application resources is to declare them
as members of a structure and pass the address of the structure
as the base argument.
XtGetApplicationResources
may overwrite the specified resource list
with an equivalent representation in an internal format, which
optimizes access time if the list is used repeatedly. The resource
list must be allocated in writable storage, and the caller must not
modify the list contents after the call if the same list is to be
used again. Any per-display resources fetched by
XtGetApplicationResources
will not be freed from the resource cache until the display is closed.
To retrieve resources for the overall application using varargs lists, use
XtVaGetApplicationResources
.
void XtVaGetApplicationResources(
Widget w, XtPointer base, XtResourceList resources, Cardinal num_resources, ...)
;
w | Specifies the object that identifies the resource database to search (the database is that associated with the display for this object). Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
base | Specifies the base address into which the resource values will be written. |
resources | Specifies the resource list for the subpart. |
num_resources | Specifies the number of entries in the resource list. |
... | Specifies the variable argument list to override any other resource specifications. |
XtVaGetApplicationResources
is identical in function to
XtGetApplicationResources
with the args and num_args parameters
replaced by a varargs list, as described in Section 2.5.1.
The Intrinsics provide a mechanism for registering representation converters that are automatically invoked by the resource-fetching routines. The Intrinsics additionally provide and register several commonly used converters. This resource conversion mechanism serves several purposes:
It permits user and application resource files to contain textual representations of nontextual values.
It allows textual or other representations of default resource values that are dependent on the display, screen, or colormap, and thus must be computed at runtime.
It caches conversion source and result data. Conversions that require much computation or space (for example, string-to-translation-table) or that require round-trips to the server (for example, string-to-font or string-to-color) are performed only once.
The Intrinsics define all the representations used in the
Object,
RectObj,
Core,
Composite,
Constraint,
and
Shell
widget classes.
The Intrinsics register the following resource converters that accept
input values of representation type
XtRString
.
Target Representation | Converter Name | Additional Args |
---|---|---|
XtRAcceleratorTable | XtCvtStringToAcceleratorTable | |
XtRAtom | XtCvtStringToAtom | Display* |
XtRBoolean | XtCvtStringToBoolean | |
XtRBool | XtCvtStringToBool | |
XtRCommandArgArray | XtCvtStringToCommandArgArray | |
XtRCursor | XtCvtStringToCursor | Display* |
XtRDimension | XtCvtStringToDimension | |
XtRDirectoryString | XtCvtStringToDirectoryString | |
XtRDisplay | XtCvtStringToDisplay | |
XtRFile | XtCvtStringToFile | |
XtRFloat | XtCvtStringToFloat | |
XtRFont | XtCvtStringToFont | Display* |
XtRFontSet | XtCvtStringToFontSet | Display*, String locale |
XtRFontStruct | XtCvtStringToFontStruct | Display* |
XtRGravity | XtCvtStringToGravity | |
XtRInitialState | XtCvtStringToInitialState | |
XtRInt | XtCvtStringToInt | |
XtRPixel | XtCvtStringToPixel | colorConvertArgs |
XtRPosition | XtCvtStringToPosition | |
XtRRestartStyle | XtCvtStringToRestartStyle | |
XtRShort | XtCvtStringToShort | |
XtRTranslationTable | XtCvtStringToTranslationTable | |
XtRUnsignedChar | XtCvtStringToUnsignedChar | |
XtRVisual | XtCvtStringToVisual | Screen*, Cardinal depth |
The String-to-Pixel conversion has two predefined constants that are
guaranteed to work and contrast with each other:
XtDefaultForeground
and
XtDefaultBackground
.
They evaluate to the black and white pixel values of the widget's screen,
respectively.
If the application resource reverseVideo is
True
,
they evaluate to the white and black pixel values of the widget's screen,
respectively.
Similarly, the String-to-Font and String-to-FontStruct converters recognize
the constant
XtDefaultFont
and evaluate this in the following manner:
Query the resource database for the resource whose full name
is “xtDefaultFont”, class “XtDefaultFont” (that is, no widget
name/class prefixes), and use a type
XtRString
value returned as the font name or a type
XtRFont
or
XtRFontStruct
value directly as the resource value.
If the resource database does not contain a value for xtDefaultFont,
class XtDefaultFont, or if the returned font name cannot be
successfully opened, an implementation-defined font in ISO8859-1
character set encoding is opened. (One possible algorithm is to
perform an
XListFonts
using a wildcard font name and use the first
font in the list. This wildcard font name should be as broad as
possible to maximize the probability of locating a useable font;
for example, “-*-*-*-R-*-*-*-120-*-*-*-*-ISO8859-1
”.)
If no suitable ISO8859-1 font can be found, issue a warning message
and return
False
.
The String-to-FontSet converter recognizes the constant
XtDefaultFontSet
and evaluate this in the following manner:
Query the resource database for the resource whose full name
is “xtDefaultFontSet”, class “XtDefaultFontSet” (that is, no widget
name/class prefixes), and use a type
XtRString
value returned as the base font name list or a type
XtRFontSet
value directly as the resource value.
If the resource database does not contain a value for xtDefaultFontSet,
class XtDefaultFontSet, or if a font set cannot be
successfully created from this resource,
an implementation-defined font set is created.
(One possible algorithm is to
perform an
XCreateFontSet
using a wildcard base font name.
This wildcard base font name should be as broad as
possible to maximize the probability of locating a useable font;
for example, “-*-*-*-R-*-*-*-120-*-*-*-*
”.)
If no suitable font set can be created, issue a warning message
and return
False
.
If a font set is created but missing_charset_list is not empty, a warning is issued and the partial font set is returned. The Intrinsics register the String-to-FontSet converter with a conversion argument list that extracts the current process locale at the time the converter is invoked. This ensures that the converter is invoked again if the same conversion is required in a different locale.
The String-to-Gravity conversion accepts string values that are the
names of window and bit gravities and their numerical equivalents,
as defined in Xlib — C Language X Interface:
ForgetGravity
,
UnmapGravity
,
NorthWestGravity
,
NorthGravity
,
NorthEastGravity
,
WestGravity
,
CenterGravity
,
EastGravity
,
SouthWestGravity
,
SouthGravity
,
SouthEastGravity
,
and
StaticGravity
.
Alphabetic case is not significant in the conversion.
The String-to-CommandArgArray conversion parses a String into an array of strings. White space characters separate elements of the command line. The converter recognizes the backslash character “\” as an escape character to allow the following white space character to be part of the array element.
The String-to-DirectoryString conversion recognizes the string “XtCurrentDirectory” and returns the result of a call to the operating system to get the current directory.
The String-to-RestartStyle conversion accepts the values
RestartIfRunning
,
RestartAnyway
,
RestartImmediately
,
and
RestartNever
as defined by the X Session Management Protocol.
The String-to-InitialState conversion accepts the values
NormalState
or
IconicState
as defined by the Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual.
The String-to-Visual conversion calls
XMatchVisualInfo
using the
screen and depth fields from the core part and returns the first
matching Visual on the list. The widget resource list must be certain
to specify any resource of type
XtRVisual
after the depth resource.
The allowed string values are the visual class names defined in X Window System Protocol,
Section 8;
StaticGray
,
StaticColor
,
TrueColor
,
GrayScale
,
PseudoColor
,
and
DirectColor
.
The Intrinsics register the following resource converter that accepts
an input value of representation type
XtRColor
.
Target Representation | Converter Name | Additional Args |
---|---|---|
XtRPixel | XtCvtColorToPixel |
The Intrinsics register the following resource converters that accept
input values of representation type
XtRInt
.
Target Representation | Converter Name | Additional Args |
---|---|---|
XtRBoolean | XtCvtIntToBoolean | |
XtRBool | XtCvtIntToBool | |
XtRColor | XtCvtIntToColor | colorConvertArgs |
XtRDimension | XtCvtIntToDimension | |
XtRFloat | XtCvtIntToFloat | |
XtRFont | XtCvtIntToFont | |
XtRPixel | XtCvtIntToPixel | |
XtRPixmap | XtCvtIntToPixmap | |
XtRPosition | XtCvtIntToPosition | |
XtRShort | XtCvtIntToShort | |
XtRUnsignedChar | XtCvtIntToUnsignedChar |
The Intrinsics register the following resource converter that accepts
an input value of representation type
XtRPixel
.
Target Representation | Converter Name | Additional Args |
---|---|---|
XtRColor | XtCvtPixelToColor |
Type converters use pointers to
XrmValue
structures (defined in
<X11/Xresource.h>;
see Section 15.4 in
Xlib — C Language X Interface)
for input and output values.
typedef struct { unsigned int size; XPointer addr; } XrmValue, *XrmValuePtr;
The addr field specifies the address of the data, and the size
field gives the total number of significant bytes in the data.
For values of type
String
,
addr is the address of the first character and size
includes the NULL-terminating byte.
A resource converter procedure pointer is of type
(*XtTypeConverter)
.
typedef Boolean (*XtTypeConverter)(
Display *display, XrmValue *args, Cardinal *num_args, XrmValue *from, XrmValue *to, XtPointer *converter_data)
;
display | Specifies the display connection with which this conversion is associated. |
args |
Specifies a list of additional
|
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in args. |
from | Specifies the value to convert. |
to | Specifies a descriptor for a location into which to store the converted value. |
converter_data | Specifies a location into which the converter may store converter-specific data associated with this conversion. |
The display argument is normally used only when generating error
messages, to identify the application context (with the function
XtDisplayToApplicationContext ).
The to argument specifies the size and location into which the
converter should store the converted value. If the addr field is NULL,
the converter should allocate appropriate storage and store the size
and location into the to descriptor. If the type converter allocates
the storage, it remains under the ownership of the converter and must
not be modified by the caller. The type converter is permitted to use
static storage for this purpose, and therefore the caller must
immediately copy the data upon return from the converter. If the
addr field is not NULL, the converter must check the size field to
ensure that sufficient space has been allocated before storing the
converted value. If insufficient space is specified, the converter
should update the size field with the number of bytes required and
return
False
without modifying the data at the specified location.
If sufficient space was allocated by the caller, the converter should
update the size field with the number of bytes actually occupied by the
converted value. For converted values of type
XtRString
,
the size should
include the NULL-terminating byte, if any.
The converter may store any value in the location specified
in converter_data; this value will be passed to the destructor, if any,
when the resource is freed by the Intrinsics.
The converter must return
True
if the conversion was successful and
False
otherwise. If the conversion cannot be performed because of an
improper source value, a warning message should also be issued with
XtAppWarningMsg
.
Most type converters just take the data described by the specified from argument and return data by writing into the location specified in the to argument. A few need other information, which is available in args. A type converter can invoke another type converter, which allows differing sources that may convert into a common intermediate result to make maximum use of the type converter cache.
Note that if an address is written into to->addr, it cannot be that
of a local variable of the converter because the data will not be
valid after the converter returns. Static variables may be used,
as in the following example.
If the converter modifies the resource database,
the changes affect any in-progress widget creation,
XtGetApplicationResources
,
or
XtGetSubresources
in an implementation-defined manner; however, insertion of new entries
or changes to existing entries is allowed and will not directly cause
an error.
The following is an example of a converter that takes a
string
and converts it to a
Pixel
.
Note that the display parameter is
used only to generate error messages; the
Screen
conversion argument is
still required to inform the Intrinsics that the converted value is
a function of the particular display (and colormap).
#define done(type, value) \ { \ if (toVal->addr != NULL) { \ if (toVal->size < sizeof(type)) { \ toVal->size = sizeof(type); \ return False; \ } \ *(type*)(toVal->addr) = (value); \ } \ else { \ static type static_val; \ static_val = (value); \ toVal->addr = (XPointer)&static_val; \ } \ toVal->size = sizeof(type); \ return True; \ } static Boolean CvtStringToPixel( Display *dpy, XrmValue *args, Cardinal *num_args, XrmValue *fromVal, XrmValue *toVal, XtPointer *converter_data) { static XColor screenColor; XColor exactColor; Screen *screen; Colormap colormap; Status status; if (*num_args != 2) XtAppWarningMsg(XtDisplayToApplicationContext(dpy), "wrongParameters", "cvtStringToPixel", "XtToolkitError", "String to pixel conversion needs screen and colormap arguments", (String *)NULL, (Cardinal *)NULL); screen = *((Screen**) args[0].addr); colormap = *((Colormap *) args[1].addr); if (CompareISOLatin1(str, XtDefaultBackground) == 0) { *closure_ret = False; done(Pixel, WhitePixelOfScreen(screen)); } if (CompareISOLatin1(str, XtDefaultForeground) == 0) { *closure_ret = False; done(Pixel, BlackPixelOfScreen(screen)); } status = XAllocNamedColor(DisplayOfScreen(screen), colormap, (char*)fromVal->addr, &screenColor, &exactColor); if (status == 0) { String params[1]; Cardinal num_params = 1; params[0] = (String)fromVal->addr; XtAppWarningMsg(XtDisplayToApplicationContext(dpy), "noColormap", "cvtStringToPixel", "XtToolkitError", "Cannot allocate colormap entry for \"%s\"", params, &num_params); *converter_data = (char *) False; return False; } else { *converter_data = (char *) True; done(Pixel, &screenColor.pixel); } }
All type converters should define some set of conversion values for which they
are guaranteed to succeed so these can be used in the resource defaults.
This issue arises only with conversions, such as fonts and colors,
where there is no string representation that all server implementations
will necessarily recognize.
For resources like these,
the converter should define a symbolic constant
in the same manner as
XtDefaultForeground
,
XtDefaultBackground
,
and
XtDefaultFont
.
To allow the Intrinsics to deallocate resources produced by type converters, a resource destructor procedure may also be provided.
A resource destructor procedure pointer is of type
(*XtDestructor)
.
typedef void (*XtDestructor)(
XtAppContext app, XrmValue *to, XtPointer converter_data, XrmValue *args, Cardinal *num_args)
;
app | Specifies an application context in which the resource is being freed. |
to | Specifies a descriptor for the resource produced by the type converter. |
converter_data | Specifies the converter-specific data returned by the type converter. |
args | Specifies the additional converter arguments as passed to the type converter when the conversion was performed. |
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in args. |
The destructor procedure is responsible for freeing the resource specified by the to argument, including any auxiliary storage associated with that resource, but not the memory directly addressed by the size and location in the to argument or the memory specified by args.
The
XtDisplayStringConversionWarning
procedure is a convenience routine for resource type converters
that convert from string values.
void XtDisplayStringConversionWarning(
Display *display, const char * from_value, const char * to_type)
;
display | Specifies the display connection with which the conversion is associated. |
from_value | Specifies the string that could not be converted. |
to_type | Specifies the target representation type requested. |
The
XtDisplayStringConversionWarning
procedure issues a warning message using
XtAppWarningMsg
with name “conversionError”,
type “string”, class “XtToolkitError”, and the default message
“Cannot convert "from_value" to type to_type”.
To issue other types of warning or error messages, the type converter
should use
XtAppWarningMsg
or
XtAppErrorMsg
.
To retrieve the application context associated with a given
display connection, use
XtDisplayToApplicationContext
.
display | Specifies an open and initialized display connection. |
The
XtDisplayToApplicationContext
function returns the application
context in which the specified display was initialized. If the
display is not known to the Intrinsics, an error message is issued.
When registering a resource converter, the client must specify the
manner in which the conversion cache is to be used when there are multiple
calls to the converter. Conversion cache control is specified
via an XtCacheType
argument.
typedef int XtCacheType;
An XtCacheType
field may contain one of the following values:
XtCacheNone
Specifies that the results of a previous conversion may not be reused to satisfy any other resource requests; the specified converter will be called each time the converted value is required.
XtCacheAll
Specifies that the results of a previous conversion should be reused for any resource request that depends upon the same source value and conversion arguments.
XtCacheByDisplay
Specifies that the results of a previous conversion
should be used as for
XtCacheAll
but the destructor will be called, if specified, if
XtCloseDisplay
is called
for the display connection associated with the converted value, and
the value will be removed from the conversion cache.
The qualifier
XtCacheRefCount
may be ORed with any of the above values. If
XtCacheRefCount
is specified, calls to
XtCreateWidget
,
XtCreateManagedWidget
,
XtGetApplicationResources
,
and
XtGetSubresources
that use the converted value will be counted. When a widget using the
converted value is destroyed, the count is decremented, and, if the
count reaches zero, the destructor procedure will be called and the
converted value will be removed from the conversion cache.
To register a type converter for all application contexts in a
process, use
XtSetTypeConverter
,
and to register a type converter in a single application context, use
XtAppSetTypeConverter
.
void XtSetTypeConverter(
const char * from_type, const char * to_type, XtTypeConverter converter, XtConvertArgList convert_args, Cardinal num_args, XtCacheType cache_type, XtDestructor destructor)
;
from_type | Specifies the source type. |
to_type | Specifies the destination type. |
converter | Specifies the resource type converter procedure. |
convert_args | Specifies additional conversion arguments, or NULL. |
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in convert_args. |
cache_type | Specifies whether or not resources produced by this converter are sharable or display-specific and when they should be freed. |
destructor | Specifies a destroy procedure for resources produced by this conversion, or NULL if no additional action is required to deallocate resources produced by the converter. |
void XtAppSetTypeConverter(
XtAppContext app_context, const char * from_type, const char * to_type, XtTypeConverter converter, XtConvertArgList convert_args, Cardinal num_args, XtCacheType cache_type, XtDestructor destructor)
;
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
from_type | Specifies the source type. |
to_type | Specifies the destination type. |
converter | Specifies the resource type converter procedure. |
convert_args | Specifies additional conversion arguments, or NULL. |
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in convert_args. |
cache_type | Specifies whether or not resources produced by this converter are sharable or display-specific and when they should be freed. |
destructor | Specifies a destroy procedure for resources produced by this conversion, or NULL if no additional action is required to deallocate resources produced by the converter. |
XtSetTypeConverter
registers the specified type converter and
destructor in all application contexts created by the calling process,
including any future application contexts that may be created.
XtAppSetTypeConverter
registers the specified type converter in the
single application context specified. If the same from_type and
to_type are specified in multiple calls to either function, the most
recent overrides the previous ones.
For the few type converters that need additional arguments,
the Intrinsics conversion mechanism provides a method of specifying
how these arguments should be computed.
The enumerated type
XtAddressMode
and the structure
XtConvertArgRec
specify how each argument is derived.
These are defined in
<X11/Intrinsic.h>
.
typedef enum { /* address mode parameter representation */ XtAddress, /* address */ XtBaseOffset, /* offset */ XtImmediate, /* constant */ XtResourceString, /* resource name string */ XtResourceQuark, /* resource name quark */ XtWidgetBaseOffset, /* offset */ XtProcedureArg /* procedure to call */ } XtAddressMode; typedef struct { XtAddressMode address_mode; XtPointer address_id; Cardinal size; } XtConvertArgRec, *XtConvertArgList;
The size field specifies the length of the data in bytes.
The address_mode field specifies how the address_id field should be
interpreted.
XtAddress
causes address_id to be interpreted as the address of the data.
XtBaseOffset
causes address_id to be interpreted as the offset from the widget base.
XtImmediate
causes address_id to be interpreted as a constant.
XtResourceString
causes address_id to be interpreted as the name of a resource
that is to be converted into an offset from the widget base.
XtResourceQuark
causes address_id to be interpreted as the result of an
XrmStringToQuark
conversion on the name of a resource,
which is to be converted into an offset from the widget base.
XtWidgetBaseOffset
is similar to
XtBaseOffset
except that it
searches for the closest windowed ancestor if the object is not
of a subclass of
Core
(see Chapter 12, Nonwidget Objects).
XtProcedureArg
specifies that address_id is a pointer to a procedure to
be invoked to return the conversion argument. If
XtProcedureArg
is specified, address_id must contain
the address of a function of type
(*XtConvertArgProc)
.
object |
Passes the object for which the resource is being
converted, or NULL if the converter was invoked by
|
size | Passes a pointer to the size field from the XtConvertArgRec. |
value | Passes a pointer to a descriptor into which the procedure must store the conversion argument. |
When invoked, the XtConvertArgProc
procedure must derive a
conversion argument and store the address and size of the
argument in the location pointed to by value.
In order to permit reentrancy, the XtConvertArgProc
should
return the address of storage whose lifetime is no shorter
than the lifetime of object.
If object is NULL,
the lifetime of the conversion argument must be no shorter than the
lifetime of the resource with which the conversion argument
is associated. The Intrinsics do not guarantee to copy this
storage but do guarantee not to reference it if the resource
is removed from the conversion cache.
The following example illustrates how to register the
CvtStringToPixel
routine given earlier:
static XtConvertArgRec colorConvertArgs[] = { {XtWidgetBaseOffset, (XtPointer)XtOffset(Widget, core.screen), sizeof(Screen*)}, {XtWidgetBaseOffset, (XtPointer)XtOffset(Widget, core.colormap), sizeof(Colormap)} }; XtSetTypeConverter(XtRString, XtRPixel, CvtStringToPixel, colorConvertArgs, XtNumber(colorConvertArgs), XtCacheByDisplay, NULL);
The conversion argument descriptors colorConvertArgs and screenConvertArg are predefined by the Intrinsics. Both take the values from the closest windowed ancestor if the object is not of a subclass of Core. The screenConvertArg descriptor puts the widget’s screen field into args[0]. The colorConvertArgs descriptor puts the widget’s screen field into args[0], and the widget’s colormap field into args[1].
Conversion routines should not just put a descriptor for the address of the base of the widget into args[0], and use that in the routine. They should pass in the actual values on which the conversion depends. By keeping the dependencies of the conversion procedure specific, it is more likely that subsequent conversions will find what they need in the conversion cache. This way the cache is smaller and has fewer and more widely applicable entries.
If any conversion arguments of type XtBaseOffset, XtResourceString, XtResourceQuark, and XtWidgetBaseOffset are specified for conversions performed by XtGetApplicationResources, XtGetSubresources, XtVaGetApplicationResources, or XtVaGetSubresources, the arguments are computed with respect to the specified widget, not the base address or resource list specified in the call.
If the XtConvertArgProc
modifies the resource database, the
changes affect any in-progress widget creation,
XtGetApplicationResources
,
or
XtGetSubresources
in an implementation-defined manner;
however, insertion of new entries or changes
to existing entries are allowed and will not directly cause
an error.
All resource-fetching routines (for example,
XtGetSubresources
,
XtGetApplicationResources
,
and so on) call resource converters if the resource database or
varargs list specifies a value
that has a different representation from the desired representation or if the
widget's default resource value representation is different from the desired
representation.
To invoke explicit resource conversions, use
XtConvertAndStore
or
XtCallConverter
.
typedef XtPointer XtCacheRef;
Boolean XtCallConverter(
Display* display, XtTypeConverter converter, XrmValuePtr conversion_args, Cardinal num_args, XrmValuePtr from, XrmValuePtr to_in_out, XtCacheRef *cache_ref_return)
;
display | Specifies the display with which the conversion is to be associated. |
converter | Specifies the conversion procedure to be called. |
conversion_args | Specifies the additional conversion arguments needed to perform the conversion, or NULL. |
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in conversion_args. |
from | Specifies a descriptor for the source value. |
to_in_out | Returns the converted value. |
cache_ref_return | Returns a conversion cache id. |
The
XtCallConverter
function looks up the
specified type converter in the application context associated with
the display and, if the converter was not registered or was registered
with cache type
XtCacheAll
or
XtCacheByDisplay
,
looks in the conversion cache to see if this conversion procedure
has been called with the specified conversion arguments. If so, it
checks the success status of the prior call, and if
the conversion failed,
XtCallConverter
returns
False
immediately;
otherwise it checks the size specified in the to argument, and, if it is
greater than or equal to the size stored in the cache, copies the
information stored in the cache into the location specified by
to->addr, stores the cache size into to->size, and returns
True
.
If the size specified in the to argument is smaller than the size stored
in the cache,
XtCallConverter
copies the cache size into to->size and returns
False
.
If the converter was registered with cache type
XtCacheNone
or no value was found in the conversion cache,
XtCallConverter
calls the converter, and if it was not registered with cache type
XtCacheNone
,
enters the result in the cache.
XtCallConverter
then returns what the converter returned.
The cache_ref_return field specifies storage allocated by the caller in which
an opaque value will be stored. If the type converter has been
registered with the
XtCacheRefCount
modifier and if the value returned
in cache_ref_return is non-NULL, then the caller should store the
cache_ref_return value in order to decrement the reference count when
the converted value is no longer required. The cache_ref_return
argument should be
NULL if the caller is unwilling or unable to store the
value.
To explicitly decrement the reference counts for resources obtained
from
XtCallConverter
,
use
XtAppReleaseCacheRefs
.
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
refs | Specifies the list of cache references to be released. |
XtAppReleaseCacheRefs
decrements the reference count for the
conversion entries identified by the refs argument.
This argument is a
pointer to a NULL-terminated list of
XtCacheRef
values. If any reference
count reaches zero, the destructor, if any, will be called and
the resource removed from the conversion cache.
As a convenience to clients needing to explicitly decrement reference
counts via a callback function, the Intrinsics define two callback
procedures,
XtCallbackReleaseCacheRef
and
XtCallbackReleaseCacheRefList
.
object | Specifies the object with which the resource is associated. |
client_data | Specifies the conversion cache entry to be released. |
call_data | Is ignored. |
This callback procedure may be added to a callback list to release a
previously returned
XtCacheRef
value. When adding the callback, the
callback client_data argument must be specified as the value of the
XtCacheRef
data cast to type
XtPointer
.
object | Specifies the object with which the resources are associated. |
client_data | Specifies the conversion cache entries to be released. |
call_data | Is ignored. |
This callback procedure may be added to a callback list to release a
list of previously returned
XtCacheRef
values. When adding the
callback, the callback client_data argument must be specified as a
pointer to a NULL-terminated list of
XtCacheRef
values.
To lookup and call a resource converter, copy the resulting value,
and free a cached resource when a widget is destroyed, use
XtConvertAndStore
.
Boolean XtConvertAndStore(
Widget object, const char * from_type, XrmValuePtr from, const char * to_type, XrmValuePtr to_in_out)
;
object | Specifies the object to use for additional arguments, if any are needed, and the destroy callback list. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
from_type | Specifies the source type. |
from | Specifies the value to be converted. |
to_type | Specifies the destination type. |
to_in_out | Specifies a descriptor for storage into which the converted value will be returned. |
The
XtConvertAndStore
function looks up the type converter registered
to convert from_type to to_type, computes any additional arguments
needed, and then calls
XtCallConverter
(or
XtDirectConvert
if an old-style converter was registered with
XtAddConverter
or
XtAppAddConverter
;
see Appendix C) with the from and to_in_out arguments. The
to_in_out argument specifies the size and location into which the
converted value will be stored and is passed directly to the
converter. If the location is specified as NULL, it will be replaced
with a pointer to private storage and the size will be returned in the
descriptor. The caller is expected to copy this private storage
immediately and must not modify it in any way. If a non-NULL location
is specified, the caller must allocate sufficient storage to hold the
converted value and must also specify the size of that storage in the
descriptor.
The size field will be modified on return to indicate the actual
size of the converted data.
If the conversion succeeds,
XtConvertAndStore
returns
True
;
otherwise, it returns
False
.
XtConvertAndStore
adds
XtCallbackReleaseCacheRef
to the destroyCallback list of the specified object if the conversion
returns an
XtCacheRef
value. The resulting resource should not be referenced
after the object has been destroyed.
XtCreateWidget
performs processing equivalent to
XtConvertAndStore
when initializing the object instance. Because there is extra memory
overhead required to implement reference counting, clients may
distinguish those objects that are never destroyed before the
application exits from those that may be destroyed and whose
resources should be deallocated.
To specify whether reference counting is to be enabled for the
resources of a particular object when the object is created, the
client can specify a value for the
Boolean
resource
XtNinitialResourcesPersistent,
class
XtCInitialResourcesPersistent.
When
XtCreateWidget
is called, if this resource is not specified as
False
in either the arglist or the resource database, then the
resources referenced by this object are not reference-counted, regardless of
how the type converter may have been registered. The effective
default value is
True
;
thus clients that expect to destroy one or
more objects and want resources deallocated must explicitly specify
False
for
XtNinitialResourcesPersistent.
The resources are still freed and destructors called when
XtCloseDisplay
is called if the conversion was registered as
XtCacheByDisplay
.
Any resource field in a widget can be read or written by a client. On a write operation, the widget decides what changes it will actually allow and updates all derived fields appropriately.
To retrieve the current values of resources associated with a
widget instance, use
XtGetValues
.
object | Specifies the object whose resource values are to be returned. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
args | Specifies the argument list of name/address pairs that contain the resource names and the addresses into which the resource values are to be stored. The resource names are widget-dependent. |
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in the argument list. |
The
XtGetValues
function starts with the resources specified for the Object class
and proceeds down the subclass chain to the class of the object.
The value field of a passed argument list must contain the
address into which to copy the contents of the corresponding
object instance field. If the field is a pointer type, the lifetime
of the pointed-to data is defined by the object class. For the
Intrinsics-defined resources, the following lifetimes apply:
Not valid following any operation that modifies the resource:
XtNchildren resource of composite widgets.
All resources of representation type XtRCallback.
Remain valid at least until the widget is destroyed:
XtNaccelerators, XtNtranslations.
Remain valid until the Display is closed:
XtNscreen.
It is the caller's responsibility to allocate and deallocate storage for the copied data according to the size of the resource representation type used within the object.
If the class of the object's parent is a subclass of
constraintWidgetClass
,
XtGetValues
then fetches the values for any constraint resources requested.
It starts with the constraint resources specified for
constraintWidgetClass
and proceeds down the subclass chain to the parent's constraint resources.
If the argument list contains a resource name that is not found in any of the
resource lists searched,
the value at the corresponding address is not modified.
If any get_values_hook procedures in the
object's class or superclass records are non-NULL,
they are called in superclass-to-subclass order after
all the resource values have been fetched by
XtGetValues
.
Finally, if the object's parent is a
subclass of
constraintWidgetClass
,
and if any of the parent's class or
superclass records have declared
ConstraintClassExtension
records in
the Constraint class part extension field with a record type of
NULLQUARK,
and if the get_values_hook field in the extension record is non-NULL,
XtGetValues
calls the get_values_hook procedures in superclass-to-subclass order.
This permits a Constraint parent to provide
nonresource data via
XtGetValues
.
Get_values_hook procedures may modify the data stored at the location addressed by the value field, including (but not limited to) making a copy of data whose resource representation is a pointer. None of the Intrinsics-defined object classes copy data in this manner. Any operation that modifies the queried object resource may invalidate the pointed-to data.
To retrieve the current values of resources associated with a widget
instance using varargs lists, use
XtVaGetValues
.
object | Specifies the object whose resource values are to be returned. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
... | Specifies the variable argument list for the resources to be returned. |
XtVaGetValues
is identical in function to
XtGetValues
with the args
and num_args parameters replaced by a varargs list, as described in
Section 2.5.1. All value entries in the list must specify pointers to
storage allocated by the caller to which the resource value will be
copied. It is the caller's responsibility to ensure that sufficient
storage is allocated. If
XtVaTypedArg
is specified, the type argument
specifies the representation desired by the caller and the size argument
specifies the number of bytes allocated to store the result of the
conversion. If the size is insufficient, a warning message is issued
and the list entry is skipped.
Widgets that have subparts can return resource values from them through
XtGetValues
by supplying a get_values_hook procedure.
The get_values_hook procedure pointer is of type
(*XtArgsProc)
.
w | Specifies the widget whose subpart resource values are to be retrieved. |
args |
Specifies the argument list that was passed to
|
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in the argument list. |
The widget with subpart resources should call
XtGetSubvalues
in the get_values_hook procedure
and pass in its subresource list and the args and num_args parameters.
To retrieve the current values of subpart resource data associated with a
widget instance, use
XtGetSubvalues
.
For a discussion of subpart resources,
see the section called “Subresources”.
void XtGetSubvalues(
XtPointer base, XtResourceList resources, Cardinal num_resources, ArgList args, Cardinal num_args)
;
base | Specifies the base address of the subpart data structure for which the resources should be retrieved. |
resources | Specifies the subpart resource list. |
num_resources | Specifies the number of entries in the resource list. |
args | Specifies the argument list of name/address pairs that contain the resource names and the addresses into which the resource values are to be stored. |
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in the argument list. |
The
XtGetSubvalues
function obtains resource values from the structure identified by base.
The value field in each argument entry must contain the address into
which to store the corresponding resource value. It is the caller's
responsibility to allocate and deallocate this storage according to
the size of the resource representation type used within the subpart.
If the argument list contains a resource name that is not found in the
resource list, the value at the corresponding address is not modified.
To retrieve the current values of subpart resources associated with
a widget instance using varargs lists, use
XtVaGetSubvalues
.
base | Specifies the base address of the subpart data structure for which the resources should be retrieved. |
resources | Specifies the subpart resource list. |
num_resources | Specifies the number of entries in the resource list. |
... | Specifies a variable argument list of name/address pairs that contain the resource names and the addresses into which the resource values are to be stored. |
XtVaGetSubvalues
is identical in function to
XtGetSubvalues
with the
args and num_args parameters replaced by a varargs list, as described
in Section 2.5.1.
XtVaTypedArg
is not supported for
XtVaGetSubvalues
.
If
XtVaTypedArg
is specified in the list, a warning message is issued
and the entry is then ignored.
To modify the current values of resources associated with a widget
instance, use
XtSetValues
.
object | Specifies the object whose resources are to be modified. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
args | Specifies the argument list of name/value pairs that contain the resources to be modified and their new values. |
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in the argument list. |
The
XtSetValues
function starts with the resources specified for the
Object
class fields and proceeds down the subclass chain to the object.
At each stage, it replaces the object resource fields with any values
specified in the argument list.
XtSetValues
then calls the set_values procedures for the object in superclass-to-subclass
order.
If the object has any non-NULL set_values_hook fields,
these are called immediately after the
corresponding set_values procedure.
This procedure permits subclasses to set subpart data via
XtSetValues
.
If the class of the object's parent is a subclass of
constraintWidgetClass
,
XtSetValues
also updates the object's constraints.
It starts with the constraint resources specified for
constraintWidgetClass
and proceeds down the subclass chain to the parent's class.
At each stage, it replaces the constraint resource fields with any
values specified in the argument list.
It then calls the constraint set_values procedures from
constraintWidgetClass
down to the parent's class.
The constraint set_values procedures are called with widget arguments,
as for all set_values procedures, not just the constraint records,
so that they can make adjustments to the desired values based
on full information about the widget. Any arguments specified that
do not match a resource list entry are silently ignored.
If the object is of a subclass of
RectObj,
XtSetValues
determines if a geometry request is needed by comparing the old object to
the new object.
If any geometry changes are required,
XtSetValues
restores the original geometry and makes the request on behalf of the widget.
If the geometry manager returns
XtGeometryYes
,
XtSetValues
calls the object's resize procedure.
If the geometry manager returns
XtGeometryDone
,
XtSetValues
continues, as the object's resize procedure should have been called
by the geometry manager.
If the geometry manager returns
XtGeometryNo
,
XtSetValues
ignores the geometry request and continues.
If the geometry manager returns
XtGeometryAlmost
,
XtSetValues
calls the set_values_almost procedure,
which determines what should be done.
XtSetValues
then repeats this process,
deciding once more whether the geometry manager should be called.
Finally, if any of the set_values procedures returned
True
,
and the widget is realized,
XtSetValues
causes the widget's expose procedure to be invoked by calling
XClearArea
on the widget's window.
To modify the current values of resources associated with a widget
instance using varargs lists, use
XtVaSetValues
.
object | Specifies the object whose resources are to be modified. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
... | Specifies the variable argument list of name/value pairs that contain the resources to be modified and their new values. |
XtVaSetValues
is identical in function to
XtSetValues
with the args and num_args parameters replaced by a varargs list, as
described in Section 2.5.1.
The set_values procedure pointer in a widget class is of type
(*XtSetValuesFunc)
.
typedef Boolean (*XtSetValuesFunc)(
Widget current, Widget request, Widget new, ArgList args, Cardinal *num_args)
;
current |
Specifies a copy of the widget as it was before the
|
request |
Specifies a copy of the widget with all values changed as asked for by the
|
new | Specifies the widget with the new values that are actually allowed. |
args |
Specifies the argument list passed to
|
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in the argument list. |
The set_values procedure should recompute any field derived from resources that are changed (for example, many GCs depend on foreground and background pixels). If no recomputation is necessary, and if none of the resources specific to a subclass require the window to be redisplayed when their values are changed, you can specify NULL for the set_values field in the class record.
Like the initialize procedure, set_values mostly deals only with the fields defined in the subclass, but it has to resolve conflicts with its superclass, especially conflicts over width and height.
Sometimes a subclass may want to overwrite values filled in by its superclass. In particular, size calculations of a superclass are often incorrect for a subclass, and, in this case, the subclass must modify or recalculate fields declared and computed by its superclass.
As an example, a subclass can visually surround its superclass display. In this case, the width and height calculated by the superclass set_values procedure are too small and need to be incremented by the size of the surround. The subclass needs to know if its superclass's size was calculated by the superclass or was specified explicitly. All widgets must place themselves into whatever size is explicitly given, but they should compute a reasonable size if no size is requested. How does a subclass know the difference between a specified size and a size computed by a superclass?
The request and new parameters provide the necessary information. The request widget is a copy of the widget, updated as originally requested. The new widget starts with the values in the request, but it has additionally been updated by all superclass set_values procedures called so far. A subclass set_values procedure can compare these two to resolve any potential conflicts. The set_values procedure need not refer to the request widget unless it must resolve conflicts between the current and new widgets. Any changes the widget needs to make, including geometry changes, should be made in the new widget.
In the above example, the subclass with the visual surround can see if the width and height in the request widget are zero. If so, it adds its surround size to the width and height fields in the new widget. If not, it must make do with the size originally specified. In this case, zero is a special value defined by the class to permit the application to invoke this behavior.
The new widget is the actual widget instance record. Therefore, the set_values procedure should do all its work on the new widget; the request widget should never be modified. If the set_values procedure needs to call any routines that operate on a widget, it should specify new as the widget instance.
Before calling the set_values procedures, the Intrinsics modify the resources of the request widget according to the contents of the arglist; if the widget names all its resources in the class resource list, it is never necessary to examine the contents of args.
Finally, the set_values procedure must return a Boolean that indicates whether
the widget needs to be redisplayed.
Note that a change in the geometry fields alone does not require
the set_values procedure to return
True
;
the X server will eventually generate an
Expose
event, if necessary.
After calling all the set_values procedures,
XtSetValues
forces a redisplay by calling
XClearArea
if any of the set_values procedures returned
True
.
Therefore, a set_values procedure should not try to do its own redisplaying.
Set_values procedures should not do any work in response to changes in
geometry because
XtSetValues
eventually will perform a geometry request, and that request might be denied.
If the widget actually changes size in response to a
call to
XtSetValues
,
its resize procedure is called.
Widgets should do any geometry-related work in their resize procedure.
Note that it is permissible to call
XtSetValues
before a widget is realized.
Therefore, the set_values procedure must not assume that the widget is realized.
The set_values_almost procedure pointer in the widget class record is of type
(*XtAlmostProc)
.
typedef void (*XtAlmostProc)(
Widget old, Widget new, XtWidgetGeometry *request, XtWidgetGeometry *reply)
;
old |
Specifies a copy of the object as it was before the
|
new | Specifies the object instance record. |
request |
Specifies the original geometry request that was sent to the geometry
manager that caused
|
reply |
Specifies the compromise geometry that was returned by the geometry
manager with
|
Most classes inherit the set_values_almost procedure from their superclass by
specifying
XtInheritSetValuesAlmost
in the class initialization.
The
set_values_almost procedure in
rectObjClass
accepts the compromise suggested.
The set_values_almost procedure is called when a client tries to set a widget's
geometry by means of a call to
XtSetValues
and the geometry manager cannot
satisfy the request but instead returns
XtGeometryNo
or
XtGeometryAlmost
and a compromise geometry.
The new object is the actual instance record. The x, y,
width, height,
and border_width fields contain the original values as they were
before the
XtSetValues
call, and all other fields contain the new
values. The request parameter contains the new geometry request that
was made to the parent. The reply parameter contains
reply->request_mode equal to zero if the parent returned
XtGeometryNo
and contains the parent's compromise geometry otherwise. The
set_values_almost procedure takes the original geometry and the
compromise geometry and determines if the compromise is
acceptable or whether
to try a different compromise.
It returns its results in the request parameter,
which is then sent back to the geometry manager for another try.
To accept the compromise, the procedure must copy the contents
of the reply geometry into the request geometry; to attempt an
alternative geometry, the procedure may modify any part of the request
argument; to terminate the geometry negotiation and retain the
original geometry, the procedure must set request->request_mode to
zero. The geometry fields of the old and new instances must not be modified
directly.
The constraint set_values procedure pointer is of type
(*XtSetValuesFunc)
.
The values passed to the parent's constraint set_values procedure
are the same as those passed to the child's class
set_values procedure.
A class can specify NULL for the set_values field of the
ConstraintPart
if it need not compute anything.
The constraint set_values procedure should recompute any constraint fields derived from constraint resources that are changed. Furthermore, it may modify other widget fields as appropriate. For example, if a constraint for the maximum height of a widget is changed to a value smaller than the widget's current height, the constraint set_values procedure may reset the height field in the widget.
To set the current values of subpart resources associated with a
widget instance, use
XtSetSubvalues
.
For a discussion of subpart resources,
see the section called “Subresources”.
void XtSetSubvalues(
XtPointer base, XtResourceList resources, Cardinal num_resources, ArgList args, Cardinal num_args)
;
base | Specifies the base address of the subpart data structure into which the resources should be written. |
resources | Specifies the subpart resource list. |
num_resources | Specifies the number of entries in the resource list. |
args | Specifies the argument list of name/value pairs that contain the resources to be modified and their new values. |
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in the argument list. |
The
XtSetSubvalues
function updates the resource fields of the structure identified by
base. Any specified arguments that do not match an entry in the
resource list are silently ignored.
To set the current values of subpart resources associated with
a widget instance using varargs lists, use
XtVaSetSubvalues
.
base | Specifies the base address of the subpart data structure into which the resources should be written. |
resources | Specifies the subpart resource list. |
num_resources | Specifies the number of entries in the resource list. |
... | Specifies the variable argument list of name/value pairs that contain the resources to be modified and their new values. |
XtVaSetSubvalues
is identical in function to
XtSetSubvalues
with the args and num_args parameters replaced by a varargs list, as
described in Section 2.5.1.
XtVaTypedArg
is not supported for
XtVaSetSubvalues
.
If an entry containing
XtVaTypedArg
is specified in the list, a warning message is issued
and the entry is ignored.
The set_values_hook procedure is obsolete, as the same information is now available to the set_values procedure. The procedure has been retained for those widgets that used it in versions prior to Release 4.
Widgets that have a subpart can set the subpart resource values through
XtSetValues
by supplying a set_values_hook procedure.
The set_values_hook procedure pointer in a widget class is of type
(*XtArgsFunc)
.
w | Specifies the widget whose subpart resource values are to be changed. |
args |
Specifies the argument list that was passed to
|
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in the argument list. |
The widget with subpart resources may call
XtSetValues
from the set_values_hook procedure
and pass in its subresource list and the
args and num_args parameters.
Table of Contents
Except under unusual circumstances, widgets do not hardwire the mapping of user events into widget behavior by using the event manager. Instead, they provide a default mapping of events into behavior that you can override.
The translation manager provides an interface to specify and manage the mapping of X event sequences into widget-supplied functionality, for example, calling procedure Abc when the y key is pressed.
The translation manager uses two kinds of tables to perform translations:
The action tables, which are in the widget class structure, specify the mapping of externally available procedure name strings to the corresponding procedure implemented by the widget class.
A translation table, which is in the widget class structure, specifies the mapping of event sequences to procedure name strings.
You can override the translation table in the class structure for a specific widget instance by supplying a different translation table for the widget instance. The resources XtNtranslations and XtNbaseTranslations are used to modify the class default translation table; see the section called “Translation Table Management”.
All widget class records contain an action table,
an array of
XtActionsRec
entries.
In addition,
an application can register its own action tables with the translation manager
so that the translation tables it provides to widget instances can access
application functionality directly.
The translation action procedure pointer is of type
(*XtActionProc)
.
w | Specifies the widget that caused the action to be called. |
event | Specifies the event that caused the action to be called. If the action is called after a sequence of events, then the last event in the sequence is used. |
params | Specifies a pointer to the list of strings that were specified in the translation table as arguments to the action, or NULL. |
num_params | Specifies the number of entries in params. |
typedef struct _XtActionsRec { String string; XtActionProc proc; } XtActionsRec, *XtActionList;
The string field is the name used in translation tables to access the procedure. The proc field is a pointer to a procedure that implements the functionality.
When the action list is specified as the
CoreClassPart
actions field, the string pointed to by string must be
permanently allocated prior to or during the execution of the class
initialization procedure and must not be subsequently deallocated.
Action procedures should not assume that the widget in which they are invoked is realized; an accelerator specification can cause an action procedure to be called for a widget that does not yet have a window. Widget writers should also note which of a widget's callback lists are invoked from action procedures and warn clients not to assume the widget is realized in those callbacks.
For example, a Pushbutton widget has procedures to take the following actions:
Set the button to indicate it is activated.
Unset the button back to its normal mode.
Highlight the button borders.
Unhighlight the button borders.
Notify any callbacks that the button has been activated.
The action table for the Pushbutton widget class makes these functions available to translation tables written for Pushbutton or any subclass. The string entry is the name used in translation tables. The procedure entry (usually spelled identically to the string) is the name of the C procedure that implements that function:
XtActionsRec actionTable[] = { {"Set", Set}, {"Unset", Unset}, {"Highlight", Highlight}, {"Unhighlight", Unhighlight} {"Notify", Notify}, };
The Intrinsics reserve all action names and parameters starting with the characters “Xt” for future standard enhancements. Users, applications, and widgets should not declare action names or pass parameters starting with these characters except to invoke specified built-in Intrinsics functions.
The actions and num_actions fields of
CoreClassPart
specify the actions implemented by a widget class. These are
automatically registered with the Intrinsics when the class is initialized
and must be allocated in writable storage prior to Core class_part
initialization, and never deallocated. To save memory and optimize
access, the Intrinsics may overwrite the storage in order to compile the
list into an internal representation.
To declare an action table within an application
and register it with the translation manager, use
XtAppAddActions
.
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
actions | Specifies the action table to register. |
num_actions | Specifies the number of entries in this action table. |
If more than one action is registered with the same name,
the most recently registered action is used.
If duplicate actions exist in an action table,
the first is used.
The Intrinsics register an action table containing
XtMenuPopup
and
XtMenuPopdown
as part of
XtCreateApplicationContext
.
The translation manager uses a simple algorithm to resolve the name of a procedure specified in a translation table into the actual procedure specified in an action table. When the widget is realized, the translation manager performs a search for the name in the following tables, in order:
The widget's class and all superclass action tables, in subclass-to-superclass order.
The parent's class and all superclass action tables, in subclass-to-superclass order, then on up the ancestor tree.
The action tables registered with
XtAppAddActions
and
XtAddActions
from the most recently added table to the oldest table.
As soon as it finds a name, the translation manager stops the search. If it cannot find a name, the translation manager generates a warning message.
An application can specify a procedure that will be called just before
every action routine is dispatched by the translation manager. To do
so, the application supplies a procedure pointer of type
(*XtActionHookProc)
.
typedef void (*XtActionHookProc)(
Widget w, XtPointer client_data, String action_name, XEvent* event, String* params, Cardinal* num_params)
;
w | Specifies the widget whose action is about to be dispatched. |
client_data |
Specifies the application-specific closure that was passed to
|
action_name | Specifies the name of the action to be dispatched. |
event | Specifies the event argument that will be passed to the action routine. |
params | Specifies the action parameters that will be passed to the action routine. |
num_params | Specifies the number of entries in params. |
Action hooks should not modify any of the data pointed to by the arguments other than the client_data argument.
To add an action hook, use
XtAppAddActionHook
.
app | Specifies the application context. |
proc | Specifies the action hook procedure. |
client_data | Specifies application-specific data to be passed to the action hook. |
XtAppAddActionHook
adds the specified procedure to the front of a list
maintained in the application context. In the future, when an action
routine is about to be invoked for any widget in this application
context, either through the translation manager or via
XtCallActionProc
,
the action hook procedures will be called in reverse
order of registration just prior to invoking the action routine.
Action hook procedures are removed automatically and the
XtActionHookId is
destroyed when the application context in which
they were added is destroyed.
To remove an action hook procedure without destroying the application
context, use
XtRemoveActionHook
.
id |
Specifies the action hook id returned by
|
XtRemoveActionHook
removes the specified action hook procedure from
the list in which it was registered.
All widget instance records contain a translation table, which is a resource with a default value specified elsewhere in the class record. A translation table specifies what action procedures are invoked for an event or a sequence of events. A translation table is a string containing a list of translations from an event sequence into one or more action procedure calls. The translations are separated from one another by newline characters (ASCII LF). The complete syntax of translation tables is specified in Appendix B.
As an example, the default behavior of Pushbutton is
Highlight on enter window.
Unhighlight on exit window.
Invert on left button down.
Call callbacks and reinvert on left button up.
The following illustrates Pushbutton's default translation table:
static String defaultTranslations = "<EnterWindow>: Highlight()\n\ <LeaveWindow>: Unhighlight()\n\ <Btn1Down>: Set()\n\ <Btn1Up>: Notify() Unset()";
The tm_table field of the
CoreClassPart
should be filled in at class initialization time with
the string containing the class's default translations.
If a class wants to inherit its superclass's translations,
it can store the special value
XtInheritTranslations
into tm_table.
In Core's class part initialization procedure,
the Intrinsics compile this translation table into an efficient internal form.
Then, at widget creation time,
this default translation table is
combined with the XtNtranslations
and XtNbaseTranslations resources; see
the section called “Translation Table Management”.
The resource conversion mechanism automatically compiles
string translation tables that are specified in the resource database.
If a client uses translation tables that are not retrieved via a
resource conversion,
it must compile them itself using
XtParseTranslationTable
.
The Intrinsics use the compiled form of the translation table to register the necessary events with the event manager. Widgets need do nothing other than specify the action and translation tables for events to be processed by the translation manager.
An event sequence is a comma-separated list of X event descriptions that describes a specific sequence of X events to map to a set of program actions. Each X event description consists of three parts: The X event type, a prefix consisting of the X modifier bits, and an event-specific suffix.
Various abbreviations are supported to make translation tables easier to read. The events must match incoming events in left-to-right order to trigger the action sequence.
Action sequences specify what program or widget actions to take in response to incoming X events. An action sequence consists of space-separated action procedure call specifications. Each action procedure call consists of the name of an action procedure and a parenthesized list of zero or more comma-separated string parameters to pass to that procedure. The actions are invoked in left-to-right order as specified in the action sequence.
Translation table entries may specify actions that are taken when two
or more identical events occur consecutively within a short time
interval, called the multi-click time. The multi-click time value may
be specified as an application resource with name “multiClickTime” and
class “MultiClickTime” and may also be modified dynamically by the
application. The multi-click time is unique for each Display value and
is retrieved from the resource database by
XtDisplayInitialize
.
If no value is specified, the initial value is 200 milliseconds.
To set the multi-click time dynamically, use
XtSetMultiClickTime
.
display | Specifies the display connection. |
time | Specifies the multi-click time in milliseconds. |
XtSetMultiClickTime
sets the time interval used by the translation
manager to determine when multiple events are interpreted as a
repeated event. When a repeat count is specified in a translation
entry, the interval between the timestamps in each pair of repeated
events (e.g., between two
ButtonPress
events) must be less than the
multi-click time in order for the translation actions to be taken.
To read the multi-click time, use
XtGetMultiClickTime
.
display | Specifies the display connection. |
XtGetMultiClickTime
returns the time in milliseconds that the
translation manager uses to determine if multiple events are to be
interpreted as a repeated event for purposes of matching a translation
entry containing a repeat count.
Sometimes an application needs to merge its own translations with a widget's translations. For example, a window manager provides functions to move a window. The window manager wishes to bind this operation to a specific pointer button in the title bar without the possibility of user override and bind it to other buttons that may be overridden by the user.
To accomplish this, the window manager should first create the title bar and then should merge the two translation tables into the title bar's translations. One translation table contains the translations that the window manager wants only if the user has not specified a translation for a particular event or event sequence (i.e., those that may be overridden). The other translation table contains the translations that the window manager wants regardless of what the user has specified.
Three Intrinsics functions support this merging:
XtParseTranslationTable | Compiles a translation table. |
XtAugmentTranslations | Merges a compiled translation table into a widget's compiled translation table, ignoring any new translations that conflict with existing translations. |
XtOverrideTranslations | Merges a compiled translation table into a widget's compiled translation table, replacing any existing translations that conflict with new translations. |
To compile a translation table, use
XtParseTranslationTable
.
table | Specifies the translation table to compile. |
The
XtParseTranslationTable
function compiles the translation table, provided in the format given
in Appendix B, into an opaque internal representation
of type
XtTranslations
.
Note that if an empty translation table is required for any purpose,
one can be obtained by calling
XtParseTranslationTable
and passing an empty string.
To merge additional translations into an existing translation table, use
XtAugmentTranslations
.
w | Specifies the widget into which the new translations are to be merged. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
translations | Specifies the compiled translation table to merge in. |
The
XtAugmentTranslations
function merges the new translations into the existing widget
translations, ignoring any
#replace
,
#augment
,
or
#override
directive that may have been specified
in the translation string. The translation table specified by
translations is not altered by this process.
XtAugmentTranslations
logically appends the string representation of the new translations to
the string representation of the widget's current translations and reparses
the result with no warning messages about duplicate left-hand sides, then
stores the result back into the widget instance; i.e.,
if the new translations contain an event or event sequence that
already exists in the widget's translations,
the new translation is ignored.
To overwrite existing translations with new translations, use
XtOverrideTranslations
.
w | Specifies the widget into which the new translations are to be merged. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
translations | Specifies the compiled translation table to merge in. |
The
XtOverrideTranslations
function merges the new translations into the existing widget
translations, ignoring any
#replace
,
#augment
,
or
#override
directive that may have been
specified in the translation string. The translation table
specified by translations is not altered by this process.
XtOverrideTranslations
logically appends the string representation of the widget's current
translations to the string representation of the new translations and
reparses the result with no warning messages about duplicate left-hand
sides, then stores the result back into the widget instance; i.e.,
if the new translations contain an event or event sequence that
already exists in the widget's translations,
the new translation overrides the widget's translation.
To replace a widget's translations completely, use
XtSetValues
on the XtNtranslations resource and specify a compiled translation table
as the value.
To make it possible for users to easily modify translation tables in their resource files, the string-to-translation-table resource type converter allows the string to specify whether the table should replace, augment, or override any existing translation table in the widget. To specify this, a pound sign (#) is given as the first character of the table followed by one of the keywords “replace”, “augment”, or “override” to indicate whether to replace, augment, or override the existing table. The replace or merge operation is performed during the Core instance initialization. Each merge operation produces a new translation resource value; if the original tables were shared by other widgets, they are unaffected. If no directive is specified, “#replace” is assumed.
At instance initialization the XtNtranslations resource is first fetched. Then, if it was not specified or did not contain “#replace”, the resource database is searched for the resource XtNbaseTranslations. If XtNbaseTranslations is found, it is merged into the widget class translation table. Then the widget translations field is merged into the result or into the class translation table if XtNbaseTranslations was not found. This final table is then stored into the widget translations field. If the XtNtranslations resource specified “#replace”, no merge is done. If neither XtNbaseTranslations or XtNtranslations are specified, the class translation table is copied into the widget instance.
To completely remove existing translations, use
XtUninstallTranslations
.
w | Specifies the widget from which the translations are to be removed. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
The
XtUninstallTranslations
function causes the entire translation table for the widget to be removed.
It is often desirable to be able to bind events in one widget to actions in another. In particular, it is often useful to be able to invoke menu actions from the keyboard. The Intrinsics provide a facility, called accelerators, that lets you accomplish this. An accelerator table is a translation table that is bound with its actions in the context of a particular widget, the source widget. The accelerator table can then be installed on one or more destination widgets. When an event sequence in the destination widget would cause an accelerator action to be taken, and if the source widget is sensitive, the actions are executed as though triggered by the same event sequence in the accelerator source widget. The event is passed to the action procedure without modification. The action procedures used within accelerators must not assume that the source widget is realized nor that any fields of the event are in reference to the source widget's window if the widget is realized.
Each widget instance contains that widget's exported accelerator table
as a resource.
Each class of widget exports a method that takes a
displayable string representation of the accelerators
so that widgets can display their current accelerators.
The representation is the accelerator table in canonical
translation table form (see Appendix B).
The display_accelerator procedure pointer is of type
(*XtStringProc)
.
w | Specifies the source widget that supplied the accelerators. |
string | Specifies the string representation of the accelerators for this widget. |
Accelerators can be specified in resource files,
and the string representation is the same as for a translation table.
However,
the interpretation of the
#augment
and
#override
directives applies to
what will happen when the accelerator is installed;
that is, whether or not the accelerator translations will override the
translations in the destination widget.
The default is
#augment
,
which means that the accelerator translations have lower priority
than the destination translations.
The
#replace
directive is ignored for accelerator tables.
To parse an accelerator table, use
XtParseAcceleratorTable
.
source | Specifies the accelerator table to compile. |
The
XtParseAcceleratorTable
function compiles the accelerator table into an opaque internal representation.
The client
should set the XtNaccelerators resource of
each widget that is to be activated by these translations
to the returned value.
To install accelerators from a widget on another widget, use
XtInstallAccelerators
.
destination | Specifies the widget on which the accelerators are to be installed. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
source | Specifies the widget from which the accelerators are to come. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
The
XtInstallAccelerators
function installs the accelerators resource value from
source onto destination
by merging the source accelerators into the destination translations.
If the source display_accelerator field is non-NULL,
XtInstallAccelerators
calls it with the source widget and a string representation
of the accelerator table,
which indicates that its accelerators have been installed
and that it should display them appropriately.
The string representation of the accelerator table is its
canonical translation table representation.
As a convenience for installing all accelerators from a widget and all its
descendants onto one destination, use
XtInstallAllAccelerators
.
destination | Specifies the widget on which the accelerators are to be installed. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
source | Specifies the root widget of the widget tree from which the accelerators are to come. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
The
XtInstallAllAccelerators
function recursively descends the widget tree rooted at source
and installs the accelerators resource value
of each widget encountered onto destination.
A common use is to call
XtInstallAllAccelerators
and pass the application main window as the source.
The translation manager provides support for automatically translating
KeyCodes in incoming key events into KeySyms.
KeyCode-to-KeySym translator procedure pointers are of type
(*XtKeyProc)
.
typedef void (*XtKeyProc)(
Display *display, KeyCode keycode, Modifiers modifiers, Modifiers *modifiers_return, KeySym *keysym_return)
;
display | Specifies the display that the KeyCode is from. |
keycode | Specifies the KeyCode to translate. |
modifiers | Specifies the modifiers to the KeyCode. |
modifiers_return | Specifies a location in which to store a mask that indicates the subset of all modifiers that are examined by the key translator for the specified keycode. |
keysym_return | Specifies a location in which to store the resulting KeySym. |
This procedure takes a KeyCode and modifiers and produces a KeySym. For any given key translator function and keyboard encoding, modifiers_return will be a constant per KeyCode that indicates the subset of all modifiers that are examined by the key translator for that KeyCode.
The KeyCode-to-KeySym translator procedure
must be implemented such that multiple calls with the same
display, keycode, and modifiers return the same
result until either a new case converter, an
(*XtCaseProc)
,
is installed or a
MappingNotify
event is received.
The Intrinsics maintain tables internally to map KeyCodes to KeySyms for each open display. Translator procedures and other clients may share a single copy of this table to perform the same mapping.
To return a pointer to the KeySym-to-KeyCode mapping table for a
particular display, use
XtGetKeysymTable
.
KeySym *XtGetKeysymTable(
Display *display, KeyCode *min_keycode_return, int *keysyms_per_keycode_return)
;
display | Specifies the display whose table is required. |
min_keycode_return | Returns the minimum KeyCode valid for the display. |
keysyms_per_keycode_return | Returns the number of KeySyms stored for each KeyCode. |
XtGetKeysymTable
returns a pointer to the Intrinsics' copy of the
server's KeyCode-to-KeySym table. This table must not be modified.
There are keysyms_per_keycode_return KeySyms associated with each
KeyCode, located in the table with indices starting at index
(test_keycode - min_keycode_return) * keysyms_per_keycode_return
for KeyCode test_keycode. Any entries that have no KeySyms associated
with them contain the value
NoSymbol
.
Clients should not cache the KeySym table but should call
XtGetKeysymTable
each time the value is
needed, as the table may change prior to dispatching each event.
For more information on this table, see Section 12.7 in Xlib — C Language X Interface.
To register a key translator, use
XtSetKeyTranslator
.
display | Specifies the display from which to translate the events. |
proc | Specifies the procedure to perform key translations. |
The
XtSetKeyTranslator
function sets the specified procedure as the current key translator.
The default translator is
XtTranslateKey
,
an
(*XtKeyProc)
that uses the Shift, Lock, numlock, and group modifiers
with the interpretations defined in X Window System Protocol, Section 5.
It is provided so that new translators can call it to get default
KeyCode-to-KeySym translations and so that the default translator
can be reinstalled.
To invoke the currently registered KeyCode-to-KeySym translator,
use
XtTranslateKeycode
.
void XtTranslateKeycode(
Display *display, KeyCode keycode, Modifiers modifiers, Modifiers *modifiers_return, KeySym *keysym_return)
;
display | Specifies the display that the KeyCode is from. |
keycode | Specifies the KeyCode to translate. |
modifiers | Specifies the modifiers to the KeyCode. |
modifiers_return | Returns a mask that indicates the modifiers actually used to generate the KeySym. |
keysym_return | Returns the resulting KeySym. |
The
XtTranslateKeycode
function passes the specified arguments
directly to the currently registered KeyCode-to-KeySym translator.
To handle capitalization of nonstandard KeySyms, the Intrinsics allow
clients to register case conversion routines.
Case converter procedure pointers are of type
(*XtCaseProc)
.
typedef void (*XtCaseProc)(
Display *display, KeySym keysym, KeySym *lower_return, KeySym *upper_return)
;
display | Specifies the display connection for which the conversion is required. |
keysym | Specifies the KeySym to convert. |
lower_return | Specifies a location into which to store the lowercase equivalent for the KeySym. |
upper_return | Specifies a location into which to store the uppercase equivalent for the KeySym. |
If there is no case distinction, this procedure should store the KeySym into both return values.
To register a case converter, use
XtRegisterCaseConverter
.
display | Specifies the display from which the key events are to come. |
proc |
Specifies the
|
start | Specifies the first KeySym for which this converter is valid. |
stop | Specifies the last KeySym for which this converter is valid. |
The
XtRegisterCaseConverter
registers the specified case converter.
The start and stop arguments provide the inclusive range of KeySyms
for which this converter is to be called.
The new converter overrides any previous converters for KeySyms in that range.
No interface exists to remove converters;
you need to register an identity converter.
When a new converter is registered,
the Intrinsics refresh the keyboard state if necessary.
The default converter understands case conversion for all
Latin KeySyms defined in X Window System Protocol, Appendix A.
To determine uppercase and lowercase equivalents for a KeySym, use
XtConvertCase
.
display | Specifies the display that the KeySym came from. |
keysym | Specifies the KeySym to convert. |
lower_return | Returns the lowercase equivalent of the KeySym. |
upper_return | Returns the uppercase equivalent of the KeySym. |
The
XtConvertCase
function calls the appropriate converter and returns the results.
A user-supplied
(*XtKeyProc)
may need to use this function.
When an action procedure is invoked on a
KeyPress
or
KeyRelease
event, it often has a need to retrieve the KeySym and modifiers
corresponding to the event that caused it to be invoked. In order to
avoid repeating the processing that was just performed by the
Intrinsics to match the translation entry, the KeySym and modifiers
are stored for the duration of the action procedure and are made
available to the client.
To retrieve the KeySym and modifiers that matched the final event
specification in the translation table entry, use
XtGetActionKeysym
.
event | Specifies the event pointer passed to the action procedure by the Intrinsics. |
modifiers_return | Returns the modifiers that caused the match, if non-NULL. |
If
XtGetActionKeysym
is called after an action procedure has been
invoked by the Intrinsics and before that action procedure returns, and
if the event pointer has the same value as the event pointer passed to
that action routine, and if the event is a
KeyPress
or
KeyRelease
event, then
XtGetActionKeysym
returns the KeySym that matched the final
event specification in the translation table and, if modifiers_return
is non-NULL, the modifier state actually used to generate this KeySym;
otherwise, if the event is a
KeyPress
or
KeyRelease
event, then
XtGetActionKeysym
calls
XtTranslateKeycode
and returns the results;
else it returns
NoSymbol
and does not examine modifiers_return.
Note that if an action procedure invoked by the Intrinsics
invokes a subsequent action procedure (and so on) via
XtCallActionProc
,
the nested action procedure may also call
XtGetActionKeysym
to retrieve the Intrinsics' KeySym and modifiers.
To return the list of KeyCodes that map to a particular KeySym in
the keyboard mapping table maintained by the Intrinsics, use
XtKeysymToKeycodeList
.
void XtKeysymToKeycodeList(
Display *display, KeySym keysym, KeyCode **keycodes_return, Cardinal *keycount_return)
;
display | Specifies the display whose table is required. |
keysym | Specifies the KeySym for which to search. |
keycodes_return | Returns a list of KeyCodes that have keysym associated with them, or NULL if keycount_return is 0. |
keycount_return | Returns the number of KeyCodes in the keycode list. |
The
XtKeysymToKeycodeList
procedure returns all the KeyCodes that have keysym
in their entry for the keyboard mapping table associated with display.
For each entry in the
table, the first four KeySyms (groups 1 and 2) are interpreted as
specified by X Window System Protocol, Section 5. If no KeyCodes map to the
specified KeySym, keycount_return is zero and *keycodes_return is NULL.
The caller should free the storage pointed to by keycodes_return using
XtFree
when it is no longer useful. If the caller needs to examine
the KeyCode-to-KeySym table for a particular KeyCode, it should call
XtGetKeysymTable
.
To register button and key grabs for a widget's window according to the
event bindings in the widget's translation table, use
XtRegisterGrabAction
.
void XtRegisterGrabAction(
XtActionProc action_proc, Boolean owner_events, unsigned int event_mask, int pointer_mode, int keyboard_mode)
;
action_proc | Specifies the action procedure to search for in translation tables. |
owner_events | |
event_mask | |
pointer_mode | |
keyboard_mode |
Specify arguments to
|
XtRegisterGrabAction
adds the specified action_proc to a list known to
the translation manager. When a widget is realized, or when the
translations of a realized widget or the accelerators installed on a
realized widget are modified, its translation table and any installed
accelerators are scanned for action procedures on this list.
If any are invoked on
ButtonPress
or
KeyPress
events as the only or final event
in a sequence, the Intrinsics will call
XtGrabButton
or
XtGrabKey
for the widget with every button or KeyCode which maps to the
event detail field, passing the specified owner_events, event_mask,
pointer_mode, and keyboard_mode. For
ButtonPress
events, the modifiers
specified in the grab are determined directly from the translation
specification and confine_to and cursor are specified as
None
.
For
KeyPress
events, if the translation table entry specifies colon (:) in
the modifier list, the modifiers are determined by calling the key
translator procedure registered for the display and calling
XtGrabKey
for every combination of standard modifiers which map the KeyCode to
the specified event detail KeySym, and ORing any modifiers specified in
the translation table entry, and event_mask is ignored. If the
translation table entry does not specify colon in the modifier list,
the modifiers specified in the grab are those specified in the
translation table entry only. For both
ButtonPress
and
KeyPress
events, don't-care modifiers are ignored unless the translation entry
explicitly specifies “Any” in the modifiers field.
If the specified action_proc is already registered for the calling process, the new values will replace the previously specified values for any widgets that become realized following the call, but existing grabs are not altered on currently realized widgets.
When translations or installed accelerators are modified for a
realized widget, any previous key or button grabs registered
as a result of the old bindings are released if they do not appear in
the new bindings and are not explicitly grabbed by the client with
XtGrabKey
or
XtGrabButton
.
Normally action procedures are invoked by the Intrinsics when an
event or event sequence arrives for a widget. To
invoke an action procedure directly, without generating
(or synthesizing) events, use
XtCallActionProc
.
void XtCallActionProc(
Widget widget, const char * action, XEvent * event, String * params, Cardinal num_params)
;
widget | Specifies the widget in which the action is to be invoked. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
action | Specifies the name of the action routine. |
event | Specifies the contents of the event passed to the action routine. |
params | Specifies the contents of the params passed to the action routine. |
num_params | Specifies the number of entries in params. |
XtCallActionProc
searches for the named action routine in the same
manner and order as translation tables are bound, as described in
Section 10.1.2, except that application action tables are searched, if
necessary, as of the time of the call to
XtCallActionProc
.
If found,
the action routine is invoked with the specified widget, event pointer,
and parameters. It is the responsibility of the caller to ensure that
the contents of the event, params, and num_params arguments are
appropriate for the specified action routine and, if necessary, that
the specified widget is realized or sensitive. If the named action
routine cannot be found,
XtCallActionProc
generates a warning message and returns.
Occasionally a subclass will require the pointers to one or more of
its superclass's action procedures. This would be needed, for
example, in order to envelop the superclass's action. To retrieve
the list of action procedures registered in the superclass's
actions field, use
XtGetActionList
.
void XtGetActionList(
WidgetClass widget_class, XtActionList *actions_return, Cardinal *num_actions_return)
;
widget_class | Specifies the widget class whose actions are to be returned. |
actions_return | Returns the action list. |
num_actions_return | Returns the number of action procedures declared by the class. |
XtGetActionList
returns the action table defined by the specified
widget class. This table does not include actions defined by the
superclasses. If widget_class is not initialized, or is not
coreWidgetClass
or a subclass thereof, or if the class does not define any actions,
*actions_return will be NULL and *num_actions_return
will be zero.
If *actions_return is non-NULL the client is responsible for freeing
the table using
XtFree
when it is no longer needed.
Table of Contents
The Intrinsics provide a number of utility functions that you can use to
Determine the number of elements in an array.
Translate strings to widget instances.
Manage memory usage.
Share graphics contexts.
Manipulate selections.
Merge exposure events into a region.
Translate widget coordinates.
Locate a widget given a window id.
Handle errors.
Set the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property.
Locate files by name with string substitutions.
Register callback functions for external agents.
Locate all the displays of an application context.
To determine the number of elements in a fixed-size array, use
XtNumber
.
array | Specifies a fixed-size array of arbitrary type. |
The
XtNumber
macro returns the number of elements allocated to the array.
To translate a widget name to a widget instance, use
XtNameToWidget
.
reference | Specifies the widget from which the search is to start. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
names | Specifies the partially qualified name of the desired widget. |
The
XtNameToWidget
function searches for a descendant of the reference
widget whose name matches the specified names. The names parameter
specifies a simple object name or a series of simple object name
components separated by periods or asterisks.
XtNameToWidget
returns the descendant with the shortest name matching the specification
according to the following rules, where child is either a pop-up child
or a normal child if the widget's class is a subclass of
Composite :
Enumerate the object subtree rooted at the reference widget in breadth-first order, qualifying the name of each object with the names of all its ancestors up to, but not including, the reference widget. The ordering between children of a common parent is not defined.
Return the first object in the enumeration that matches the specified name, where each component of names matches exactly the corresponding component of the qualified object name and asterisk matches any series of components, including none.
If no match is found, return NULL.
Since breadth-first traversal is specified, the descendant with the
shortest matching name (i.e., the fewest number of components), if any,
will always be returned. However, since the order of enumeration of
children is undefined and since the Intrinsics do not require that all
children of a widget have unique names,
XtNameToWidget
may return any
child that matches if there are multiple objects in the subtree with
the same name. Consecutive separators (periods or asterisks)
including at least one asterisk are treated as a single asterisk.
Consecutive periods are treated as a single period.
The Intrinsics memory management functions provide uniform checking for
null pointers and error reporting on memory allocation errors.
These functions are completely compatible with their standard C language
runtime counterparts
malloc
,
calloc
,
realloc
,
and
free
with the following added functionality:
See the standard C library documentation on
malloc
,
calloc
,
realloc
,
and
free
for more information.
To allocate storage, use
XtMalloc
.
size | Specifies the number of bytes desired. |
The
XtMalloc
function returns a pointer to a block of storage of at least
the specified size bytes.
If there is insufficient memory to allocate the new block,
XtMalloc
calls
XtErrorMsg
.
To allocate and initialize an array, use
XtCalloc
.
num | Specifies the number of array elements to allocate. |
size | Specifies the size of each array element in bytes. |
The
XtCalloc
function allocates space for the specified number of array elements
of the specified size and initializes the space to zero.
If there is insufficient memory to allocate the new block,
XtCalloc
calls
XtErrorMsg
.
XtCalloc
returns the address of the allocated storage.
To change the size of an allocated block of storage, use
XtRealloc
.
ptr |
Specifies a pointer to the old storage allocated with
|
num | Specifies number of bytes desired in new storage. |
The
XtRealloc
function changes the size of a block of storage, possibly moving it.
Then it copies the old contents (or as much as will fit) into the new block
and frees the old block.
If there is insufficient memory to allocate the new block,
XtRealloc
calls
XtErrorMsg
.
If ptr is NULL,
XtRealloc
simply calls
XtMalloc
.
XtRealloc
then returns the address of the new block.
To free an allocated block of storage, use
XtFree
.
ptr |
Specifies a pointer to a block of storage allocated with
|
The
XtFree
function returns storage, allowing it to be reused.
If ptr is NULL,
XtFree
returns immediately.
To allocate storage for a new instance of a type, use
XtNew
.
type | Specifies a previously declared type. |
XtNew
returns a pointer to the allocated storage.
If there is insufficient memory to allocate the new block,
XtNew
calls
XtErrorMsg
.
XtNew
is a convenience macro that calls
XtMalloc
with the following arguments specified:
((type *) XtMalloc((unsigned) sizeof(type)))
The storage allocated by
XtNew
should be freed using
XtFree
.
To copy an instance of a string, use
XtNewString
.
string | Specifies a previously declared string. |
XtNewString
returns a pointer to the allocated storage.
If there is insufficient memory to allocate the new block,
XtNewString
calls
XtErrorMsg
.
XtNewString
is a convenience macro that calls
XtMalloc
with the following arguments specified:
(strcpy(XtMalloc((unsigned)strlen(str) + 1), str))
The storage allocated by
XtNewString
should be freed using
XtFree
.
The Intrinsics provide a mechanism whereby cooperating objects can share a graphics context (GC), thereby reducing both the number of GCs created and the total number of server calls in any given application. The mechanism is a simple caching scheme and allows for clients to declare both modifiable and nonmodifiable fields of the shared GCs.
To obtain a shareable GC with modifiable fields, use
XtAllocateGC
.
GC XtAllocateGC(
Widget object, Cardinal depth, XtGCMask value_mask, XGCValues *values, XtGCMask dynamic_mask, XtGCMask unused_mask)
;
object | Specifies an object, giving the screen for which the returned GC is valid. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
depth | Specifies the depth for which the returned GC is valid, or 0. |
value_mask | Specifies fields of the GC that are initialized from values. |
values | Specifies the values for the initialized fields. |
dynamic_mask | Specifies fields of the GC that will be modified by the caller. |
unused_mask | Specifies fields of the GC that will not be needed by the caller. |
The
XtAllocateGC
function returns a shareable GC that may be
modified by the client. The screen field of the specified
widget or of the nearest widget ancestor of the specified
object and the specified depth argument supply
the root and drawable depths for which the GC is to be
valid. If depth is zero, the depth is taken from the
depth field of the specified widget or of the nearest
widget ancestor of the specified object.
The value_mask argument specifies fields of the GC that are initialized with the respective member of the values structure. The dynamic_mask argument specifies fields that the caller intends to modify during program execution. The caller must ensure that the corresponding GC field is set prior to each use of the GC. The unused_mask argument specifies fields of the GC that are of no interest to the caller. The caller may make no assumptions about the contents of any fields specified in unused_mask. The caller may assume that at all times all fields not specified in either dynamic_mask or unused_mask have their default value if not specified in value_mask or the value specified by values. If a field is specified in both value_mask and dynamic_mask, the effect is as if it were specified only in dynamic_mask and then immediately set to the value in values. If a field is set in unused_mask and also in either value_mask or dynamic_mask, the specification in unused_mask is ignored.
XtAllocateGC
tries to minimize the number of unique GCs
created by comparing the arguments with those of previous
calls and returning an existing GC when there are no
conflicts.
XtAllocateGC
may modify and return an existing GC if it was allocated with a
nonzero unused_mask.
To obtain a shareable GC with no modifiable fields, use
XtGetGC
.
object | Specifies an object, giving the screen and depth for which the returned GC is valid. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
value_mask | Specifies which fields of the values structure are specified. |
values | Specifies the actual values for this GC. |
The
XtGetGC
function returns a shareable, read-only GC.
The parameters to this function are the same as those for
XCreateGC
except that an Object is passed instead of a Display.
XtGetGC
is equivalent to
XtAllocateGC
with depth, dynamic_mask, and unused_mask all zero.
XtGetGC
shares only GCs in which all values in the GC returned by
XCreateGC
are the same.
In particular, it does not use the value_mask provided to
determine which fields of the GC a widget considers relevant.
The value_mask is used only to tell the server which fields should be
filled in from values and which it should fill in with default values.
To deallocate a shared GC when it is no longer needed, use
XtReleaseGC
.
object | Specifies any object on the Display for which the GC was created. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
gc |
Specifies the shared GC obtained with either
|
References to shareable GCs are counted and a free request is generated to the server when the last user of a given GC releases it.
Arbitrary widgets in multiple applications can communicate with each other by means of the Intrinsics global selection mechanism, which conforms to the specifications in the Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual. The Intrinsics supply functions for providing and receiving selection data in one logical piece (atomic transfers) or in smaller logical segments (incremental transfers).
The incremental interface is provided for a selection owner or selection requestor that cannot or prefers not to pass the selection value to and from the Intrinsics in a single call. For instance, either an application that is running on a machine with limited memory may not be able to store the entire selection value in memory or a selection owner may already have the selection value available in discrete chunks, and it would be more efficient not to have to allocate additional storage to copy the pieces contiguously. Any owner or requestor that prefers to deal with the selection value in segments can use the incremental interfaces to do so. The transfer between the selection owner or requestor and the Intrinsics is not required to match the underlying transport protocol between the application and the X server; the Intrinsics will break too large a selection into smaller pieces for transport if necessary and will coalesce a selection transmitted incrementally if the value was requested atomically.
To set the Intrinsics selection timeout, use
XtAppSetSelectionTimeout
.
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
timeout | Specifies the selection timeout in milliseconds. |
To get the current selection timeout value, use
XtAppGetSelectionTimeout
.
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
The
XtAppGetSelectionTimeout
function returns the current selection timeout value in milliseconds.
The selection timeout is the time within which the two communicating
applications must respond to one another.
The initial timeout value is set by the
selectionTimeout
application resource as retrieved by
XtDisplayInitialize
.
If
selectionTimeout
is not specified,
the default is five seconds.
When using atomic transfers, the owner will completely process one selection request at a time. The owner may consider each request individually, since there is no possibility for overlap between evaluation of two requests.
The following procedures are used by the selection owner when providing selection data in a single unit.
The procedure pointer specified by the owner to supply the selection
data to the Intrinsics is of type
(*XtConvertSelectionProc)
.
typedef Boolean (*XtConvertSelectionProc)(
Widget w, Atom *selection, Atom *target, Atom *type_return, XtPointer *value_return, unsigned long *length_return, int *format_return)
;
w | Specifies the widget that currently owns this selection. |
selection |
Specifies the atom naming the selection requested
(for example,
|
target | Specifies the target type of the selection that has been requested, which indicates the desired information about the selection (for example, File Name, Text, Window). |
type_return |
Specifies a pointer to an atom into which the property type of the
converted value of the selection is to be stored.
For instance, either File Name or Text might have property type
|
value_return |
Specifies a pointer into which a pointer to the converted value of the
selection is to be stored.
The selection owner is responsible for allocating this storage.
If the selection owner has provided an
|
length_return | Specifies a pointer into which the number of elements in value_return, each of size indicated by format_return, is to be stored. |
format_return | Specifies a pointer into which the size in bits of the data elements of the selection value is to be stored. |
This procedure is called by the Intrinsics selection mechanism
to get the value of a selection as a given type
from the current selection owner.
It returns
True
if the owner successfully converted the selection to the target type or
False
otherwise.
If the procedure returns
False
,
the values of the return arguments are undefined.
Each
(*XtConvertSelectionProc)
should respond to target value
TARGETS
by returning a value containing the list of the targets
into which it is
prepared to convert the selection.
The value returned in
format_return must be one of 8, 16, or 32 to allow the server to
byte-swap the data if necessary.
This procedure does not need to worry about responding to the
MULTIPLE or the TIMESTAMP target values (see
the section called “Window Creation Convenience Routine”
in the Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual).
A selection request with
the MULTIPLE target type is transparently transformed into a
series of calls to this procedure, one for each target type, and a
selection request with the TIMESTAMP target value is answered
automatically by the Intrinsics using the time specified in the
call to
XtOwnSelection
or
XtOwnSelectionIncremental
.
To retrieve the
SelectionRequest
event that triggered the
(*XtConvertSelectionProc)
procedure, use
XtGetSelectionRequest
.
w | Specifies the widget that currently owns this selection. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
selection | Specifies the selection being processed. |
request_id | Specifies the requestor id in the case of incremental selections, or NULL in the case of atomic transfers. |
XtGetSelectionRequest
may be called only from within an
(*XtConvertSelectionProc)
procedure and returns a pointer to the
SelectionRequest
event that caused the conversion procedure to be invoked.
Request_id specifies a unique id for the individual request in the
case that multiple incremental transfers are outstanding. For atomic
transfers, request_id must be specified as NULL. If no
SelectionRequest
event is being processed for the specified
widget, selection, and request_id,
XtGetSelectionRequest
returns NULL.
The procedure pointer specified by the owner when it desires
notification upon losing ownership is of type
(*XtLoseSelectionProc)
.
w | Specifies the widget that has lost selection ownership. |
selection | Specifies the atom naming the selection. |
This procedure is called by the Intrinsics selection mechanism to inform the specified widget that it has lost the given selection. Note that this procedure does not ask the widget to relinquish the selection ownership; it is merely informative.
The procedure pointer specified by the owner when it desires
notification of receipt of the data or when it manages the storage
containing the data is of type
(*XtSelectionDoneProc)
.
w | Specifies the widget that owns the converted selection. |
selection | Specifies the atom naming the selection that was converted. |
target | Specifies the target type to which the conversion was done. |
This procedure is called by the Intrinsics selection mechanism
to inform the selection owner that a selection requestor has successfully
retrieved a selection value.
If the selection owner has registered an
(*XtSelectionDoneProc)
,
it should expect it to be called once for each conversion that it performs,
after the converted value has been successfully transferred
to the requestor.
If the selection owner has registered an
(*XtSelectionDoneProc)
,
it also owns the storage containing the converted
selection value.
The procedure pointer specified by the requestor to receive the
selection data from the Intrinsics is of type
(*XtSelectionCallbackProc)
.
typedef void (*XtSelectionCallbackProc)(
Widget w, XtPointer client_data, Atom *selection, Atom *type, XtPointer value, unsigned long *length, int *format)
;
w | Specifies the widget that requested the selection value. |
client_data | Specifies a value passed in by the widget when it requested the selection. |
selection | Specifies the name of the selection that was requested. |
type |
Specifies the representation type of the selection value (for example,
|
value |
Specifies a pointer to the selection value.
The requesting client owns this storage and is responsible for freeing it
by calling
|
length | Specifies the number of elements in value. |
format | Specifies the size in bits of the data in each element of value. |
This procedure is called by the Intrinsics selection mechanism to deliver the requested selection to the requestor.
If the
SelectionNotify
event returns a property of
None
,
meaning the conversion has been refused because there is no owner for the
specified selection or the owner cannot convert the selection to the
requested target for any reason, the procedure is called with a value
of NULL and a length of zero.
To obtain the selection value in a single logical unit, use
XtGetSelectionValue
or
XtGetSelectionValues
.
void XtGetSelectionValue(
Widget w, Atom selection, Atom target, XtSelectionCallbackProc callback, XtPointer client_data, Time time)
;
w | Specifies the widget making the request. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
selection |
Specifies the particular selection desired; for example,
|
target | Specifies the type of information needed about the selection. |
callback | Specifies the procedure to be called when the selection value has been obtained. Note that this is how the selection value is communicated back to the client. |
client_data | Specifies additional data to be passed to the specified procedure when it is called. |
time |
Specifies the timestamp that indicates when the selection request was
initiated.
This should be the timestamp of the event that triggered this request;
the value
|
The
XtGetSelectionValue
function requests the value of the selection converted to
the target type.
The specified callback is called at some time after
XtGetSelectionValue
is called, when the selection value is received from the X server.
It may be called before or after
XtGetSelectionValue
returns.
For more information about selection,
target, and
time, see
Section 2.6 in the
Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual.
void XtGetSelectionValues(
Widget w, Atom selection, Atom *targets, int count, XtSelectionCallbackProc callback, XtPointer *client_data, Time time)
;
w | Specifies the widget making the request. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
selection | Specifies the particular selection desired (that is, primary or secondary). |
targets | Specifies the types of information needed about the selection. |
count | Specifies the length of the targets and client_data lists. |
callback | Specifies the callback procedure to be called with each selection value obtained. Note that this is how the selection values are communicated back to the client. |
client_data | Specifies a list of additional data values, one for each target type, that are passed to the callback procedure when it is called for that target. |
time |
Specifies the timestamp that indicates when the selection request was
initiated.
This should be the timestamp of the event that triggered this request;
the value
|
The
XtGetSelectionValues
function is similar to multiple calls to
XtGetSelectionValue
except that it guarantees that no other client can assert ownership
between requests and therefore that all the conversions will refer to
the same selection value. The callback is invoked once for each
target value with the corresponding client data.
For more information about selection, target, and
time, see
section 2.6
in the Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual.
To set the selection owner and indicate that the selection value will
be provided in one piece, use
XtOwnSelection
.
Boolean XtOwnSelection(
Widget w, Atom selection, Time time, XtConvertSelectionProc convert_proc, XtLoseSelectionProc lose_selection, XtSelectionDoneProc done_proc)
;
w | Specifies the widget that wishes to become the owner. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
selection |
Specifies the name of the selection (for example,
|
time |
Specifies the timestamp that indicates when the ownership request was
initiated.
This should be the timestamp of the event that triggered ownership;
the value
|
convert_proc | Specifies the procedure to be called whenever a client requests the current value of the selection. |
lose_selection | Specifies the procedure to be called whenever the widget has lost selection ownership, or NULL if the owner is not interested in being called back. |
done_proc | Specifies the procedure called after the requestor has received the selection value, or NULL if the owner is not interested in being called back. |
The
XtOwnSelection
function informs the Intrinsics selection mechanism that a
widget wishes to own a selection.
It returns
True
if the widget successfully becomes the owner and
False
otherwise.
The widget may fail to become the owner if some other widget
has asserted ownership at a time later than this widget.
The widget can lose selection ownership either
because some other widget asserted later ownership of the selection
or because the widget voluntarily gave up ownership of the selection.
The lose_selection procedure is not called
if the widget fails to obtain selection ownership in the first place.
If a done_proc is specified, the client owns the storage allocated
for passing the value to the Intrinsics. If done_proc is NULL,
the convert_proc must allocate storage using
XtMalloc
,
XtRealloc
,
or
XtCalloc
,
and the value specified is freed by the
Intrinsics when the transfer is complete.
Usually, a selection owner maintains ownership indefinitely until some
other widget requests ownership, at which time
the Intrinsics selection mechanism informs the previous owner that it
has lost ownership of the selection.
However, in response to some user actions
(for example, when a user deletes the information selected),
the application may wish to explicitly inform the Intrinsics
by using
XtDisownSelection
that it no longer is to be the selection owner.
w | Specifies the widget that wishes to relinquish ownership. |
selection | Specifies the atom naming the selection being given up. |
time | Specifies the timestamp that indicates when the request to relinquish selection ownership was initiated. |
The
XtDisownSelection
function informs the Intrinsics selection mechanism that
the specified widget is to lose ownership of the selection.
If the widget does not currently own the selection, either
because it lost the selection
or because it never had the selection to begin with,
XtDisownSelection
does nothing.
After a widget has called
XtDisownSelection
,
its convert procedure is not called even if a request arrives later
with a timestamp during the period that this widget owned the selection.
However, its done procedure is called if a conversion that started
before the call to
XtDisownSelection
finishes after the call to
XtDisownSelection
.
When using the incremental interface, an owner may have to process more than one selection request for the same selection, converted to the same target, at the same time. The incremental functions take a request_id argument, which is an identifier that is guaranteed to be unique among all incremental requests that are active concurrently.
For example, consider the following:
Upon receiving a request for the selection value, the owner sends the first segment.
While waiting to be called to provide the next segment value but before sending it, the owner receives another request from a different requestor for the same selection value.
To distinguish between the requests, the owner uses the request_id value. This allows the owner to distinguish between the first requestor, which is asking for the second segment, and the second requestor, which is asking for the first segment.
The following procedures are used by selection owners who wish to provide the selection data in multiple segments.
The procedure pointer specified by the incremental owner to supply the
selection data to the Intrinsics is of type
(*XtConvertSelectionIncrProc)
.
typedef XtPointer XtRequestId;
typedef Boolean (*XtConvertSelectionIncrProc)(
Widget w, Atom *selection, Atom *target, Atom *type_return, XtPointer *value_return, unsigned long *length_return, int *format_return, unsigned long *max_length, XtPointer client_data, XtRequestId *request_id)
;
w | Specifies the widget that currently owns this selection. |
selection | Specifies the atom that names the selection requested. |
target | Specifies the type of information required about the selection. |
type_return | Specifies a pointer to an atom into which the property type of the converted value of the selection is to be stored. |
value_return | Specifies a pointer into which a pointer to the converted value of the selection is to be stored. The selection owner is responsible for allocating this storage. |
length_return | Specifies a pointer into which the number of elements in value_return, each of size indicated by format_return, is to be stored. |
format_return | Specifies a pointer into which the size in bits of the data elements of the selection value is to be stored so that the server may byte-swap the data if necessary. |
max_length | Specifies the maximum number of bytes which may be transferred at any one time. |
client_data | Specifies the value passed in by the widget when it took ownership of the selection. |
request_id | Specifies an opaque identification for a specific request. |
This procedure is called repeatedly by the Intrinsics selection mechanism to get
the next incremental chunk of data from a selection owner who has
called
XtOwnSelectionIncremental
.
It must return
True
if the procedure has succeeded in converting the selection data or
False
otherwise.
On the first call with a particular request id, the owner must begin
a new incremental transfer for the requested selection and target. On
subsequent calls with the same request id, the owner may assume that
the previously supplied value is no longer needed by the Intrinsics;
that is, a fixed transfer area may be allocated and returned in value_return
for each segment to be transferred. This procedure should store a
non-NULL value in value_return and zero in length_return to indicate that the
entire selection has been delivered. After returning this final
segment, the request id may be reused by the Intrinsics to begin a
new transfer.
To retrieve the
SelectionRequest
event that triggered the selection conversion procedure, use
XtGetSelectionRequest
,
described in Section 11.5.2.1.
The procedure pointer specified by the incremental selection owner
when it desires notification upon no longer having ownership is of
type
(*XtLoseSelectionIncrProc)
.
w | Specifies the widget that has lost the selection ownership. |
selection | Specifies the atom that names the selection. |
client_data | Specifies the value passed in by the widget when it took ownership of the selection. |
This procedure, which is optional, is called by the Intrinsics to inform the selection owner that it no longer owns the selection.
The procedure pointer specified by the incremental selection owner
when it desires notification of receipt of the data or when it manages
the storage containing the data is of type
(*XtSelectionDoneIncrProc)
.
typedef void (*XtSelectionDoneIncrProc)(
Widget w, Atom *selection, Atom *target, XtRequestId *request_id, XtPointer client_data)
;
w | Specifies the widget that owns the selection. |
selection | Specifies the atom that names the selection being transferred. |
target | Specifies the target type to which the conversion was done. |
request_id | Specifies an opaque identification for a specific request. |
client_data | Specified the value passed in by the widget when it took ownership of the selection. |
This procedure, which is optional, is called by the Intrinsics after
the requestor has retrieved the final (zero-length) segment of the
incremental transfer to indicate that the entire transfer is complete.
If this procedure is not specified, the Intrinsics will free only the
final value returned by the selection owner using
XtFree
.
The procedure pointer specified by the incremental selection owner to
notify it if a transfer should be terminated prematurely is of type
(*XtCancelConvertSelectionProc)
.
typedef void (*XtCancelConvertSelectionProc)(
Widget w, Atom *selection, Atom *target, XtRequestId *request_id, XtPointer client_data)
;
w | Specifies the widget that owns the selection. |
selection | Specifies the atom that names the selection being transferred. |
target | Specifies the target type to which the conversion was done. |
request_id | Specifies an opaque identification for a specific request. |
client_data | Specifies the value passed in by the widget when it took ownership of the selection. |
This procedure is called by the Intrinsics when it has been determined by means of a timeout or other mechanism that any remaining segments of the selection no longer need to be transferred. Upon receiving this callback, the selection request is considered complete and the owner can free the memory and any other resources that have been allocated for the transfer.
To obtain the value of the selection using incremental transfers, use
XtGetSelectionValueIncremental
or
XtGetSelectionValuesIncremental
.
void XtGetSelectionValueIncremental(
Widget w, Atom selection, Atom target, XtSelectionCallbackProc selection_callback, XtPointer client_data, Time time)
;
w | Specifies the widget making the request. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
selection | Specifies the particular selection desired. |
target | Specifies the type of information needed about the selection. |
selection_callback | Specifies the callback procedure to be called to receive each data segment. |
client_data | Specifies client-specific data to be passed to the specified callback procedure when it is invoked. |
time |
Specifies the timestamp that indicates when the
selection request was initiated. This should be the
timestamp of the event that triggered this request;
the value
|
The
XtGetSelectionValueIncremental
function is similar to
XtGetSelectionValue
except that the selection_callback procedure will
be called repeatedly upon delivery of multiple segments of the
selection value. The end of the selection value is indicated when
selection_callback is called with a non-NULL value of length zero,
which must still be freed by the client. If the
transfer of the selection is aborted in the middle of a transfer
(for example, because of a timeout), the selection_callback procedure is
called with a type value equal to the symbolic constant
XT_CONVERT_FAIL
so that the requestor can dispose
of the partial selection value it has collected up until that point.
Upon receiving
XT_CONVERT_FAIL
,
the requesting client must determine
for itself whether or not a partially completed data transfer is meaningful.
For more information about selection,
target, and
time, see
Use of Selection Atoms in the
Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual.
void XtGetSelectionValuesIncremental(
Widget w, Atom selection, Atom *targets, int count, XtSelectionCallbackProc selection_callback, XtPointer *client_data, Time time)
;
w | Specifies the widget making the request. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
selection | Specifies the particular selection desired. |
targets | Specifies the types of information needed about the selection. |
count | Specifies the length of the targets and client_data lists. |
selection_callback | Specifies the callback procedure to be called to receive each selection value. |
client_data | Specifies a list of client data (one for each target type) values that are passed to the callback procedure when it is invoked for the corresponding target. |
time |
Specifies the timestamp that indicates when the
selection request was initiated. This should be the
timestamp of the event that triggered this request;
the value
|
The
XtGetSelectionValuesIncremental
function is similar to
XtGetSelectionValueIncremental
except that it takes a list of targets and client data.
XtGetSelectionValuesIncremental
is equivalent to calling
XtGetSelectionValueIncremental
successively for each target/client_data pair except that
XtGetSelectionValuesIncremental
does guarantee that all the conversions will use the same selection
value because the ownership of the selection cannot change in the
middle of the list, as would be possible when calling
XtGetSelectionValueIncremental
repeatedly.
For more information about selection, target, and
time, see
Section 2.6 in the
Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual.
To set the selection owner when using incremental transfers, use
XtOwnSelectionIncremental
.
Boolean XtOwnSelectionIncremental(
Widget w, Atom selection, Time time, XtConvertSelectionIncrProc convert_callback, XtLoseSelectionIncrProc lose_callback, XtSelectionDoneIncrProc done_callback, XtCancelConvertSelectionProc cancel_callback, XtPointer client_data)
;
w | Specifies the widget that wishes to become the owner. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
selection | Specifies the atom that names the selection. |
time |
Specifies the timestamp that indicates when the
selection ownership request was initiated. This should be
the timestamp of the event that triggered ownership; the value
|
convert_callback | Specifies the procedure to be called whenever the current value of the selection is requested. |
lose_callback | Specifies the procedure to be called whenever the widget has lost selection ownership, or NULL if the owner is not interested in being notified. |
done_callback | Specifies the procedure called after the requestor has received the entire selection, or NULL if the owner is not interested in being notified. |
cancel_callback | Specifies the callback procedure to be called when a selection request aborts because a timeout expires, or NULL if the owner is not interested in being notified. |
client_data | Specifies the argument to be passed to each of the callback procedures when they are called. |
The
XtOwnSelectionIncremental
procedure informs the Intrinsics
incremental selection mechanism that the specified widget wishes to
own the selection. It returns
True
if the specified widget successfully becomes the selection owner or
False
otherwise.
For more information about selection, target, and
time, see
Section 2.6 in the
Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual.
If a done_callback procedure is specified, the client owns the storage allocated
for passing the value to the Intrinsics. If done_callback is NULL,
the convert_callback procedure must allocate storage using
XtMalloc
,
XtRealloc
,
or
XtCalloc
,
and the final value specified is freed by the
Intrinsics when the transfer is complete. After a selection transfer
has started, only one of the done_callback or cancel_callback
procedures is invoked to indicate completion of the transfer.
The lose_callback procedure does not indicate completion of any in-progress
transfers; it is invoked at the time a
SelectionClear
event is dispatched regardless of any active transfers, which are still
expected to continue.
A widget that becomes the selection owner using
XtOwnSelectionIncremental
may use
XtDisownSelection
to relinquish selection ownership.
To specify target parameters for a selection request with a single target,
use
XtSetSelectionParameters
.
void XtSetSelectionParameters(
Widget requestor, Atom selection, Atom type, XtPointer value, unsigned long length, int format)
;
requestor | Specifies the widget making the request. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
selection | Specifies the atom that names the selection. |
type | Specifies the type of the property in which the parameters are passed. |
value | Specifies a pointer to the parameters. |
length | Specifies the number of elements containing data in value, each element of a size indicated by format. |
format | Specifies the size in bits of the data in the elements of value. |
The specified parameters are copied and stored in a new property
of the specified type and format on the requestor's window. To initiate
a selection request with a target and these parameters, a subsequent
call to
XtGetSelectionValue
or to
XtGetSelectionValueIncremental
specifying the same requestor widget and selection atom will generate a
ConvertSelection
request referring to the property containing the parameters. If
XtSetSelectionParameters
is called more than once with the same widget and selection without
a call to specify a request, the most recently specified parameters
are used in the subsequent request.
The possible values of format are 8, 16, or 32. If the format is 8, the elements of value are assumed to be sizeof(char); if 16, sizeof(short); if 32, sizeof(long).
To generate a MULTIPLE
target request with parameters for any of the multiple targets of the
selection request, precede individual calls to
XtGetSelectionValue
and
XtGetSelectionValueIncremental
with corresponding individual calls to
XtSetSelectionParameters
,
and enclose these all within
XtCreateSelectionRequest
and
XtSendSelectionRequest.
XtGetSelectionValues
and
XtGetSelectionValuesIncremental
cannot be used to make selection requests with parameterized targets.
To retrieve any target parameters needed to perform a selection conversion,
the selection owner calls
XtGetSelectionParameters
.
void XtGetSelectionParameters(
Widget owner, Atom selection, XtRequestId request_id, Atom *type_return, XtPointer *value_return, unsigned long *length_return, int *format_return)
;
owner | Specifies the widget that owns the specified selection. |
selection | Specifies the selection being processed. |
request_id | Specifies the requestor id in the case of incremental selections, or NULL in the case of atomic transfers. |
type_return | Specifies a pointer to an atom in which the property type of the parameters is stored. |
value_return | Specifies a pointer into which a pointer to the parameters is to be stored. A NULL is stored if no parameters accompany the request. |
length_return | Specifies a pointer into which the number of data elements in value_return of size indicated by format_return are stored. |
format_return | Specifies a pointer into which the size in bits of the parameter data in the elements of value is stored. |
XtGetSelectionParameters
may be called only from within an
(*XtConvertSelectionProc)
or from within the first call to an
(*XtConvertSelectionIncrProc)
with a new request_id.
It is the responsibility of the caller to free the returned parameters using
XtFree
when the parameters are no longer needed.
To have the Intrinsics bundle multiple calls to make selection requests into
a single request using a MULTIPLE target, use
XtCreateSelectionRequest
and
XtSendSelectionRequest
.
requestor | Specifies the widget making the request. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
selection | Specifies the particular selection desired. |
When
XtCreateSelectionRequest
is called, subsequent calls to
XtGetSelectionValue
,
XtGetSelectionValueIncremental
,
XtGetSelectionValues
,
and
XtGetSelectionValuesIncremental
,
with the requestor and selection as specified to
XtCreateSelectionRequest
,
are bundled into a single selection request with
multiple targets. The request is made by calling
XtSendSelectionRequest
.
requestor | Specifies the widget making the request. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
selection | Specifies the particular selection desired. |
time |
Specifies the timestamp that indicates when the selection request was
initiated. The value
|
When
XtSendSelectionRequest
is called with a value of requestor and selection matching
a previous call to
XtCreateSelectionRequest
,
a selection request is sent to the selection owner.
If a single target request is queued, that request is made.
If multiple targets are queued, they are bundled into a single request
with a target of MULTIPLE using the specified timestamp.
As the values are returned, the callbacks specified in
XtGetSelectionValue
,
XtGetSelectionValueIncremental
,
XtGetSelectionValues
,
and
XtGetSelectionValueIncremental
are invoked.
Multi-threaded applications should lock the application context before
calling
XtCreateSelectionRequest
and release the lock after calling
XtSendSelectionRequest
to ensure that the thread assembling the request is safe from interference
by another thread assembling a different request naming the same widget
and selection.
To relinquish the composition of a MULTIPLE request without sending it, use
XtCancelSelectionRequest
.
requestor | Specifies the widget making the request. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
selection | Specifies the particular selection desired. |
When
XtCancelSelectionRequest
is called, any requests queued since the last call to
XtCreateSelectionRequest
for the same widget and selection are discarded
and any resources reserved are released.
A subsequent call to
XtSendSelectionRequest
will not result in any request being made.
Subsequent calls to
XtGetSelectionValue
,
XtGetSelectionValues
,
XtGetSelectionValueIncremental
,
or
XtGetSelectionValuesIncremental
will not be deferred.
Certain uses of parameterized selections require clients to name other window properties within a selection parameter. To permit reuse of temporary property names in these circumstances and thereby reduce the number of unique atoms created in the server, the Intrinsics provides two interfaces for acquiring temporary property names.
To acquire a temporary property name atom for use in a selection
request, the client may call
XtReservePropertyAtom
.
w | Specifies the widget making a selection request. |
XtReservePropertyAtom
returns an atom that may be used as a property name during selection
requests involving the specified widget.
As long as the atom remains reserved, it is unique with respect to all
other reserved atoms for the widget.
To return a temporary property name atom for reuse and to delete
the property named by that atom, use
XtReleasePropertyAtom
.
w | Specifies the widget used to reserve the property name atom. |
atom |
Specifies the property name atom returned by
|
XtReleasePropertyAtom
marks the specified property name atom as
no longer in use and ensures that any property having that name
on the specified widget's window is deleted. If atom does not
specify a value returned by
XtReservePropertyAtom
for the specified widget, the results are undefined.
To retrieve the timestamp from the most recent call to
XtDispatchEvent
that contained a timestamp, use
XtLastTimestampProcessed
.
display | Specifies an open display connection. |
If no
KeyPress
,
KeyRelease
,
ButtonPress
,
ButtonRelease
,
MotionNotify
,
EnterNotify
,
LeaveNotify
,
PropertyNotify
,
or
SelectionClear
event has yet been passed to
XtDispatchEvent
for the specified display,
XtLastTimestampProcessed
returns zero.
To retrieve the event from the most recent call to
XtDispatchEvent
for a specific display, use
XtLastEventProcessed
.
display | Specifies the display connection from which to retrieve the event. |
Returns the last event passed to
XtDispatchEvent
for the specified display. Returns NULL if there is no such event.
The client must not modify the contents of the returned event.
The Intrinsics provide an
XtAddExposureToRegion
utility function that merges
Expose
and
GraphicsExpose
events into a region for clients to process at once
rather than processing individual rectangles.
For further information about regions,
see Manipulating Regions
in
Xlib — C Language X Interface.
To merge
Expose
and
GraphicsExpose
events into a region, use
XtAddExposureToRegion
.
event |
Specifies a pointer to the
|
region |
Specifies the region object (as defined in
|
The
XtAddExposureToRegion
function computes the union of the rectangle defined by the exposure
event and the specified region.
Then it stores the results back in region.
If the event argument is not an
Expose
or
GraphicsExpose
event,
XtAddExposureToRegion
returns without an error and without modifying region.
This function is used by the exposure compression mechanism; see the section called “Exposure Compression”
To translate an x-y coordinate pair from widget coordinates to root
window absolute coordinates, use
XtTranslateCoords
.
void XtTranslateCoords(
Widget w, Position x, Position y, Position *rootx_return, Position *rooty_return)
;
w | Specifies the widget. Must be of class RectObj or any subclass thereof. |
x | |
y | Specify the widget-relative x and y coordinates. |
rootx_return | |
rooty_return | Return the root-relative x and y coordinates. |
While
XtTranslateCoords
is similar to the Xlib
XTranslateCoordinates
function, it does not generate a server request because all the required
information already is in the widget's data structures.
To translate a given window and display pointer into a widget instance, use
XtWindowToWidget
.
display | Specifies the display on which the window is defined. |
window | Specifies the drawable for which you want the widget. |
If there is a realized widget whose window is the specified drawable on
the specified display,
XtWindowToWidget
returns that widget.
If not and if the drawable has been associated with a widget through
XtRegisterDrawable
,
XtWindowToWidget
returns the widget associated with the drawable. In other cases it
returns NULL.
The Intrinsics allow a client to register procedures that are called whenever a fatal or nonfatal error occurs. These facilities are intended for both error reporting and logging and for error correction or recovery.
Two levels of interface are provided:
A high-level interface that takes an error name and class and retrieves the error message text from an error resource database.
A low-level interface that takes a simple string to display.
The high-level functions construct a string to pass to the lower-level interface. The strings may be specified in application code and are overridden by the contents of an external systemwide file, the “error database file”. The location and name of this file are implementation-dependent.
The application-context-specific error handling is not implemented on many systems, although the interfaces are always present. Most implementations will have just one set of error handlers for all application contexts within a process. If they are set for different application contexts, the ones registered last will prevail.
To obtain the error database (for example, to merge with
an application- or widget-specific database), use
XtAppGetErrorDatabase
.
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
The
XtAppGetErrorDatabase
function returns the address of the error database.
The Intrinsics do a lazy binding of the error database and do not merge in the
database file until the first call to
XtAppGetErrorDatabaseText
.
For a complete listing of all errors and warnings that can be generated by the Intrinsics, see Appendix D, Intrinsics Error Messages
The high-level error and warning handler procedure pointers are of type
(*XtErrorMsgHandler)
.
typedef void (*XtErrorMsgHandler)(
String name, String type, String class, String defaultp, String *params, Cardinal *num_params)
;
name | Specifies the name to be concatenated with the specified type to form the resource name of the error message. |
type | Specifies the type to be concatenated with the name to form the resource name of the error message. |
class | Specifies the resource class of the error message. |
defaultp | Specifies the default message to use if no error database entry is found. |
params | Specifies a pointer to a list of parameters to be substituted in the message. |
num_params | Specifies the number of entries in params. |
The specified name can be a general kind of error,
like “invalidParameters” or “invalidWindow”,
and the specified type gives extra information
such as the name of the routine in which the error was detected.
Standard
printf
notation is used to substitute the parameters into the message.
An error message handler can obtain the error database text for an
error or a warning by calling
XtAppGetErrorDatabaseText
.
void XtAppGetErrorDatabaseText(
XtAppContext app_context, const char * name, const char * type, const char * class, const char * default, char * buffer_return, int nbytes, XrmDatabase database)
;
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
name , type | Specify the name and type concatenated to form the resource name of the error message. |
class | Specifies the resource class of the error message. |
default | Specifies the default message to use if an error database entry is not found. |
buffer_return | Specifies the buffer into which the error message is to be returned. |
nbytes | Specifies the size of the buffer in bytes. |
database | Specifies the name of the alternative database to be used, or NULL if the application context's error database is to be used. |
The
XtAppGetErrorDatabaseText
returns the appropriate message from the error database
or returns the specified default message if one is not found in the
error database.
To form the full resource name and class when querying the database,
the name and type are concatenated with a single “.”
between them and the class is concatenated with itself with a
single “.” if it does not already contain a “.”.
To return the application name and class as passed to
XtDisplayInitialize
for a particular Display, use
XtGetApplicationNameAndClass
.
display |
Specifies an open display connection that has been initialized with
|
name_return | Returns the application name. |
class_return | Returns the application class. |
XtGetApplicationNameAndClass
returns the application name and class passed to
XtDisplayInitialize
for the specified display. If the display was
never initialized or has been closed, the result is undefined. The
returned strings are owned by the Intrinsics and must not be modified
or freed by the caller.
To register a procedure to be called on fatal error conditions, use
XtAppSetErrorMsgHandler
.
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
msg_handler | Specifies the new fatal error procedure, which should not return. |
XtAppSetErrorMsgHandler
returns a pointer to the previously
installed high-level fatal error handler.
The default high-level fatal error handler provided by the Intrinsics is named
_XtDefaultErrorMsg
and constructs a string from the error resource database and calls
XtError
.
Fatal error message handlers should not return.
If one does,
subsequent Intrinsics behavior is undefined.
To call the high-level error handler, use
XtAppErrorMsg
.
void XtAppErrorMsg(
XtAppContext app_context, const char * name, const char * type, const char * class, const char * default, String * params, Cardinal * num_params)
;
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
name | Specifies the general kind of error. |
type | Specifies the detailed name of the error. |
class | Specifies the resource class. |
default | Specifies the default message to use if an error database entry is not found. |
params | Specifies a pointer to a list of values to be stored in the message. |
num_params | Specifies the number of entries in params. |
The Intrinsics internal errors all have class “XtToolkitError”.
To register a procedure to be called on nonfatal error conditions, use
XtAppSetWarningMsgHandler
.
XtErrorMsgHandler XtAppSetWarningMsgHandler(
XtAppContext app_context, XtErrorMsgHandler msg_handler)
;
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
msg_handler | Specifies the new nonfatal error procedure, which usually returns. |
XtAppSetWarningMsgHandler
returns a pointer to the previously
installed high-level warning handler.
The default high-level warning handler provided by the Intrinsics is named
_XtDefaultWarningMsg
and constructs a string
from the error resource database and calls
XtWarning
.
To call the installed high-level warning handler, use
XtAppWarningMsg
.
void XtAppWarningMsg(
XtAppContext app_context, const char * name, const char * type, const char * class, const char * default, String * params, Cardinal * num_params)
;
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
name | Specifies the general kind of error. |
type | Specifies the detailed name of the error. |
class | Specifies the resource class. |
default | Specifies the default message to use if an error database entry is not found. |
params | Specifies a pointer to a list of values to be stored in the message. |
num_params | Specifies the number of entries in params. |
The Intrinsics internal warnings all have class “XtToolkitError”.
The low-level error and warning handler procedure pointers are of type
(*XtErrorHandler)
.
message | Specifies the error message. |
The error handler should display the message string in some appropriate fashion.
To register a procedure to be called on fatal error conditions, use
XtAppSetErrorHandler
.
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
handler | Specifies the new fatal error procedure, which should not return. |
XtAppSetErrorHandler
returns a pointer to the previously installed
low-level fatal error handler.
The default low-level error handler provided by the Intrinsics is
_XtDefaultError
.
On POSIX-based systems,
it prints the message to standard error and terminates the application.
Fatal error message handlers should not return.
If one does,
subsequent Intrinsics behavior is undefined.
To call the installed fatal error procedure, use
XtAppError
.
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
message | Specifies the message to be reported. |
Most programs should use
XtAppErrorMsg
,
not
XtAppError
,
to provide for customization and internationalization of error messages.
To register a procedure to be called on nonfatal error conditions, use
XtAppSetWarningHandler
.
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
handler | Specifies the new nonfatal error procedure, which usually returns. |
XtAppSetWarningHandler
returns a pointer to the previously installed
low-level warning handler.
The default low-level warning handler provided by the Intrinsics is
_XtDefaultWarning
.
On POSIX-based systems,
it prints the message to standard error and returns to the caller.
To call the installed nonfatal error procedure, use
XtAppWarning
.
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
message | Specifies the nonfatal error message to be reported. |
Most programs should use
XtAppWarningMsg
,
not
XtAppWarning
,
to provide for customization and internationalization of warning messages.
A client may set the value of the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS
property on a widget's window by calling
XtSetWMColormapWindows
.
widget | Specifies the widget on whose window the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property is stored. Must be of class Core or any subclass thereof. |
list | Specifies a list of widgets whose windows are potentially to be listed in the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property. |
count | Specifies the number of widgets in list. |
XtSetWMColormapWindows
returns immediately if widget is not realized or if count is 0.
Otherwise,
XtSetWMColormapWindows
constructs an ordered list of windows
by examining each widget in list in turn and
ignoring the widget if it is not realized, or
adding the widget's window to the window list if the widget is realized
and if its colormap resource is different from the colormap
resources of all widgets whose windows are already on the window list.
Finally,
XtSetWMColormapWindows
stores the resulting window list in the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS
property on the specified widget's window.
Refer to Section 4.1.8 in the Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual for details of
the semantics of the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property.
The Intrinsics provide procedures to look for a file by name, allowing
string substitutions in a list of file specifications. Two
routines are provided for this:
XtFindFile
and
XtResolvePathname
.
XtFindFile
uses an arbitrary set of client-specified substitutions, and
XtResolvePathname
uses a set of standard substitutions corresponding
to the X/Open Portability Guide language localization conventions.
Most applications should use
XtResolvePathname
.
A string substitution is defined by a list of
Substitution
entries.
typedef struct { char match; String substitution; } SubstitutionRec, *Substitution;
File name evaluation is handled in an operating-system-dependent
fashion by an
(*XtFilePredicate)
procedure.
filename | Specifies a potential filename. |
A file predicate procedure is called with a string that is
potentially a file name. It should return
True
if this string specifies a file that is appropriate for the intended use and
False
otherwise.
To search for a file using substitutions in a path list, use
XtFindFile
.
char * XtFindFile(
const char * path, Substitution substitutions, Cardinal num_substitutions, XtFilePredicate predicate)
;
path | Specifies a path of file names, including substitution characters. |
substitutions | Specifies a list of substitutions to make into the path. |
num_substitutions | Specifies the number of substitutions passed in. |
predicate | Specifies a procedure called to judge each potential file name, or NULL. |
The path parameter specifies a string that consists of a series of
potential file names delimited by colons. Within each name, the
percent character specifies a string substitution selected by the
following character. The character sequence “%:” specifies an
embedded colon that is not a delimiter; the sequence is replaced by a
single colon. The character sequence “%%” specifies a percent
character that does not introduce a substitution; the sequence is
replaced by a single percent character. If a percent character is
followed by any other character,
XtFindFile
looks through the
specified substitutions for that character in the match field
and, if found,
replaces the percent and match characters with the string in the
corresponding substitution field. A substitution field entry of NULL
is equivalent to a pointer to an empty string. If the operating
system does not interpret multiple embedded name separators in the
path (i.e., “/” in POSIX) the same way as a single separator,
XtFindFile
will collapse multiple separators into a single one after performing
all string substitutions. Except for collapsing embedded separators,
the contents of the string substitutions are not interpreted by
XtFindFile
and may therefore contain any operating-system-dependent
characters, including additional name separators. Each resulting
string is passed to the predicate procedure until a string is found for
which the procedure returns
True
;
this string is the return value for
XtFindFile
.
If no string yields a
True
return from the predicate,
XtFindFile
returns NULL.
If the predicate parameter is NULL, an internal procedure that checks if the file exists, is readable, and is not a directory is used.
It is the responsibility of the caller to free the returned string using
XtFree
when it is no longer needed.
To search for a file using standard substitutions in a path list, use
XtResolvePathname
.
char * XtResolvePathname(
Display *display, const char * type, const char * filename, const char * suffix, const char * path, Substitution substitutions, Cardinal num_substitutions, XtFilePredicate predicate)
;
display | Specifies the display to use to find the language for language substitutions. |
type | |
filename | |
suffix | Specify values to substitute into the path. |
path | Specifies the list of file specifications, or NULL. |
substitutions | Specifies a list of additional substitutions to make into the path, or NULL. |
num_substitutions | Specifies the number of entries in substitutions. |
predicate | Specifies a procedure called to judge each potential file name, or NULL. |
The substitutions specified by
XtResolvePathname
are determined from the value of the language string retrieved by
XtDisplayInitialize
for the specified display.
To set the
language for all applications specify “*xnlLanguage: lang” in the
resource database.
The format and content of the language string are
implementation-defined. One suggested syntax is to compose
the language string of three parts; a “language part”, a
“territory part” and a “codeset part”. The manner in which
this composition is accomplished is implementation-defined,
and the Intrinsics make no interpretation of the parts other
than to use them in substitutions as described below.
XtResolvePathname
calls
XtFindFile
with the following substitutions
in addition to any passed by the caller and returns the value returned by
XtFindFile
:
%N | The value of the filename parameter, or the application's class name if filename is NULL. |
%T | The value of the type parameter. |
%S | The value of the suffix parameter. |
%L | The language string associated with the specified display. |
%l | The language part of the display's language string. |
%t | The territory part of the display's language string. |
%c | The codeset part of the display's language string. |
%C | The customization string retrieved from the resource database associated with display. |
%D | The value of the implementation-specific default path. |
If a path is passed to
XtResolvePathname
,
it is passed along to
XtFindFile
.
If the path argument is NULL, the value of the
XFILESEARCHPATH
environment variable is passed to
XtFindFile
.
If XFILESEARCHPATH
is not defined, an implementation-specific default path is used
that contains at least six entries. These entries
must contain the following substitutions:
1. %C, %N, %S, %T, %L or %C, %N, %S, %T, %l, %t, %c 2. %C, %N, %S, %T, %l 3. %C, %N, %S, %T 4. %N, %S, %T, %L or %N, %S, %T, %l, %t, %c 5. %N, %S, %T, %l 6. %N, %S, %T
The order of these six entries within the path must be as given above.
The order and use of substitutions within a given entry
are implementation-dependent.
If the path begins
with a colon, it is preceded by %N%S. If the path includes two
adjacent colons, %N%S
is inserted between them.
The type parameter is intended to be a category of files, usually being translated into a directory in the pathname. Possible values might include “app-defaults”, “help”, and “bitmap”.
The suffix parameter is intended to be appended to the file name. Possible values might include “.txt”, “.dat”, and “.bm”.
A suggested value for the default path on POSIX-based systems is
/usr/lib/X11/%L/%T/%N%C%S:/usr/lib/X11/%l/%T/%N%C%S:\ /usr/lib/X11/%T/%N%C%S:/usr/lib/X11/%L/%T/%N%S:\ /usr/lib/X11/%l/%T/%N%S:/usr/lib/X11/%T/%N%S
Using this example, if the user has specified a language, it is used as a subdirectory of /usr/lib/X11 that is searched for other files. If the desired file is not found there, the lookup is tried again using just the language part of the specification. If the file is not there, it is looked for in /usr/lib/X11. The type parameter is used as a subdirectory of the language directory or of /usr/lib/X11, and suffix is appended to the file name.
The %D substitution allows the addition of path elements to the implementation-specific default path, typically to allow additional directories to be searched without preventing resources in the system directories from being found. For example, a user installing resource files under a directory called “ourdir” might set XFILESEARCHPATH to
%D:ourdir/%T/%N%C:ourdir/%T/%N
The customization string is obtained by querying the resource database
currently associated with the display (the database returned by
XrmGetDatabase
)
for the resource application_name.customization, class
application_class.Customization, where application_name
and application_class are the values returned by
XtGetApplicationNameAndClass
.
If no value is specified in the database, the empty string is used.
It is the responsibility of the caller to free the returned string using
XtFree
when it is no longer needed.
Applications may register functions that are called at a particular control points in the Intrinsics. These functions are intended to be used to provide notification of an “X Toolkit event”, such as widget creation, to an external agent, such as an interactive resource editor, drag-and-drop server, or an aid for physically challenged users. The control points containing such registration hooks are identified in a “hook registration” object.
To retrieve the hook registration widget, use
XtHooksOfDisplay
.
display | Specifies the desired display. |
The class of this object is a private, implementation-dependent
subclass of
Object
.
The hook object has no parent. The resources of this object are
the callback lists for hooks and the read-only resources for getting
a list of parentless shells. All of the callback lists are initially
empty. When a display is closed, the hook object associated with it
is destroyed.
The following procedures can be called with the hook registration object as an argument:
XtAddCallback
,
XtAddCallbacks
,
XtRemoveCallback
,
XtRemoveCallbacks
,
XtRemoveAllCallbacks
,
XtCallCallbacks
,
XtHasCallbacks
,
XtCallCallbackList
XtClass
,
XtSuperclass
,
XtIsSubclass
,
XtCheckSubclass
,
XtIsObject
,
XtIsRectObj
,
XtIsWidget
,
XtIsComposite
,
XtIsConstraint
,
XtIsShell
,
XtIsOverrideShell
,
XtIsWMShell
,
XtIsVendorShell
,
XtIsTransientShell
,
XtIsTopLevelShell
,
XtIsApplicationShell
,
XtIsSessionShell
XtName
,
XtParent
,
XtDisplayOfObject
,
XtScreenOfObject
The resource names, classes, and representation types that are specified in the hook object resource list are:
Name | Class | Representation |
---|---|---|
XtNcreateHook | XtCCallback | XtRCallback |
XtNchangeHook | XtCCallback | XtRCallback |
XtNconfigureHook | XtCCallback | XtRCallback |
XtNgeometryHook | XtCCallback | XtRCallback |
XtNdestroyHook | XtCCallback | XtRCallback |
XtNshells | XtCReadOnly | XtRWidgetList |
XtNnumShells | XtCReadOnly | XtRCardinal |
Descriptions of each of these resources:
The XtNcreateHook callback list is called from:
XtCreateWidget
,
XtCreateManagedWidget
,
XtCreatePopupShell
,
XtAppCreateShell
,
and their corresponding varargs versions.
The call_data parameter in a createHook callback may be
cast to type
XtCreateHookData
.
typedef struct { String type; Widget widget; ArgList args; Cardinal num_args; } XtCreateHookDataRec, *XtCreateHookData;
The type is set to
XtHcreate
,
widget is the newly created widget, and args and num_args
are the arguments passed to the create function. The callbacks are
called before returning from the create function.
The XtNchangeHook callback list is called from:
The call_data parameter in a changeHook callback may
be cast to type
XtChangeHookData
.
typedef struct { String type; Widget widget; XtPointer event_data; Cardinal num_event_data; } XtChangeHookDataRec, *XtChangeHookData;
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtSetValues
or
XtVaSetValues
,
type is set to
XtHsetValues
,
widget is the new widget passed to the set_values procedure, and
event_data may be cast to type
XtChangeHookSetValuesData
.
typedef struct { Widget old, req; ArgList args; Cardinal num_args; } XtChangeHookSetValuesDataRec, *XtChangeHookSetValuesData;
The old, req, args, and num_args are the parameters passed to the set_values procedure. The callbacks are called after the set_values and constraint set_values procedures have been called.
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtManageChild
or
XtManageChildren
,
type is set to
XtHmanageChildren
,
widget is the parent, event_data may be cast to type
WidgetList and is the list of children being managed, and
num_event_data is the length of the widget list.
The callbacks are called after the children have been managed.
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtUnmanageChild
or
XtUnmanageChildren
,
type is set to
XtHunmanageChildren
,
widget is the parent, event_data may be cast to type
WidgetList and is a list of the children being unmanaged, and
num_event_data is the length of the widget list.
The callbacks are called after the children have been unmanaged.
The changeHook callbacks are called twice as a result of a call to
XtChangeManagedSet
,
once after unmanaging and again after managing.
When the callbacks are called the first time, type is set to
XtHunmanageSet
,
widget is the parent, event_data may be cast to type
WidgetList and is a list of the children being unmanaged, and
num_event_data is the length of the widget list.
When the callbacks are called the second time, the type is set to
XtHmanageSet
,
widget is the parent, event_data may be cast to type
WidgetList and is a list of the children being managed, and
num_event_data is the length of the widget list.
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtRealizeWidget
,
the type is set to
XtHrealizeWidget
and widget is the widget being realized.
The callbacks are called after the widget has been realized.
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtUnrealizeWidget
,
the type is set to
XtHunrealizeWidget
,
and widget is the widget being unrealized.
The callbacks are called after the widget has been unrealized.
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtAddCallback
,
type is set to
XtHaddCallback
,
widget is the widget to which the callback is being added, and
event_data may be cast to type String and is the name of the
callback being added.
The callbacks are called after the callback has been added to the widget.
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtAddCallbacks
,
the type is set to
XtHaddCallbacks
,
widget is the widget to which the callbacks are being added, and
event_data may be cast to type String and is the name of the
callbacks being added.
The callbacks are called after the callbacks have been added to the widget.
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtRemoveCallback
,
the type is set to
XtHremoveCallback
,
widget is the widget from which the callback is being removed, and
event_data may be cast to type String and is the name of
the callback being removed. The callbacks are called after the callback
has been removed from the widget.
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtRemoveCallbacks
,
the type is set to
XtHremoveCallbacks
,
widget is the widget from which the callbacks are being removed, and
event_data may be cast to type String and is the name of the
callbacks being removed. The callbacks are called after the callbacks
have been removed from the widget.
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtRemoveAllCallbacks
,
the type is set to
XtHremoveAllCallbacks
and widget is the widget from which the callbacks are being removed.
The callbacks are called after the callbacks have been removed from the
widget.
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtAugmentTranslations
,
the type is set to
XtHaugmentTranslations
and widget is the widget whose translations are being modified.
The callbacks are called after the widget's translations have been
modified.
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtOverrideTranslations
,
the type is set to
XtHoverrideTranslations
and widget is the widget whose translations are being modified.
The callbacks are called after the widget's translations have been
modified.
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtUninstallTranslations
,
The type is
XtHuninstallTranslations
and widget is the widget whose translations are being uninstalled.
The callbacks are called after the widget's translations have been
uninstalled.
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtSetKeyboardFocus
,
the type is set to
XtHsetKeyboardFocus
and event_data may be cast to type Widget and is the value of
the descendant argument passed to XtSetKeyboardFocus
. The
callbacks are called before returning from XtSetKeyboardFocus
.
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtSetWMColormapWindows
,
type is set to
XtHsetWMColormapWindows
,
event_data may be cast to type WidgetList and is the value of
the list argument passed to XtSetWMColormapWindows
, and
num_event_data is the length of the list. The callbacks are
called before returning from XtSetWMColormapWindows
.
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtSetMappedWhenManaged
,
the type is set to
XtHsetMappedWhenManaged
and event_data may be cast to type Boolean and is the value of
the mapped_when_managed argument passed to XtSetMappedWhenManaged
.
The callbacks are called after setting the widget's mapped_when_managed
field and before realizing or unrealizing the widget.
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtMapWidget
,
the type is set to
XtHmapWidget
and widget is the widget being mapped.
The callbacks are called after mapping the widget.
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtUnmapWidget
,
the type is set to
XtHunmapWidget
and widget is the widget being unmapped.
The callbacks are called after unmapping the widget.
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtPopup
,
the type is set to
XtHpopup
,
widget is the widget being popped up, and event_data may
be cast to type XtGrabKind and is the value of the grab_kind argument
passed to XtPopup
.
The callbacks are called before returning from XtPopup
.
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtPopupSpringLoaded
,
the type is set to
XtHpopupSpringLoaded
and widget is the widget being popped up.
The callbacks are called
before returning from XtPopupSpringLoaded
.
When the changeHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtPopdown
,
the type is set to
XtHpopdown
and widget is the widget being popped down.
The callbacks are called
before returning from XtPopdown
.
A widget set that exports interfaces that change application state without employing the Intrinsics library should invoke the change hook itself. This is done by:
XtCallCallbacks(XtHooksOfDisplay(dpy), XtNchangeHook, call_data);
The XtNconfigureHook callback list is called any time the Intrinsics
move, resize, or configure a widget and when
XtResizeWindow
is called.
The call_data parameter may be cast to type
XtConfigureHookData.
typedef struct { String type; Widget widget; XtGeometryMask changeMask; XWindowChanges changes; } XtConfigureHookDataRec, *XtConfigureHookData;
When the configureHook callbacks are called, the type is
XtHconfigure
,
widget is the widget being configured, and changeMask and
changes reflect the changes made to the widget. The callbacks
are called after changes have been made to the widget.
The XtNgeometryHook callback list is called from
XtMakeGeometryRequest
and
XtMakeResizeRequest
once before and once after geometry negotiation occurs.
The call_data parameter may be cast to type
XtGeometryHookData
.
typedef struct { String type; Widget widget; XtWidgetGeometry* request; XtWidgetGeometry* reply; XtGeometryResult result; } XtGeometryHookDataRec, *XtGeometryHookData;
When the geometryHook callbacks are called prior to geometry negotiation,
the type is
XtHpreGeometry
,
widget is the widget for which the request is being made, and
request is the requested geometry.
When the geometryHook callbacks
are called after geometry negotiation, the type is
XtHpostGeometry
,
widget is the widget for which the request was made, request
is the requested geometry, reply is the resulting geometry granted,
and result is the value returned from the geometry negotiation.
The XtNdestroyHook callback list is called when a widget is destroyed.
The call_data parameter may be cast to type
XtDestroyHookData
.
typedef struct { String type; Widget widget; } XtDestroyHookDataRec, *XtDestroyHookData;
When the destroyHook callbacks are called as a result of a call to
XtDestroyWidget
,
the type is
XtHdestroy
and widget is the widget being destroyed. The callbacks are
called upon completion of phase one destroy for a widget.
The XtNshells and XtNnumShells are read-only resources that report a list of all parentless shell widgets associated with a display.
Clients who use these hooks must exercise caution in calling Intrinsics functions in order to avoid recursion.
To retrieve a list of the Displays associated with an application context,
use
XtGetDisplays
.
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
dpy_return | Returns a list of open Display connections in the specified application context. |
num_dpy_return | Returns the count of open Display connections in dpy_return. |
XtGetDisplays
may be used by an external agent to query the
list of open displays that belong to an application context. To free
the list of displays, use
XtFree
.
Table of Contents
Although widget writers are free to treat Core as the base class of the widget hierarchy, there are actually three classes above it. These classes are Object, RectObj (Rectangle Object), and (unnamed), and members of these classes are referred to generically as objects. By convention, the term widget refers only to objects that are a subclass of Core, and the term nonwidget refers to objects that are not a subclass of Core. In the preceding portion of this specification, the interface descriptions indicate explicitly whether the generic widget argument is restricted to particular subclasses of Object. Sections 12.2.5, 12.3.5, and 12.5 summarize the permissible classes of the arguments to, and return values from, each of the Intrinsics routines.
In order not to conflict with previous widget code, the data structures used by nonwidget objects do not follow all the same conventions as those for widgets. In particular, the class records are not composed of parts but instead are complete data structures with filler for the widget fields they do not use. This allows the static class initializers for existing widgets to remain unchanged.
The
Object
object contains the definitions of fields common to all
objects. It encapsulates the mechanisms for resource management.
All objects and widgets are members of subclasses of
Object,
which is defined by the
ObjectClassPart
and
ObjectPart
structures.
The common fields for all object classes are defined in the
ObjectClassPart
structure. All fields have the same purpose,
function, and restrictions as the corresponding fields in
CoreClassPart
;
fields whose
names are objn for some integer n are not
used for Object,
but exist to pad the data structure so that it matches Core's class
record. The class record initialization must fill all
objn fields with NULL or zero as appropriate to the type.
typedef struct _ObjectClassPart { WidgetClass superclass; String class_name; Cardinal widget_size; XtProc class_initialize; XtWidgetClassProc class_part_initialize; XtEnum class_inited; XtInitProc initialize; XtArgsProc initialize_hook; XtProc obj1; XtPointer obj2; Cardinal obj3; XtResourceList resources; Cardinal num_resources; XrmClass xrm_class; Boolean obj4; XtEnum obj5; Boolean obj6; Boolean obj7; XtWidgetProc destroy; XtProc obj8; XtProc obj9; XtSetValuesFunc set_values; XtArgsFunc set_values_hook; XtProc obj10; XtArgsProc get_values_hook; XtProc obj11; XtVersionType version; XtPointer callback_private; String obj12; XtProc obj13; XtProc obj14; XtPointer extension; } ObjectClassPart;
The extension record defined for
ObjectClassPart
with a record_type equal to
NULLQUARK
is
ObjectClassExtensionRec
.
typedef struct { XtPointer next_extension; See the section called “Class Extension Records” XrmQuark record_type; See the section called “Class Extension Records” long version; See the section called “Class Extension Records” Cardinal record_size; See the section called “Class Extension Records” XtAllocateProc allocate; See the section called “Widget Instance Allocation: The allocate Procedure” XtDeallocateProc deallocate; See the section called “Widget Instance Deallocation: The deallocate Procedure” } ObjectClassExtensionRec, *ObjectClassExtension;
The prototypical
ObjectClass
consists of just the
ObjectClassPart
.
typedef struct _ObjectClassRec { ObjectClassPart object_class; } ObjectClassRec, *ObjectClass;
The predefined class record and pointer for
ObjectClassRec
are
In
IntrinsicP.h
:
extern ObjectClassRec objectClassRec;
In
Intrinsic.h
:
extern WidgetClass objectClass;
The opaque types
Object
and
ObjectClass
and the opaque variable
objectClass
are defined for generic actions on objects.
The symbolic constant for the
ObjectClassExtension
version identifier is
XtObjectExtensionVersion
(see the section called “Class Extension Records”).
Intrinsic.h
uses an incomplete structure definition to ensure that the
compiler catches attempts to access private data:
typedef struct _ObjectClassRec* ObjectClass;
The common fields for all object instances are defined in the
ObjectPart
structure. All fields have the same meaning as the
corresponding fields in
CorePart
.
typedef struct _ObjectPart { Widget self; WidgetClass widget_class; Widget parent; Boolean being_destroyed; XtCallbackList destroy_callbacks; XtPointer constraints; } ObjectPart;
All object instances have the
Object
fields as their first component. The prototypical type
Object
is defined with only this set of fields.
Various routines can cast object pointers, as needed, to specific
object types.
In
IntrinsicP.h
:
typedef struct _ObjectRec { ObjectPart object; } ObjectRec, *Object;
In
Intrinsic.h
:
typedef struct _ObjectRec *Object;
The resource names, classes, and representation types specified in the
objectClassRec
resource list are:
Name | Class | Representation |
---|---|---|
XtNdestroyCallback | XtCCallback | XtRCallback |
All fields in
ObjectPart
have the same default values as the corresponding fields in
CorePart
.
The WidgetClass arguments to the following procedures may be
objectClass
or any subclass:
The Widget arguments to the following procedures may be of class Object or any subclass:
XtAddCallback
,
XtAddCallbacks
,
XtRemoveCallback
,
XtRemoveCallbacks
,
XtRemoveAllCallbacks
,
XtCallCallbacks
,
XtHasCallbacks
,
XtCallCallbackList
XtClass
,
XtSuperclass
,
XtIsSubclass
,
XtCheckSubclass
,
XtIsObject
,
XtIsRectObj
,
XtIsWidget
,
XtIsComposite
,
XtIsConstraint
,
XtIsShell
,
XtIsOverrideShell
,
XtIsWMShell
,
XtIsVendorShell
,
XtIsTransientShell
,
XtIsTopLevelShell
,
XtIsApplicationShell
,
XtIsSessionShell
XtIsManaged
,
XtIsSensitive
(both will return
False
if argument is not a subclass of
RectObj)
XtIsRealized
(returns the state of the nearest windowed ancestor
if class of argument is not a subclass of
Core)
XtParent
,
XtDisplayOfObject
,
XtScreenOfObject
,
XtWindowOfObject
XtSetKeyboardFocus
(descendant)
XtGetSubresources
,
XtGetApplicationResources
,
XtVaGetSubresources
,
XtVaGetApplicationResources
The return value of the following procedures will be of class Object or a subclass:
XtParent
The return value of the following procedures will be
objectClass
or a subclass:
XtClass
,
XtSuperclass
The Object class exists to enable programmers to use the Intrinsics' classing and resource-handling mechanisms for things smaller and simpler than widgets. Objects make obsolete many common uses of subresources as described in Sections 9.4, 9.7.2.4, and 9.7.2.5.
Composite
widget classes that wish to accept nonwidget children must
set the accepts_objects field in the
CompositeClassExtension
structure to
True
.
XtCreateWidget
will otherwise generate an error message on an attempt to create a
nonwidget child.
Of the classes defined by the Intrinsics,
ApplicationShell
and
SessionShell
accept nonwidget children, and the class of any nonwidget child
must not be
rectObjClass
or any subclass. The intent of allowing
Object
children of
ApplicationShell
and
SessionShell
is to provide clients a simple mechanism
for establishing the resource-naming root of an object hierarchy.
The class of rectangle objects is a subclass of
Object
that represents
rectangular areas. It encapsulates the mechanisms for geometry
management and is called RectObj
to avoid conflict with the Xlib
Rectangle
data type.
As with the
ObjectClassPart
structure, all fields in the
RectObjClassPart
structure have the same
purpose and function as the corresponding fields in
CoreClassPart
;
fields whose names are rectn for some integer
n are not used for
RectObj, but exist to pad the data structure so that it matches
Core's
class record. The class record initialization must fill all
rectn fields with NULL or zero as appropriate to the type.
typedef struct _RectObjClassPart { WidgetClass superclass; String class_name; Cardinal widget_size; XtProc class_initialize; XtWidgetClassProc class_part_initialize; XtEnum class_inited; XtInitProc initialize; XtArgsProc initialize_hook; XtProc rect1; XtPointer rect2; Cardinal rect3; XtResourceList resources; Cardinal num_resources; XrmClass xrm_class; Boolean rect4; XtEnum rect5; Boolean rect6; Boolean rect7; XtWidgetProc destroy; XtWidgetProc resize; XtExposeProc expose; XtSetValuesFunc set_values; XtArgsFunc set_values_hook; XtAlmostProc set_values_almost; XtArgsProc get_values_hook; XtProc rect9; XtVersionType version; XtPointer callback_private; String rect10; XtGeometryHandler query_geometry; XtProc rect11; XtPointer extension; } RectObjClassPart;
The
RectObj
class record consists of just the
RectObjClassPart
.
typedef struct _RectObjClassRec { RectObjClassPart rect_class; } RectObjClassRec, *RectObjClass;
The predefined class record and pointer for
RectObjClassRec
are
In
Intrinsic.h
:
extern RectObjClassRec rectObjClassRec;
In
Intrinsic.h
:
extern WidgetClass rectObjClass;
The opaque types
RectObj
and
RectObjClass
and the opaque variable
rectObjClass
are defined for generic actions on objects
whose class is RectObj or a subclass of
RectObj.
Intrinsic.h
uses an incomplete structure definition to ensure that the compiler
catches attempts to access private data:
typedef struct _RectObjClassRec* RectObjClass;
In addition to the
ObjectPart
fields,
RectObj
objects have the following fields defined in the
RectObjPart
structure. All fields have the same meaning as the corresponding field in
CorePart
.
typedef struct _RectObjPart { Position x, y; Dimension width, height; Dimension border_width; Boolean managed; Boolean sensitive; Boolean ancestor_sensitive; } RectObjPart;
RectObj objects have the RectObj fields immediately following the Object fields.
typedef struct _RectObjRec { ObjectPart object; RectObjPart rectangle; } RectObjRec, *RectObj;
In
Intrinsic.h
:
typedef struct _RectObjRec* RectObj;
The resource names, classes, and representation types that are specified in the
rectObjClassRec
resource list are:
Name | Class | Representation |
---|---|---|
XtNancestorSensitive | XtCSensitive | XtRBoolean |
XtNborderWidth | XtCBorderWidth | XtRDimension |
XtNheight | XtCHeight | XtRDimension |
XtNsensitive | XtCSensitive | XtRBoolean |
XtNwidth | XtCWidth | XtRDimension |
XtNx | XtCPosition | XtRPosition |
XtNy | XtCPosition | XtRPosition |
All fields in
RectObjPart
have the same default values as the corresponding fields in
CorePart
.
The WidgetClass arguments to the following procedures may be
rectObjClass
or any subclass:
The Widget arguments to the following procedures may be of class RectObj or any subclass:
The return value of the following procedures will be of class RectObj or a subclass:
RectObj can be subclassed to provide widgetlike objects (sometimes called gadgets) that do not use windows and do not have those features that are seldom used in simple widgets. This can save memory resources both in the server and in applications but requires additional support code in the parent. In the following discussion, rectobj refers only to objects whose class is RectObj or a subclass of RectObj, but not Core or a subclass of Core.
Composite
widget classes that wish to accept rectobj children must set
the accepts_objects field in the
CompositeClassExtension
extension structure to
True
.
XtCreateWidget
or
XtCreateManagedWidget
will otherwise generate an error if called to create a nonwidget child.
If the composite widget supports only children of class
RectObj
or a subclass (i.e., not of the general Object class), it
must declare an insert_child procedure and check the subclass of each
new child in that procedure. None of the classes defined by the
Intrinsics accept rectobj children.
If gadgets are defined in an object set, the parent is responsible for much more than the parent of a widget. The parent must request and handle input events that occur for the gadget and is responsible for making sure that when it receives an exposure event the gadget children get drawn correctly. Rectobj children may have expose procedures specified in their class records, but the parent is free to ignore them, instead drawing the contents of the child itself. This can potentially save graphics context switching. The precise contents of the exposure event and region arguments to the RectObj expose procedure are not specified by the Intrinsics; a particular rectangle object is free to define the coordinate system origin (self-relative or parent-relative) and whether or not the rectangle or region is assumed to have been intersected with the visible region of the object.
In general, it is expected that a composite widget that accepts nonwidget children will document those children it is able to handle, since a gadget cannot be viewed as a completely self-contained entity, as can a widget. Since a particular composite widget class is usually designed to handle nonwidget children of only a limited set of classes, it should check the classes of newly added children in its insert_child procedure to make sure that it can deal with them.
The Intrinsics will clear areas of a parent window obscured by rectobj children, causing exposure events, under the following circumstances:
A rectobj child is managed or unmanaged.
In a call to
XtSetValues
on a rectobj child, one or more of the set_values procedures returns
True
.
In a call to
XtConfigureWidget
on a rectobj child, areas will
be cleared corresponding to both the old and the new child
geometries, including the border, if the geometry changes.
In a call to
XtMoveWidget
on a rectobj child, areas will be
cleared corresponding to both the old and the new child
geometries, including the border, if the geometry changes.
In a call to
XtResizeWidget
on a rectobj child, a single
rectangle will be cleared corresponding to the larger of the
old and the new child geometries if they are different.
In a call to
XtMakeGeometryRequest
(or
XtMakeResizeRequest
)
on a rectobj child with
XtQueryOnly
not set, if the manager returns
XtGeometryYes
,
two rectangles will be cleared corresponding to both the old and
the new child geometries.
Stacking order is not supported for rectobj children. Composite widgets with rectobj children are free to define any semantics desired if the child geometries overlap, including making this an error.
When a rectobj is playing the role of a widget, developers must be reminded to avoid making assumptions about the object passed in the Widget argument to a callback procedure.
The Intrinsics define an unnamed class between RectObj and Core for possible future use by the X Consortium. The only assumptions that may be made about the unnamed class are
The core_class.superclass field of
coreWidgetClassRec
contains a pointer to the unnamed class record.
A pointer to the unnamed class record when dereferenced as an
ObjectClass
will contain a pointer to
rectObjClassRec
in its object_class.superclass field.
Except for the above, the contents of the class record for this class and the result of an attempt to subclass or to create a widget of this unnamed class are undefined.
The WidgetClass arguments to the following procedures must be of class Shell or a subclass:
The Widget arguments to the following procedures must be of class Core or any subclass:
XtAddEventHandler
,
XtAddRawEventHandler
,
XtRemoveEventHandler
,
XtRemoveRawEventHandler
,
XtInsertEventHandler
,
XtInsertRawEventHandler
XtInsertEventTypeHandler
,
XtRemoveEventTypeHandler
,
XtAddGrab
,
XtRemoveGrab
,
XtGrabKey
,
XtGrabKeyboard
,
XtUngrabKey
,
XtUngrabKeyboard
,
XtGrabButton
,
XtGrabPointer
,
XtUngrabButton
,
XtUngrabPointer
XtCreateWindow
,
XtDisplay
,
XtScreen
,
XtWindow
XtGetSelectionValue
,
XtGetSelectionValues
,
XtOwnSelection
,
XtDisownSelection
,
XtOwnSelectionIncremental
,
XtGetSelectionValueIncremental
,
XtGetSelectionValuesIncremental
,
XtGetSelectionRequest
XtInstallAccelerators
,
XtInstallAllAccelerators
(both destination and source)
XtAugmentTranslations
,
XtOverrideTranslations
,
XtUninstallTranslations
,
XtCallActionProc
XtCallAcceptFocus
,
XtSetKeyboardFocus
(subtree)
The Widget arguments to the following procedures must be of class Composite or any subclass:
The Widget arguments to the following procedures must be of a subclass of Shell:
The return value of the following procedure will be of class Core or a subclass:
The return value of the following procedures will be of a subclass of Shell:
Table of Contents
The interfaces described by this specification have undergone several sets of revisions in the course of adoption as an X Consortium standard specification. Having now been adopted by the Consortium as a standard part of the X Window System, it is expected that this and future revisions will retain backward compatibility in the sense that fully conforming implementations of these specifications may be produced that provide source compatibility with widgets and applications written to previous Consortium standard revisions.
The Intrinsics do not place any special requirement on widget programmers to retain source or binary compatibility for their widgets as they evolve, but several conventions have been established to assist those developers who want to provide such compatibility.
In particular, widget programmers may wish to conform to the convention described in the section called “Class Extension Records” when defining class extension records.
Widget and application developers who wish to maintain a common source
pool that will build properly with implementations of the Intrinsics
at different revision levels of these specifications but that take
advantage of newer features added in later revisions may use the
symbolic macro
XtSpecificationRelease
.
#define XtSpecificationRelease 7
As the symbol
XtSpecificationRelease
was new to Release 4, widgets and
applications desiring to build against earlier implementations should
test for the presence of this symbol and assume only Release 3
interfaces if the definition is not present.
At the data structure level, Release 4 retains binary compatibility
with Release 3 (the first X Consortium standard release) for all data
structures except
WMShellPart,
TopLevelShellPart
,
and
TransientShellPart
.
Release 4 changed the argument type to most procedures that now take
arguments of type
XtPointer
and structure members that are now of type
XtPointer
in order to avoid potential ANSI C conformance problems. It is
expected that most implementations will be binary compatible with the
previous definition.
Two fields in
CoreClassPart
were changed from
Boolean
to
XtEnum
to allow implementations additional freedom in specifying the
representations of each. This change should require no source
modification.
Arguments were added to the procedure definitions for
(*XtInitProc)
,
(*XtSetValuesFunc)
,
and
(*XtEventHandler)
to provide more information and to
allow event handlers to abort further dispatching of the current event
(caution is advised!). The added arguments to
(*XtInitProc)
and
(*XtSetValuesFunc)
make the initialize_hook and set_values_hook methods
obsolete, but the hooks have been retained for those widgets that used
them in Release 3.
The use of the arguments by a set_values_almost procedure was poorly described in Release 3 and was inconsistent with other conventions.
The current specification for the manner in which a set_values_almost procedure returns information to the Intrinsics is not compatible with the Release 3 specification, and all widget implementations should verify that any set_values_almost procedures conform to the current interface.
No known implementation of the Intrinsics correctly implemented the Release 3 interface, so it is expected that the impact of this specification change is small.
A composite widget layout routine that calls
XtQueryGeometry
is now expected to store the complete new geometry in the intended structure;
previously the specification said “store the changes it intends to
make”. Only by storing the complete geometry does the child have
any way to know what other parts of the geometry may still be
flexible. Existing widgets should not be affected by this, except
to take advantage of the new information.
In order to provide a mechanism for widgets to be notified when they
become unrealized through a call to
XtUnrealizeWidget
,
the callback
list name “unrealizeCallback” has been defined by the Intrinsics. A
widget class that requires notification on unrealize may declare a
callback list resource by this name. No class is required to declare
this resource, but any class that did so in a prior revision may find
it necessary to modify the resource name if it does not wish to use the new
semantics.
The formal adoption of the Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual as
an X Consortium standard has meant the addition of four fields to
WMShellPart
and one field to
TopLevelShellPart
.
In deference to some
widget libraries that had developed their own additional conventions
to provide binary compatibility, these five new fields were added at
the end of the respective data structures.
To provide more convenience for TransientShells, a field was added
to the previously empty
TransientShellPart
.
On some architectures the size of the part structure will not
have changed as a result of this.
Any widget implementation whose class is a subclass of
TopLevelShell
or
TransientShell
must at minimum be
recompiled with the new data structure declarations. Because
WMShellPart
no longer contains a contiguous
XSizeHints
data structure,
a subclass that expected to do a single structure assignment of an
XSizeHints
structure to the size_hints field of
WMShellPart
must be revised, though the old fields remain at the same positions within
WMShellPart
.
A new interface declaration for resource type converters was defined to provide more information to converters, to support conversion cache cleanup with resource reference counting, and to allow additional procedures to be declared to free resources. The old interfaces remain (in the compatibility section), and a new set of procedures was defined that work only with the new type converter interface.
In the now obsolete old type converter interface, converters are
reminded that they must return the size of the converted value as well
as its address. The example indicated this, but the description of
(*XtConverter)
was incomplete.
The specification for the
(*XtCaseProc)
function type has been changed
to match the Release 3 implementation, which included necessary
additional information required by the function (a pointer to the
display connection), and corrects the argument type of the source
KeySym parameter. No known implementation of the Intrinsics
implemented the previously documented interface.
Formal support for nonwidget objects is new to Release 4. A
prototype implementation was latent in at least one Release 3
implementation of the Intrinsics, but the specification has changed
somewhat. The most significant change is the requirement for a
composite widget to declare the
CompositeClassExtension
record with the accepts_objects field set to
True
in order to permit a client to create a nonwidget child.
The addition of this extension field ensures that composite widgets written under Release 3 will not encounter unexpected errors if an application attempts to create a nonwidget child. In Release 4 there is no requirement that all composite widgets implement the extra functionality required to manage windowless children, so the accepts_objects field allows a composite widget to declare that it is not prepared to do so.
At the data structure level, Release 5 retains complete binary
compatibility with Release 4. The specification of the
ObjectPart
,
RectObjPart
,
CorePart
,
CompositePart
,
ShellPart
,
WMShellPart
,
TopLevelShellPart
,
and
ApplicationShellPart
instance records was made less strict to permit implementations to
add internal fields to these structures. Any implementation that
chooses to do so would, of course, force a recompilation.
The Xlib specification for
XrmValue
and
XrmOptionDescRec
was updated to use a new type,
XPointer
,
for the addr and value fields, respectively, to avoid
ANSI C conformance problems. The definition of
XPointer
is binary compatible with the previous implementation.
A new pseudo-resource, XtNbaseTranslations, was defined to permit application developers to specify translation tables in application defaults files while still giving end users the ability to augment or override individual event sequences. This change will affect only those applications that wish to take advantage of the new functionality or those widgets that may have previously defined a resource named “baseTranslations”.
Applications wishing to take advantage of the new functionality would change their application defaults file, e.g., from
app.widget.translations: value to app.widget.baseTranslations: value
If it is important to the application to preserve complete compatibility of the defaults file between different versions of the application running under Release 4 and Release 5, the full translations can be replicated in both the “translations” and the “baseTranslations” resource.
The current specification allows implementations greater flexibility in defining the directory structure used to hold the application class and per-user application defaults files. Previous specifications required the substitution strings to appear in the default path in a certain order, preventing sites from collecting all the files for a specific application together in one directory. The Release 5 specification allows the default path to specify the substitution strings in any order within a single path entry. Users will need to pay close attention to the documentation for the specific implementation to know where to find these files and how to specify their own XFILESEARCHPATH and XUSERFILESEARCHPATH values when overriding the system defaults.
XtResolvePathname
supports a new substitution string, %C, for specifying separate
application class resource files according to arbitrary user-specified
categories. The primary motivation for this addition was separate
monochrome and color application class defaults files. The
substitution value is obtained by querying the current resource
database for the application resource name “customization”, class
“Customization”. Any application that previously used this
resource name and class will need to be aware of the possibly
conflicting semantics.
To allow a user to specify separate preferences for each screen of a display, a per-screen resource specification string has been added and multiple resource databases are created; one for each screen. This will affect any application that modified the (formerly unique) resource database associated with the display subsequent to the Intrinsics database initialization. Such applications will need to be aware of the particular screen on which each shell widget is to be created.
Although the wording of the specification changed substantially in the
description of the process by which the resource database(s) is
initialized, the net effect is the same as in prior releases with the
exception of the added per-screen resource specification and the new
customization substitution string in
XtResolvePathname
.
Internationalization as defined by ANSI is a technology that allows support of an application in a single locale. In adding support for internationalization to the Intrinsics the restrictions of this model have been followed. In particular, the new Intrinsics interfaces are designed not to preclude an application from using other alternatives. For this reason, no Intrinsics routine makes a call to establish the locale. However, a convenience routine to establish the locale at initialize time has been provided, in the form of a default procedure that must be explicitly installed if the application desires ANSI C locale behavior.
As many objects in X, particularly resource databases, now inherit
the global locale when they are created, applications wishing to use
the ANSI C locale model should use the new function
XtSetLanguageProc
to do so.
The internationalization additions also define event filters
as a part of the Xlib Input Method specifications. The
Intrinsics enable the use of event filters through additions to
XtDispatchEvent
.
Applications that may not be dispatching all events through
XtDispatchEvent
should be reviewed in the context of this new input method mechanism.
In order to permit internationalization of error messages, the name and path of the error database file are now allowed to be implementation-dependent. No adequate standard mechanism has yet been suggested to allow the Intrinsics to locate the database from localization information supplied by the client.
The previous specification for the syntax of the language string
specified by
xnlLanguage
has been dropped to avoid potential conflicts with other standards.
The language string syntax is now implementation-defined.
The example syntax cited is consistent with the previous
specification.
In order to permit additional memory savings, an Xlib interface was added to allow the resource manager to avoid copying certain string constants. The Intrinsics specification was updated to explicitly require the Object class_name, resource_name, resource_class, resource_type, default_type in resource tables, Core actions string field, and Constraint resource_name, resource_class, resource_type, and default_type resource fields to be permanently allocated. This explicit requirement is expected to affect only applications that may create and destroy classes on the fly.
The args argument to
XtAppInitialize
,
XtVaAppInitialize
,
XtOpenDisplay
,
XtDisplayInitialize
,
and
XtInitialize
were changed from
Cardinal
*
to int* to conform to pre-existing convention and avoid otherwise
annoying typecasting in ANSI C environments.
At the data structure level, Release 6 retains binary compatibility
with Release 5 for all data structures except
WMShellPart
.
Three resources were added to the specification.
The known implementations had unused space in the data structure,
therefore on some architectures and implementations,
the size of the part structure will not have changed as a result of this.
Two new widget methods for instance allocation and deallocation were added to the Object class. These new methods allow widgets to be treated as C++ objects in the C++ environment when an appropriate allocation method is specified or inherited by the widget class.
The textual descriptions of the processes of widget creation and widget destruction have been edited to provide clarification to widget writers. Widgets writers may have reason to rely on the specific order of the stages of widget creation and destruction; with that motivation, the specification now more exactly describes the process.
As a convenience, an interface to locate a widget class extension
record on a linked list,
XtGetClassExtension
,
has been added.
A new option to allow bundled changes to the managed set of a Composite
widget is introduced in the Composite class extension record.
Widgets that define a change_managed procedure that can accommodate
additions and deletions to the managed set of children in a single
invocation should set allows_change_managed_set to True
in the
extension record.
The wording of the process followed by
XtUnmanageChildren
has changed slightly to better handle changes to the managed set
during phase 2 destroy processing.
A new exposure event compression flag,
XtExposeNoRegion
,
was added. Many widgets specify exposure compression, but either
ignore the actual damage region passed to the core expose procedure or
use only the cumulative bounding box data available in the event.
Widgets with expose procedures that do not make use of exact
exposure region information can indicate that the Intrinsics need not
compute the region.
XtOpenApplication
is a new convenience procedure to initialize the toolkit, create an
application context, open an X display connection, and create the
root of the widget instance tree. It is identical to the interface
it replaces,
XtAppInitialize
,
in all respects except that it takes an additional argument specifying
the widget class of the root shell to create.
This interface is now the recommended one so that clients may easily
become session participants.
The old convenience procedures appear in the compatibility section.
The toolkit initialization function
XtToolkitInitialize
may be called multiple times without penalty.
In order to optimize changes in geometry to a set of geometry-managed
children, a new interface,
XtChangeManagedSet
,
has been added.
The revision of the Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual as an X Consortium standard has resulted
in the addition of three fields to the specification of
WMShellPart
.
These are urgency, client_leader, and window_role.
The adoption of the X Session Management Protocol as an X Consortium
standard has resulted in the addition of a new shell widget,
SessionShell
,
and an accompanying subclass verification interface,
XtIsSessionShell
.
This widget provides support for communication between an application
and a session manager, as well as a window manager.
In order to preserve compatibility with existing subclasses of
ApplicationShell
,
the
ApplicationShell
was subclassed to create the new widget class.
The session protocol requires a modal response to certain checkpointing
operations by participating applications. The
SessionShell
structures
the application's notification of and responses to messages from the session
manager by use of various callback lists and by use of the new interfaces
XtSessionGetToken
and
XtSessionReturnToken
.
There is also a new command line argument, -xtsessionID, which facilitates
the session manager in restarting applications based on the Intrinsics.
The resource name and class strings defined by the Intrinsics shell
widgets in
<X11/Shell.h>
are now listed in Appendix E. The addition of a new symbol
for the
WMShell
wait_for_wm resource was made to bring the external symbol
and the string it represents into agreement. The actual resource name
string in
WMShell
has not changed.
The resource representation type of the XtNwinGravity resource of the
WMShell
was changed to XtRGravity in order to register a type
converter so that window gravity resource values could be specified by name.
A clarification to the specification was made to indicate that geometry requests may include current values along with the requested changes.
In Release 6, support is provided for registering selectors
and event handlers for events generated by X protocol extensions
and for dispatching those events to the appropriate widget.
The new event handler registration interfaces are
XtInsertEventTypeHandler
and
XtRemoveEventTypeHandler
.
Since the mechanism to indicate selection of extension events is specific
to the extension being used, the Intrinsics introduces
XtRegisterExtensionSelector
,
which allows the application to select for the events of interest.
In order to change the dispatching algorithm to accommodate extension events
as well as core X protocol events,
the Intrinsics event dispatcher may now be replaced or enveloped
by the application with
XtSetEventDispatcher
.
The dispatcher may wish to call
XtGetKeyboardFocusWidget
to determine the widget with the current Intrinsics keyboard focus.
A dispatcher, after determining the destination widget, may use
XtDispatchEventToWidget
to cause the event to be dispatched to the event handlers registered
by a specific widget.
To permit the dispatching of events
for nonwidget drawables, such as pixmaps that are not associated
with a widget's window,
XtRegisterDrawable
and
XtUnregisterDrawable
have been added to the library. A related update was made to
the description of
XtWindowToWidget
.
The library is now thread-safe, allowing one thread at a time to
enter the library and protecting global data as necessary from concurrent use.
Threaded toolkit applications are supported by the
new interfaces
XtToolkitThreadInitialize
,
XtAppLock
,
XtAppUnlock
,
XtAppSetExitFlag
,
and
XtAppGetExitFlag
.
Widget writers may also use
XtProcessLock
and
XtProcessUnlock
.
Safe handling of POSIX signals and other asynchronous notifications
is now provided by use of
XtAppAddSignal
,
XtNoticeSignal
,
and
XtRemoveSignal
.
The application can receive notification of an impending block
in the Intrinsics event manager by registering interest through
XtAppAddBlockHook
and
XtRemoveBlockHook
.
XtLastEventProcessed
returns the most recent event passed to
XtDispatchEvent
for a specified display.
Resource converters are registered by the Intrinsics for window gravity and for three new resource types associated with session participation: RestartStyle, CommandArgArray and DirectoryString.
The file search path syntax has been extended to make it easier to include the default search path, which controls resource database construction, by using the new substitution string, %D.
The default key translator now recognizes the NumLock modifier. If NumLock is on and the second keysym is a keypad keysym (a standard keysym named with a “KP” prefix or a vendor-specific keysym in the hexadecimal range 0x11000000 to 0x1100FFFF), then the default key translator will use the first keysym if Shift and/or ShiftLock is on and will use the second keysym if neither is on. Otherwise, it will ignore NumLock and apply the normal protocol semantics.
The targets of selection requests may be parameterized, as described
by the revised Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual.
When such requests are made,
XtSetSelectionParameters
is used by the requestor to specify the target parameters and
XtGetSelectionParameters
is used by the selection owner to retrieve the parameters.
When a parameterized target is specified in the context of a bundled
request for multiple targets,
XtCreateSelectionRequest
,
XtCancelSelectionRequest
,
and
XtSendSelectionRequest
are used to envelop the assembly of the request.
When the parameters themselves are the names of properties,
the Intrinsics provides support for the economical use of property atom names;
see
XtReservePropertyAtom
and
XtReleasePropertyAtom
.
External agent hooks were added for the benefit of applications
that instrument other applications for purposes of accessibility,
testing, and customization. The external agent and the application
communicate by a shared protocol which is transparent to the application.
The hook callbacks permit the external agent to register interest
in groups or classes of toolkit activity and to be notified of the
type and details of the activity as it occurs. The new interfaces
related to this effort are
XtHooksOfDisplay
,
which returns the hook registration widget, and
XtGetDisplays
,
which returns a list of the X displays associated with an application context.
The Toolkit was proposed in X10R4, released at the end of 1986. The X11R6 documentation was completed in mid–1994. Over most of the eleven years through X11R6.9, only minor changes were made to the specification. Some changes are documented only in the release notes:
The X11R6.3 release notes (1997) mention one new feature (section 3.15) Xt Geometry Management Debugger, saying
Daniel Dardailler's “GeoTattler” code has been merged into the Xt Intrinsics library implementation. This is not a standard. If libXt is compiled with the
XT_GEO_TATTLER
symbol defined (currently there is no build configuration support to do this) then a “geoTattler” resource may be specified for any widget in an application. If thegeoTattler
resource for a widget instance isTrue
then libXt will generate debugging information to stdout when the widget makes geometry change requests.For example, if the resources specify:
myapp*draw.XmScale.geoTattler: ON *XmScrollBar.geoTattler:ON *XmRowColumn.exit_button.geoTattler:ONthen geometry management debugging information will be generated for all the
XmScale
children of the widget named draw, all the XmScrollBars, and the widget named exit_button in anyXmRowColumn
.
X11R6.4 (1998) added Appendix F, Resource Configuration Management. The release notes explain that by saying
The X Toolkit Intrinsics library (libXt) now has IBM's Easy Resource Configuration support included.
but goes on to say (section 14) that
Easy Resource Configuration is not a standard part of the X Toolkit Intrinsics (libXt). It is neither an X Consortium standard nor an X Project Team specification.
X11R6.5 (2000) documented a bug-fix for XtAppPeekEvent in the release notes, stating that it now worked as described in the specification. It also modified the description of XtAppPeekEvent in the specification. Previously the specification stated that no known implementations behaved as specified.
Subsequent releases X11R6.6 (2001) through X11R6.9 (2005) did not document any new or improved features.
Throughout this interval, there were undocumented fixes and improvements made to the X Toolkit Intrinsics library. The documentation was modified to fix minor errors, improve the formatting, and update version numbers.
X11R7 releases starting in 2005 continued this trend, converting the documentation from nroff to sgml. X11R7.7 (2012) provides the same Intrinsics specification (aside from details of formatting and version numbers) as X11R6 (1995).
The updates for this specification are a continuation of X11R7.7, because (as of April 2019) there are no plans for an X11R7.8 release.
The Intrinsics specification was first released with X11R3 in 1989. That was too early to take Standard C (i.e., ANSI C) into account. Because vendors generally did not provide a no-cost Standard C compiler, the X Toolkit Intrinsics library initially supported both K&R and ANSI C. The X11R5 release notes mention using gcc, with some caveats. As a result, the specification and implementation gave equal attention to both K&R and ANSI C.
This example shows how a function prototype was used in the C header files:
extern Display *XtOpenDisplay( #if NeedFunctionPrototypes XtAppContext /* app_context */, _Xconst _XtString /* display_string */, _Xconst _XtString /* application_name */, _Xconst _XtString /* application_class */, XrmOptionDescRec* /* options */, Cardinal /* num_options */, int* /* argc */, char** /* argv */ #endif );
The parameters for the ANSI C prototype were conditionally compiled. Used with a K&R compiler, those parameters were ignored.
The X Toolkit Intrinsics library used const in just a few cases. The specification did not mention it at all.
Over time, that was seen as a problem, partly because of gcc's warning options such as write-strings, introduced in early 1988 (released with gcc 1.27 in late 1988). Quoting from gcc 2.58's documentation (late 1993):
`-Wwrite-strings'
Give string constants the type `const char[LENGTH]' so that
copying the address of one into a non-`const' `char *' pointer
will get a warning. These warnings will help you find at compile
time code that can try to write into a string constant, but only
if you have been very careful about using `const' in declarations
and prototypes. Otherwise, it will just be a nuisance; this is
why we did not make `-Wall' request these warnings.
Others did not agree that it was a nuisance. Besides the obvious advantage of improving program correctness, making a symbol “const” gave the compiler and linker a hint that the symbol could be put into the text (read-only) section, eliminating some steps needed by the linker to adjust addresses and thereby reducing the time it took to load a program into memory.
Other gcc warning options (such as such as cast-qual) are useful for improving programs. They give similar information, because unless told otherwise, gcc would treat string values as nonwritable. Quoting from gcc 1.27:
* GNU CC normally makes string constants read-only. If several identical-looking string constants are used, GNU CC stores only one copy of the string. ... The best solution to these problems is to change the program to use `char'-array variables with initialization strings for these purposes instead of string constants. But if this is not possible, you can use the `-fwritable-strings' flag, which directs GNU CC to handle string constants the same way most C compilers do.
and
`-fwritable-strings' Store string constants in the writable data segment and don't uniquize them. This is for compatibility with old programs which assume they can write into string constants. Writing into string constants is a very bad idea; ``constants'' should be constant.
Several prototypes in the implementation use the private type _XtString. The specification and implementation also used a String type without explaining when it is appropriate.
typedef char *String; /* We do this in order to get "const" declarations to work right. We * use _XtString instead of String so that C++ applications can * #define String to something else if they choose, to avoid conflicts * with other C++ libraries. */ #define _XtString char*
That is, the developers were providing for some workaround to allow C++ applications to use the stricter compiler checking associated with const.
The String type is not the only type used in the prototypes for the X Toolkit Intrinsics library. Its developers were also concerned with porting the library to platforms with different size-constraints. They defined different types (used in the function prototypes) depending on whether a “wide” parameter type was appropriate:
/* _Xt names are private to Xt implementation, do not use in client code */ #if NeedWidePrototypes #define _XtBoolean int #define _XtDimension unsigned int #define _XtKeyCode unsigned int #define _XtPosition int #define _XtXtEnum unsigned int #else #define _XtBoolean Boolean #define _XtDimension Dimension #define _XtKeyCode KeyCode #define _XtPosition Position #define _XtXtEnum XtEnum #endif /* NeedWidePrototypes */
and
#ifdef CRAY typedef long Boolean; typedef char* XtArgVal; typedef long XtEnum; #else typedef char Boolean; typedef long XtArgVal; typedef unsigned char XtEnum; #endif
In practice, wide-prototypes are rarely used, not well supported. The specification did not clarify the distinction between Bool (mentioned as a resource type) and Boolean (used in all of the data structures). The implementation used both, predominantly the latter.
Other features of Standard C were neglected in the specification because it was accommodating K&R C:
K&R C has no void keyword. The specification used it for return-types, but not to indicate an empty parameter list. The specification also stated that void* would be used for the XtPointer type.
The conversion to sgml lost the void return-type.
Standard C uses an ellipsis for variable-length argument lists, e.g., for
XtVaAppCreateShell
.
Again, there was a conditional-compilation symbol
(NeedVarargsPrototypes
)
to handle the different forms used.
Here is an example:
#if NeedVarargsPrototypes void XtVaGetApplicationResources(Widget widget, XtPointer base, XtResourceList resources, Cardinal num_resources, ...) #else /*VARARGS4*/ void XtVaGetApplicationResources(widget, base, resources, num_resources, va_alist) Widget widget; XtPointer base; XtResourceList resources; Cardinal num_resources; va_dcl #endif
One problem with the conditional-compilation was that it was easy to make a mistake with the order of parameters between the two forms. Developers would frequently group together parameters which used the same type, whether or not they were adjacent in the Standard C prototype.
A comment in the X11R4 header file said that this was temporary, until function prototypes worked everywhere. That was finally removed in X11R6.7 (fourteen years later). However, the subsequent conversion to sgml lost the ellipsis from the prototypes shown in the specification.
Support for K&R C was removed from the header files in 2003 (released in X11R6.7), and from the library source in 2004 (released in X11R6.9). The wide-prototype feature is still present in 2019, but generally unused.
Removing support for K&R C did not address the issues of const. That was done in 2019:
The String is conditionally defined, to provide compatibility with existing applications.
If the symbol _CONST_X_STRING is defined, String is read-only as shown here.
/* * As used in its function interface, the String type of libXt can be readonly. * But compiling libXt with this feature may require some internal changes, * e.g., casts and occasionally using a plain "char*". */ #ifdef _CONST_X_STRING typedef const char *String; #else typedef char *String; #endif
Applications which use the newer const feature must define _CONST_X_STRING to enable this feature.
By default, the X Toolkit Intrinsics library uses the const feature. It has been updated to make use of the const feature for improved type-checking.
Because the X Toolkit Intrinsics library uses const, some prototypes have been modified. For example:
Most of the parameters which used String are unmodified; a few (such as the argv–parameters) are actually read/write. They are now char* parameters.
Many of the strings passed to the library are stored in widgets without reallocating a copy. Those are treated as read-only, and use the String type.
Each change to the documentation was verified using scripts that extracted the function prototypes and used the C compiler to check for compatibility.
A resource file contains text representing the default resource values for an application or set of applications.
The format of resource files is defined by Xlib — C Language X Interface. and is reproduced here for convenience only.
The format of a resource specification is
ResourceLine | = Comment | IncludeFile | ResourceSpec | <empty line> |
Comment | =“!” {<any character except null or newline>} |
IncludeFile | = “#” WhiteSpace “include” WhiteSpace FileName WhiteSpace |
FileName | = <valid filename for operating system> |
ResourceSpec | = WhiteSpace ResourceName WhiteSpace “:” WhiteSpace Value |
ResourceName | = [Binding] {Component Binding} ComponentName |
Binding | =“.” | “*” |
WhiteSpace | = {<space> | <horizontal tab>} |
Component | = “?” | ComponentName |
ComponentName | = NameChar {NameChar} |
NameChar | = “a”–“z” | “A”–“Z” | “0”–“9” | “_” | “-” |
Value | ={<any character except null or unescaped newline>} |
Elements separated by vertical bar (|) are alternatives. Curly braces ({...}) indicate zero or more repetitions of the enclosed elements. Square brackets ([...]) indicate that the enclosed element is optional. Quotes (“...”) are used around literal characters.
If the last character on a line is a backslash (\), that line is assumed to continue on the next line.
To allow a Value to begin with whitespace, the two-character sequence “\space” (backslash followed by space) is recognized and replaced by a space character, and the two-character sequence “\tab” (backslash followed by horizontal tab) is recognized and replaced by a horizontal tab character.
To allow a Value to contain embedded newline characters, the two-character sequence “\n” is recognized and replaced by a newline character. To allow a Value to be broken across multiple lines in a text file, the two-character sequence “\newline” (backslash followed by newline) is recognized and removed from the value.
To allow a Value to contain arbitrary character codes, the four-character sequence “\nnn”, where each n is a digit character in the range of “0”–“7”, is recognized and replaced with a single byte that contains the octal value specified by the sequence. Finally, the two-character sequence “\\” is recognized and replaced with a single backslash.
Notation
Syntax is specified in EBNF notation with the following conventions:
[ a ] | Means either nothing or “a” |
{ a } | Means zero or more occurrences of “a” |
( a | b ) | Means either “a” or “b” |
\\n | Is the newline character |
All terminals are enclosed in double quotation marks (" "). Informal descriptions are enclosed in angle brackets (< >). Syntax
The syntax of a translation table is
translationTable | = [ directive ] { production } |
directive | = ( “#replace” | “#override” | “#augment” ) “\\n” |
production | = lhs “:” rhs “\\n” |
lhs | = ( event | keyseq ) { “,” (event | keyseq) } |
keyseq | = “"” keychar {keychar} “"” |
keychar | = [ “^” | “$” | “\\” ] <ISO Latin 1 character> |
event | = [modifier_list] “<”event_type“>” [ “(” count[“+”] “)” ] {detail} |
modifier_list | = ( [“!”] [“:”] {modifier} ) | “None” |
modifier | = [“~”] modifier_name |
count | = (“1” | “2” | “3” | “4” | ...) |
modifier_name | = “@” <keysym> | <see ModifierNames table below> |
event_type | = <see Event Types table below> |
detail | = <event specific details> |
rhs | = { name “(” [params] “)” } |
name | = namechar { namechar } |
namechar | = { “a”–“z” | “A”–“Z” | “0”–“9” | “_” | “–” } |
params | = string {“,” string} |
string | = quoted_string | unquoted_string |
quoted_string | = “"” {<Latin 1 character> | escape_char} [“\\"” ] “"” |
escape_char | = “\\"” |
unquoted_string | = {<Latin 1 character except space, tab, “,”, “\\n”, “)”>} |
The params field is parsed into a list of
String
values that will be passed to the named action procedure. A
quoted string may contain an embedded quotation mark if the
quotation mark is preceded by a single backslash (\). The
three-character sequence “\\"” is interpreted as “single backslash
followed by end-of-string”.
Modifier Names
The modifier field is used to specify standard X keyboard and button
modifier mask bits.
Modifiers are legal on event types
KeyPress
,
KeyRelease
,
ButtonPress
,
ButtonRelease
,
MotionNotify
,
EnterNotify
,
LeaveNotify
,
and their abbreviations.
An error is generated when a translation table
that contains modifiers for any other events is parsed.
If the modifier list has no entries and is not “None”, it means “don't care” on all modifiers.
If an exclamation point (!) is specified at the beginning of the modifier list, it means that the listed modifiers must be in the correct state and no other modifiers can be asserted.
If any modifiers are specified and an exclamation point (!) is not specified, it means that the listed modifiers must be in the correct state and “don't care” about any other modifiers.
If a modifier is preceded by a tilde (~), it means that that modifier must not be asserted.
If “None” is specified, it means no modifiers can be asserted.
If a colon (:) is specified at the beginning of the modifier list, it directs the Intrinsics to apply any standard modifiers in the event to map the event keycode into a KeySym. The default standard modifiers are Shift and Lock, with the interpretation as defined in X Window System Protocol, Section 5. The resulting KeySym must exactly match the specified KeySym, and the nonstandard modifiers in the event must match the modifier list. For example, “:<Key>a” is distinct from “:<Key>A”, and “:Shift<Key>A” is distinct from “:<Key>A”.
If both an exclamation point (!) and a colon (:) are specified at the beginning of the modifier list, it means that the listed modifiers must be in the correct state and that no other modifiers except the standard modifiers can be asserted. Any standard modifiers in the event are applied as for colon (:) above.
If a colon (:) is not specified, no standard modifiers are applied. Then, for example, “<Key>A” and “<Key>a” are equivalent.
In key sequences, a circumflex (^) is an abbreviation for the Control modifier, a dollar sign ($) is an abbreviation for Meta, and a backslash (\) can be used to quote any character, in particular a double quote ("), a circumflex (^), a dollar sign ($), and another backslash (\). Briefly:
No modifiers: None <event> detail Any modifiers: <event> detail Only these modifiers: ! mod1 mod2 <event> detail These modifiers and any others: mod1 mod2 <event> detail
The use of “None” for a modifier list is identical to the use of an exclamation point with no modifers.
Modifier | Abbreviation | Meaning |
---|---|---|
Ctrl | c | Control modifier bit |
Shift | s | Shift modifier bit |
Lock | l | Lock modifier bit |
Meta | m | Meta key modifier |
Hyper | h | Hyper key modifier |
Super | su | Super key modifier |
Alt | a | Alt key modifier |
Mod1 | Mod1 modifier bit | |
Mod2 | Mod2 modifier bit | |
Mod3 | Mod3 modifier bit | |
Mod4 | Mod4 modifier bit | |
Mod5 | Mod5 modifier bit | |
Button1 | Button1 modifier bit | |
Button2 | Button2 modifier bit | |
Button3 | Button3 modifier bit | |
Button4 | Button4 modifier bit | |
Button5 | Button5 modifier bit | |
None | No modifiers | |
Any | Any modifier combination |
A key modifier is any modifier bit one of whose corresponding KeyCodes contains the corresponding left or right KeySym. For example, “m” or “Meta” means any modifier bit mapping to a KeyCode whose KeySym list contains XK_Meta_L or XK_Meta_R. Note that this interpretation is for each display, not global or even for each application context. The Control, Shift, and Lock modifier names refer explicitly to the corresponding modifier bits; there is no additional interpretation of KeySyms for these modifiers.
Because it is possible to associate arbitrary KeySyms with modifiers, the set of key modifiers is extensible. The “@” <keysym> syntax means any modifier bit whose corresponding KeyCode contains the specified KeySym name.
A modifier_list/KeySym combination in a translation matches a modifiers/KeyCode combination in an event in the following ways:
If a colon (:) is used, the Intrinsics call the display's
(*XtKeyProc)
with the KeyCode and modifiers.
To match, (modifiers & ~modifiers_return) must equal modifier_list, and
keysym_return must equal the given KeySym.
If (:) is not used, the Intrinsics mask off all don't-care bits from the
modifiers.
This value must be equal to modifier_list.
Then, for each possible combination of
don't-care modifiers in the modifier list, the Intrinsics call the display's
(*XtKeyProc)
with the KeyCode and that combination ORed with the cared-about modifier bits
from the event.
Keysym_return must match the KeySym in the translation.
Event Types
The event-type field describes XEvent types. In addition to the standard Xlib symbolic event type names, the following event type synonyms are defined:
Type | Meaning |
---|---|
Key | KeyPress |
KeyDown | KeyPress |
KeyUp | KeyRelease |
BtnDown | ButtonPress |
BtnUp | ButtonRelease |
Motion | MotionNotify |
PtrMoved | MotionNotify |
MouseMoved | MotionNotify |
Enter | EnterNotify |
EnterWindow | EnterNotify |
Leave | LeaveNotify |
LeaveWindow | LeaveNotify |
FocusIn | FocusIn |
FocusOut | FocusOut |
Keymap | KeymapNotify |
Expose | Expose |
GrExp | GraphicsExpose |
NoExp | NoExpose |
Visible | VisibilityNotify |
Create | CreateNotify |
Destroy | DestroyNotify |
Unmap | UnmapNotify |
Map | MapNotify |
MapReq | MapRequest |
Reparent | ReparentNotify |
Configure | ConfigureNotify |
ConfigureReq | ConfigureRequest |
Grav | GravityNotify |
ResReq | ResizeRequest |
Circ | CirculateNotify |
CircReq | CirculateRequest |
Prop | PropertyNotify |
SelClr | SelectionClear |
SelReq | SelectionRequest |
Select | SelectionNotify |
Clrmap | ColormapNotify |
Message | ClientMessage |
Mapping | MappingNotify |
The supported abbreviations are:
Abbreviation | Event Type | Including |
---|---|---|
Ctrl | KeyPress | with Control modifier |
Meta | KeyPress | with Meta modifier |
Shift | KeyPress | with Shift modifier |
Btn1Down | ButtonPress | with Button1 detail |
Btn1Up | ButtonRelease | with Button1 detail |
Btn2Down | ButtonPress | with Button2 detail |
Btn2Up | ButtonRelease | with Button2 detail |
Btn3Down | ButtonPress | with Button3 detail |
Btn3Up | ButtonRelease | with Button3 detail |
Btn4Down | ButtonPress | with Button4 detail |
Btn4Up | ButtonRelease | with Button4 detail |
Btn5Down | ButtonPress | with Button5 detail |
Btn5Up | ButtonRelease | with Button5 detail |
BtnMotion | MotionNotify | with any button modifier |
Btn1Motion | MotionNotify | with Button1 modifier |
Btn2Motion | MotionNotify | with Button2 modifier |
Btn3Motion | MotionNotify | with Button3 modifier |
Btn4Motion | MotionNotify | with Button4 modifier |
Btn5Motion | MotionNotify | with Button5 modifier |
The detail field is event-specific and normally corresponds to the detail field of the corresponding event as described by X Window System Protocol, Section 11. The detail field is supported for the following event types:
KeyPress | KeySym from event detail (keycode) |
KeyRelease | KeySym from event detail (keycode) |
ButtonPress | button from event detail |
ButtonRelease | button from event detail |
MotionNotify | event detail |
EnterNotify | event mode |
LeaveNotify | event mode |
FocusIn | event mode |
FocusOut | event mode |
PropertyNotify | atom |
SelectionClear | selection |
SelectionRequest | selection |
SelectionNotify | selection |
ClientMessage | type |
MappingNotify | request |
If the event type is
KeyPress
or
KeyRelease
,
the detail field
specifies a KeySym name in standard format which is matched against
the event as described above, for example, <Key>A.
For the
PropertyNotify
,
SelectionClear
,
SelectionRequest
,
SelectionNotify
,
and
ClientMessage
events the detail field is specified
as an atom name; for example, <Message>WM_PROTOCOLS. For the
MotionNotify
,
EnterNotify
,
LeaveNotify
,
FocusIn
,
FocusOut
,
and
MappingNotify
events, either the symbolic constants as defined by
X Window
System Protocol, Section 11,
or the numeric values may be specified.
If no detail field is specified, then any value in the event detail is accepted as a match.
A KeySym can be specified as any of the standard KeySym names,
a hexadecimal number prefixed with “0x” or “0X”,
an octal number prefixed with “0”, or a decimal number.
A KeySym expressed as a single digit is interpreted as the
corresponding Latin 1 KeySym, for example, “0” is the KeySym XK_0.
Other single character KeySyms are treated as literal constants from Latin 1,
for example, “!” is treated as 0x21.
Standard KeySym names are as defined in
<X11/keysymdef.h>
with the “XK_” prefix removed.
Canonical Representation
Every translation table has a unique, canonical text representation. This
representation is passed to a widget's
display_accelerator
procedure to describe the accelerators installed on that widget.
The canonical representation of a translation table is (see also
“Syntax”)
translationTable | = { production } |
production | = lhs “:” rhs “\\n” |
lhs | =event { “,” event } |
event | =[modifier_list] “<”event_type“>” [ “(” count[“+”] “)” ] {detail} |
modifier_list | = [“!”] [“:”] {modifier} |
modifier | = [“~”] modifier_name |
count | =(“1” | “2” | “3” | “4” | ...) |
modifier_name | = “@” <keysym> | <see canonical modifier names below> |
event_type | = <see canonical event types below> |
detail | =<event-specific details> |
rhs | ={ name “(” [params] “)” } |
name | =namechar { namechar } |
namechar | = { “a”–“z” | “A”–“Z” | “0”–“9” | “_” | “-” } |
params | =string {“,” string} |
string | =quoted_string |
quoted_string | = “"” {<Latin 1 character> | escape_char} [“\\"” ] “"” |
escape_char | = “\\"” |
The canonical modifier names are
Ctrl Mod1 Button1 Shift Mod2 Button2 Lock Mod3 Button3 Mod4 Button4 Mod5 Button5
The canonical event types are
KeyPress | KeyRelease |
ButtonPress | ButtonRelease |
MotionNotify | EnterNotify |
LeaveNotify | FocusIn |
FocusOut | KeymapNotify |
Expose | GraphicsExpose, |
NoExpose | VisibilityNotify |
CreateNotify | DestroyNotify |
UnmapNotify | MapNotify |
MapRequest | ReparentNotify |
ConfigureNotify | ConfigureRequest |
GravityNotify | ResizeRequest |
CirculateNotify | CirculateRequest |
PropertyNotify | SelectionClear |
SelectionRequest | SelectionNotify |
ColormapNotify | ClientMessage |
Examples
Always put more specific events in the table before more general ones:
Shift <Btn1Down> : twas()\n\ <Btn1Down> : brillig()
For double-click on Button1 Up with Shift, use this specification:
Shift<Btn1Up>(2) : and()
This is equivalent to the following line with appropriate timers set between events:
Shift<Btn1Down>,Shift<Btn1Up>,Shift<Btn1Down>,Shift<Btn1Up> : and()
For double-click on Button1 Down with Shift, use this specification:
Shift<Btn1Down>(2) : the()
This is equivalent to the following line with appropriate timers set between events:
Shift<Btn1Down>,Shift<Btn1Up>,Shift<Btn1Down> : the()
Mouse motion is always discarded when it occurs between events in a table where no motion event is specified:
<Btn1Down>,<Btn1Up> : slithy()
This is taken, even if the pointer moves a bit between the down and up events. Similarly, any motion event specified in a translation matches any number of motion events. If the motion event causes an action procedure to be invoked, the procedure is invoked after each motion event.
If an event sequence consists of a sequence of events that is also a noninitial subsequence of another translation, it is not taken if it occurs in the context of the longer sequence. This occurs mostly in sequences like the following:
<Btn1Down>,<Btn1Up> : toves()\n\ <Btn1Up> : did()
The second translation is taken only if the button release is not preceded by a button press or if there are intervening events between the press and the release. Be particularly aware of this when using the repeat notation, above, with buttons and keys, because their expansion includes additional events; and when specifying motion events, because they are implicitly included between any two other events. In particular, pointer motion and double-click translations cannot coexist in the same translation table.
For single click on Button1 Up with Shift and Meta, use this specification:
Shift Meta <Btn1Down>, Shift Meta<Btn1Up>: gyre()
For multiple clicks greater or equal to a minimum number, a plus sign (+) may be appended to the final (rightmost) count in an event sequence. The actions will be invoked on the count-th click and each subsequent one arriving within the multi-click time interval. For example:
Shift <Btn1Up>(2+) : and()
To indicate
EnterNotify
with any modifiers, use this specification:
<Enter> : gimble()
To indicate
EnterNotify
with no modifiers, use this specification:
None <Enter> : in()
To indicate
EnterNotify
with Button1 Down and Button2 Up and “don't care” about
the other modifiers, use this specification:
Button1 ~Button2 <Enter> : the()
To indicate
EnterNotify
with Button1 down and Button2 down exclusively, use this specification:
! Button1 Button2 <Enter> : wabe()
You do not need to use a tilde (~) with an exclamation point (!).
In prototype versions of the X Toolkit
each widget class
implemented an Xt<Widget>Create (for example,
XtLabelCreate
)
function, in which most of the code was identical from widget to widget.
In the Intrinsics, a single generic
XtCreateWidget
performs most of the common work and then calls the initialize procedure
implemented for the particular widget class.
Each Composite class also implemented the procedures
Xt<Widget>Add and an Xt<Widget>Delete (for example,
XtButtonBoxAddButton
and
XtButtonBoxDeleteButton
).
In the Intrinsics, the Composite generic procedures
XtManageChildren
and
XtUnmanageChildren
perform error checking and screening out of certain children.
Then they call the change_managed procedure
implemented for the widget's Composite class.
If the widget's parent has not yet been realized,
the call to the change_managed procedure is delayed until realization time.
Old-style calls can be implemented in the X Toolkit by defining
one-line procedures or macros that invoke a generic routine. For example,
you could define the macro
XtLabelCreate
as:
#define XtLabelCreate(name, parent, args, num_args) \ ((LabelWidget) XtCreateWidget(name, labelWidgetClass, parent, args, num_args))
Pop-up shells in some of the prototypes automatically performed an
XtManageChild
on their child within their insert_child procedure.
Creators of pop-up children need to call
XtManageChild
themselves.
XtAppInitialize
and
XtVaAppInitialize
have been replaced by
XtOpenApplication
and
XtVaOpenApplication
.
To initialize the Intrinsics internals, create an application context,
open and initialize a display, and create the initial application shell
instance, an application may use
XtAppInitialize
or
XtVaAppInitialize
.
Widget XtAppInitialize(
XtAppContext *app_context_return, const char * application_class, XrmOptionDescList options, Cardinal num_options, int *argc_in_out, char ** argv_in_out, String * fallback_resources, ArgList args, Cardinal num_args)
;
app_context_return | Returns the application context, if non-NULL. |
application_class | Specifies the class name of the application. |
options | Specifies the command line options table. |
num_options | Specifies the number of entries in options. |
argc_in_out | Specifies a pointer to the number of command line arguments. |
argv_in_out | Specifies a pointer to the command line arguments. |
fallback_resources | Specifies resource values to be used if the application class resource file cannot be opened or read, or NULL. |
args | Specifies the argument list to override any other resource specifications for the created shell widget. |
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in the argument list. |
The
XtAppInitialize
function calls
XtToolkitInitialize
followed by
XtCreateApplicationContext
,
then calls
XtOpenDisplay
with display_string NULL and
application_name NULL, and finally calls
XtAppCreateShell
with application_name NULL, widget_class
applicationShellWidgetClass
,
and the specified args and num_args
and returns the created shell. The modified argc and argv returned by
XtDisplayInitialize
are returned in argc_in_out and argv_in_out. If
app_context_return is not NULL, the created application context is
also returned. If the display specified by the command line cannot be
opened, an error message is issued and
XtAppInitialize
terminates the application. If fallback_resources is non-NULL,
XtAppSetFallbackResources
is called with the value prior to calling
XtOpenDisplay
.
Widget XtVaAppInitialize(
XtAppContext *app_context_return, const char * application_class, XrmOptionDescList options, Cardinal num_options, int *argc_in_out, char ** argv_in_out, String * fallback_resources, ...)
;
app_context_return | Returns the application context, if non-NULL. |
application_class | Specifies the class name of the application. |
options | Specifies the command line options table. |
num_options | Specifies the number of entries in options. |
argc_in_out | Specifies a pointer to the number of command line arguments. |
argv_in_out | Specifies the command line arguments array. |
fallback_resources | Specifies resource values to be used if the application class resource file cannot be opened, or NULL. |
... | Specifies the variable argument list to override any other resource specifications for the created shell. |
The
XtVaAppInitialize
procedure is identical in function to
XtAppInitialize
with the args and num_args parameters replaced by a varargs list,
as described
in Section 2.5.1.
As a convenience to people converting from earlier versions of the toolkit
without application contexts, the following routines exist:
XtInitialize
,
XtMainLoop
,
XtNextEvent
,
XtProcessEvent
,
XtPeekEvent
,
XtPending
,
XtAddInput
,
XtAddTimeOut
,
XtAddWorkProc
,
XtCreateApplicationShell
,
XtAddActions
,
XtSetSelectionTimeout
,
and
XtGetSelectionTimeout
.
Widget XtInitialize(
const char * shell_name, const char * application_class, XrmOptionDescRec * options, Cardinal num_options, int * argc, char ** argv)
;
shell_name | This parameter is ignored; therefore, you can specify NULL. |
application_class | Specifies the class name of this application. |
options |
Specifies how to parse the command line for any application-specific resources.
The options argument is passed as a parameter to
|
num_options | Specifies the number of entries in the options list. |
argc | Specifies a pointer to the number of command line parameters. |
argv | Specifies the command line parameters. |
XtInitialize
calls
XtToolkitInitialize
to initialize the toolkit internals,
creates a default application context for use by the other convenience
routines, calls
XtOpenDisplay
with display_string NULL and application_name NULL, and
finally calls
XtAppCreateShell
with application_name NULL and
returns the created shell.
The semantics of calling
XtInitialize
more than once are undefined.
This routine has been replaced by
XtOpenApplication
.
XtMainLoop
first reads the next alternate input, timer, or X event by calling
XtNextEvent
.
Then it dispatches this to the appropriate registered procedure by calling
XtDispatchEvent
.
This routine has been replaced by
XtAppMainLoop
.
event_return | Returns the event information to the specified event structure. |
If no input is on the X input queue for the default application context,
XtNextEvent
flushes the X output buffer
and waits for an event while looking at the alternate input sources
and timeout values and calling any callback procedures triggered by them.
This routine has been replaced by
XtAppNextEvent
.
XtInitialize
must be called before using this routine.
mask | Specifies the type of input to process. |
XtProcessEvent
processes one X event, timeout, or alternate input source
(depending on the value of mask), blocking if necessary.
It has been replaced by
XtAppProcessEvent
.
XtInitialize
must be called before using this function.
event_return | Returns the event information to the specified event structure. |
If there is an event in the queue for the default application context,
XtPeekEvent
fills in the event and returns a nonzero value.
If no X input is on the queue,
XtPeekEvent
flushes the output buffer and blocks until input is available, possibly
calling some timeout callbacks in the process.
If the input is an event,
XtPeekEvent
fills in the event and returns a nonzero value.
Otherwise, the input is for an alternate input source, and
XtPeekEvent
returns zero.
This routine has been replaced by
XtAppPeekEvent
.
XtInitialize
must be called before using this routine.
XtPending
returns a nonzero value if there are
events pending from the X server or alternate input sources in the default
application context.
If there are no events pending,
it flushes the output buffer and returns a zero value.
It has been replaced by
XtAppPending
.
XtInitialize
must be called before using this routine.
XtInputId XtAddInput(
int source, XtPointer condition, XtInputCallbackProc proc, XtPointer client_data)
;
source | Specifies the source file descriptor on a POSIX-based system or other operating-system-dependent device specification. |
condition | Specifies the mask that indicates either a read, write, or exception condition or some operating-system-dependent condition. |
proc | Specifies the procedure called when input is available. |
client_data | Specifies the parameter to be passed to proc when input is available. |
The
XtAddInput
function registers in the default application context a new
source of events,
which is usually file input but can also be file output.
(The word file should be loosely interpreted to mean any sink
or source of data.)
XtAddInput
also specifies the conditions under which the source can generate events.
When input is pending on this source in the default application context,
the callback procedure is called.
This routine has been replaced by
XtAppAddInput
.
XtInitialize
must be called before using this routine.
interval | Specifies the time interval in milliseconds. |
proc | Specifies the procedure to be called when time expires. |
client_data | Specifies the parameter to be passed to proc when it is called. |
The
XtAddTimeOut
function creates a timeout in the default application context
and returns an identifier for it.
The timeout value is set to interval.
The callback procedure will be called after
the time interval elapses, after which the timeout is removed.
This routine has been replaced by
XtAppAddTimeOut
.
XtInitialize
must be called before using this routine.
proc | Procedure to call to do the work. |
client_data | Client data to pass to proc when it is called. |
This routine registers a work procedure in the default application context. It has
been replaced by
XtAppAddWorkProc
.
XtInitialize
must be called before using this routine.
Widget XtCreateApplicationShell(
const char * name, WidgetClass widget_class, ArgList args, Cardinal num_args)
;
name | This parameter is ignored; therefore, you can specify NULL. |
widget_class |
Specifies the widget class pointer for the created application shell widget.
This will usually be
|
args | Specifies the argument list to override any other resource specifications. |
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in args. |
The procedure
XtCreateApplicationShell
calls
XtAppCreateShell
with application_name NULL, the application class passed to
XtInitialize
,
and the default application context created by
XtInitialize
.
This routine has been replaced by
XtAppCreateShell
.
An old-format resource type converter procedure pointer is of type
(*XtConverter)
.
args |
Specifies a list of additional
|
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in args. |
from | Specifies the value to convert. |
to | Specifies the descriptor to use to return the converted value. |
Type converters should perform the following actions:
Check to see that the number of arguments passed is correct.
Attempt the type conversion.
If successful, return the size and pointer to the data in the to argument;
otherwise, call
XtWarningMsg
and return without modifying the to argument.
Most type converters just take the data described by the specified from argument and return data by writing into the specified to argument. A few need other information, which is available in the specified argument list. A type converter can invoke another type converter, which allows differing sources that may convert into a common intermediate result to make maximum use of the type converter cache.
Note that the address returned in to->addr cannot be that of a local variable of the converter because this is not valid after the converter returns. It should be a pointer to a static variable.
The procedure type
(*XtConverter)
has been replaced by
(*XtTypeConverter)
.
The
XtStringConversionWarning
function is a convenience routine for old-format resource converters
that convert from strings.
src | Specifies the string that could not be converted. |
dst_type | Specifies the name of the type to which the string could not be converted. |
The
XtStringConversionWarning
function issues a warning message with name “conversionError”,
type “string”, class “XtToolkitError”, and the default message string
“Cannot convert "src" to type dst_type”. This routine
has been superseded by
XtDisplayStringConversionWarning
.
To register an old-format converter, use
XtAddConverter
or
XtAppAddConverter
.
void XtAddConverter(
const char * from_type, const char * to_type, XtConverter converter, XtConvertArgList convert_args, Cardinal num_args)
;
from_type | Specifies the source type. |
to_type | Specifies the destination type. |
converter | Specifies the type converter procedure. |
convert_args | Specifies how to compute the additional arguments to the converter, or NULL. |
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in convert_args. |
XtAddConverter
is equivalent in function to
XtSetTypeConverter
with cache_type equal to
XtCacheAll
for old-format type converters. It has been superseded by
XtSetTypeConverter
.
void XtAppAddConverter(
XtAppContext app_context, const char * from_type, const char * to_type, XtConverter converter, XtConvertArgList convert_args, Cardinal num_args)
;
app_context | Specifies the application context. |
from_type | Specifies the source type. |
to_type | Specifies the destination type. |
converter | Specifies the type converter procedure. |
convert_args | Specifies how to compute the additional arguments to the converter, or NULL. |
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in convert_args. |
XtAppAddConverter
is equivalent in function to
XtAppSetTypeConverter
with cache_type equal to
XtCacheAll
for old-format type converters. It has been superseded by
XtAppSetTypeConverter
.
To invoke resource conversions, a client may use
XtConvert
or, for old-format converters only,
XtDirectConvert
.
void XtConvert(
Widget w, const char * from_type, XrmValuePtr from, const char * to_type, XrmValuePtr to_return)
;
w | Specifies the widget to use for additional arguments, if any are needed. |
from_type | Specifies the source type. |
from | Specifies the value to be converted. |
to_type | Specifies the destination type. |
to_return | Returns the converted value. |
void XtDirectConvert(
XtConverter converter, XrmValuePtr args, Cardinal num_args, XrmValuePtr from, XrmValuePtr to_return)
;
converter | Specifies the conversion procedure to be called. |
args | Specifies the argument list that contains the additional arguments needed to perform the conversion (often NULL). |
num_args | Specifies the number of entries in args. |
from | Specifies the value to be converted. |
to_return | Returns the converted value. |
The
XtConvert
function looks up the type converter registered to convert from_type
to to_type, computes any additional arguments needed, and then calls
XtDirectConvert
or
XtCallConverter
.
The
XtDirectConvert
function looks in the converter cache to see if this conversion procedure
has been called with the specified arguments.
If so, it returns a descriptor for information stored in the cache;
otherwise, it calls the converter and enters the result in the cache.
Before calling the specified converter,
XtDirectConvert
sets the return value size to zero and the return value address to NULL.
To determine if the conversion was successful,
the client should check to_return.addr for non-NULL.
The data returned by
XtConvert
must be copied immediately by the caller,
as it may point to static data in the type converter.
XtConvert
has been replaced by
XtConvertAndStore
,
and
XtDirectConvert
has been superseded by
XtCallConverter
.
To deallocate a shared GC when it is no longer needed, use
XtDestroyGC
.
w | Specifies any object on the display for which the shared GC was created. Must be of class Object or any subclass thereof. |
gc | Specifies the shared GC to be deallocated. |
References to sharable GCs are counted and a free request is generated to the
server when the last user of a given GC destroys it.
Note that some earlier versions of
XtDestroyGC
had only a gc argument.
Therefore, this function is not very portable,
and you are encouraged to use
XtReleaseGC
instead.
To declare an action table in the default application context
and register it with the translation manager, use
XtAddActions
.
actions | Specifies the action table to register. |
num_actions | Specifies the number of entries in actions. |
If more than one action is registered with the same name,
the most recently registered action is used.
If duplicate actions exist in an action table,
the first is used.
The Intrinsics register an action table for
XtMenuPopup
and
XtMenuPopdown
as part of X Toolkit initialization.
This routine has been replaced by
XtAppAddActions
.
XtInitialize
must be called before using this routine.
To set the Intrinsics selection timeout in the default application context, use
XtSetSelectionTimeout
.
timeout |
Specifies the selection timeout in milliseconds.
This routine has been replaced by
|
To get the current selection timeout value in the default application
context, use
XtGetSelectionTimeout
.
The selection timeout is the time within which the two communicating applications must respond to one another. If one of them does not respond within this interval, the Intrinsics abort the selection request.
This routine has been replaced by
XtAppGetSelectionTimeout
.
XtInitialize
must be called before using this routine.
To obtain the global error database (for example, to merge with
an application- or widget-specific database), use
XtGetErrorDatabase
.
The
XtGetErrorDatabase
function returns the address of the error database.
The Intrinsics do a lazy binding of the error database and do not merge in the
database file until the first call to
XtGetErrorDatabaseText
.
This routine has been replaced by
XtAppGetErrorDatabase
.
An error message handler can obtain the error database text for an
error or a warning by calling
XtGetErrorDatabaseText
.
void XtGetErrorDatabaseText(
const char * name, const char * type, const char * class, const char * default, char * buffer_return, int nbytes)
;
name | |
type | Specify the name and type that are concatenated to form the resource name of the error message. |
class | Specifies the resource class of the error message. |
default | Specifies the default message to use if an error database entry is not found. |
buffer_return | Specifies the buffer into which the error message is to be returned. |
nbytes | Specifies the size of the buffer in bytes. |
The
XtGetErrorDatabaseText
returns the appropriate message from the error database
associated with the default application context
or returns the specified default message if one is not found in the
error database.
To form the full resource name and class when querying the database,
the name and type are concatenated with a single “.”
between them and the class is concatenated with itself with a
single “.” if it does not already contain a “.”.
This routine has been superseded by
XtAppGetErrorDatabaseText
.
To register a procedure to be called on fatal error conditions, use
XtSetErrorMsgHandler
.
msg_handler | Specifies the new fatal error procedure, which should not return. |
The default error handler provided by the Intrinsics constructs a
string from the error resource database and calls
XtError
.
Fatal error message handlers should not return.
If one does,
subsequent Intrinsics behavior is undefined.
This routine has been superseded by
XtAppSetErrorMsgHandler
.
To call the high-level error handler, use
XtErrorMsg
.
void XtErrorMsg(
const char * name, const char * type, const char * class, const char * default, String *params, Cardinal *num_params)
;
name | Specifies the general kind of error. |
type | Specifies the detailed name of the error. |
class | Specifies the resource class. |
default | Specifies the default message to use if an error database entry is not found. |
params | Specifies a pointer to a list of values to be stored in the message. |
num_params | Specifies the number of entries in params. |
This routine has been superseded by
XtAppErrorMsg
.
To register a procedure to be called on nonfatal error conditions, use
XtSetWarningMsgHandler
.
msg_handler | Specifies the new nonfatal error procedure, which usually returns. |
The default warning handler provided by the Intrinsics constructs a string
from the error resource database and calls
XtWarning
.
This routine has been superseded by
XtAppSetWarningMsgHandler
.
To call the installed high-level warning handler, use
XtWarningMsg
.
void XtWarningMsg(
const char * name, const char * type, const char * class, const char * default, String *params, Cardinal *num_params)
;
name | Specifies the general kind of error. |
type | Specifies the detailed name of the error. |
class | Specifies the resource class. |
default | Specifies the default message to use if an error database entry is not found. |
params | Specifies a pointer to a list of values to be stored in the message. |
num_params | Specifies the number of entries in params. |
This routine has been superseded by
XtAppWarningMsg
.
To register a procedure to be called on fatal error conditions, use
XtSetErrorHandler
.
handler | Specifies the new fatal error procedure, which should not return. |
The default error handler provided by the Intrinsics is
_XtError
.
On POSIX-based systems,
it prints the message to standard error and terminates the application.
Fatal error message handlers should not return.
If one does,
subsequent X Toolkit behavior is undefined.
This routine has been superseded by
XtAppSetErrorHandler
.
To call the installed fatal error procedure, use
XtError
.
message | Specifies the message to be reported. |
Most programs should use
XtAppErrorMsg
,
not
XtError
,
to provide for customization and internationalization of error
messages. This routine has been superseded by
XtAppError
.
To register a procedure to be called on nonfatal error conditions, use
XtSetWarningHandler
.
handler | Specifies the new nonfatal error procedure, which usually returns. |
The default warning handler provided by the Intrinsics is
_XtWarning
.
On POSIX-based systems,
it prints the message to standard error and returns to the caller.
This routine has been superseded by
XtAppSetWarningHandler
.
To call the installed nonfatal error procedure, use
XtWarning
.
message | Specifies the nonfatal error message to be reported. |
Most programs should use
XtAppWarningMsg
,
not
XtWarning
,
to provide for customization and internationalization of warning messages.
This routine has been superseded by
XtAppWarning
.
All Intrinsics errors and warnings have class “XtToolkitError”. The following two tables summarize the common errors and warnings that can be generated by the Intrinsics. Additional implementation-dependent messages are permitted. Error Messages
Name | Type | Default Message |
---|---|---|
allocError | calloc | Cannot perform calloc |
allocError | malloc | Cannot perform malloc |
allocError | realloc | Cannot perform realloc |
internalError | xtMakeGeometryRequest | internal error; ShellClassExtension is NULL |
invalidArgCount | xtGetValues | Argument count > 0 on NULL argument list in XtGetValues |
invalidArgCount | xtSetValues | Argument count > 0 on NULL argument list in XtSetValues |
invalidClass | applicationShellInsertChild | ApplicationShell does not accept RectObj children; ignored |
invalidClass | constraintSetValue | Subclass of Constraint required in CallConstraintSetValues |
invalidClass | xtAppCreateShell | XtAppCreateShell requires non-NULL widget class |
invalidClass | xtCreatePopupShell | XtCreatePopupShell requires non-NULL widget class |
invalidClass | xtCreateWidget | XtCreateWidget requires non-NULL widget class |
invalidClass | xtPopdown | XtPopdown requires a subclass of shellWidgetClass |
invalidClass | xtPopup | XtPopup requires a subclass of shellWidgetClass |
invalidDimension | xtCreateWindow | Widget %s has zero width and/or height |
invalidDimension | shellRealize | Shell widget %s has zero width and/or height |
invalidDisplay | xtInitialize | Can't open display: %s |
invalidGetValues | xtGetValues | NULL ArgVal in XtGetValues |
invalidExtension | shellClassPartInitialize | widget class %s has invalid ShellClassExtension record |
invalidExtension | xtMakeGeometryRequest | widget class %s has invalid ShellClassExtension record |
invalidGeometryManager | xtMakeGeometryRequest | XtMakeGeometryRequest - parent has no geometry manager |
invalidParameter | xtAddInput | invalid condition passed to XtAddInput |
invalidParameter | xtAddInput | invalid condition passed to XtAppAddInput |
invalidParent | xtChangeManagedSet | Attempt to manage a child when parent is not Composite |
invalidParent | xtChangeManagedSet | Attempt to unmanage a child when parent is not Composite |
invalidParent | xtCreatePopupShell | XtCreatePopupShell requires non-NULL parent |
invalidParent | xtCreateWidget | XtCreateWidget requires non-NULL parent |
invalidParent | xtMakeGeometryRequest | non-shell has no parent in XtMakeGeometryRequest |
invalidParent | xtMakeGeometryRequest | XtMakeGeometryRequest - parent not composite |
invalidParent | xtManageChildren | Attempt to manage a child when parent is not Composite |
invalidParent | xtUnmanageChildren | Attempt to unmanage a child when parent is not Composite |
invalidProcedure | inheritanceProc | Unresolved inheritance operation |
invalidProcedure | realizeProc | No realize class procedure defined |
invalidWindow | eventHandler | Event with wrong window |
missingWidget | fetchDisplayArg | FetchDisplayArg called without a widget to reference |
nonWidget | xtCreateWidget | attempt to add non-widget child "%s" to parent "%s" which supports only widgets |
noPerDisplay | closeDisplay | Couldn't find per display information |
noPerDisplay | getPerDisplay | Couldn't find per display information |
noSelectionProperties | freeSelectionProperty | internal error: no selection property context for display |
noWidgetAncestor | windowedAncestor | Object "%s" does not have windowed ancestor |
nullDisplay | xtRegisterExtensionSelector | XtRegisterExtensionSelector requires a non-NULL display |
nullProc | insertChild | "%s" parent has NULL insert_child method |
r2versionMismatch | widget | Widget class %s must be re-compiled. |
R3versionMismatch | widget | Widget class %s must be re-compiled. |
R4orR5versionMismatch | widget | Widget class %s must be re-compiled. |
rangeError | xtRegisterExtensionSelector | Attempt to register multiple selectors for one extension event type |
sessionManagement | SmcOpenConnection | Tried to connect to session manager, %s |
subclassMismatch | xtCheckSubclass | Widget class %s found when subclass of %s expected: %s |
Warning Messages
Name | Type | Default Message |
---|---|---|
ambiguousParent | xtChangeManagedSet | Not all children have same parent |
ambiguousParent | xtManageChildren | Not all children have same parent in XtManageChildren |
ambiguousParent | xtUnmanageChildren | Not all children have same parent in XtUnmanageChildren |
badFormat | xtGetSelectionValue | Selection owner returned type INCR property with format != 32 |
badGeometry | shellRealize | Shell widget "%s" has an invalid geometry specification: "%s" |
badValue | cvtStringToPixel | Color name "%s" is not defined |
communicationError | select | Select failed; error code %s |
conversionError | string | Cannot convert string "%s" to type %s |
conversionError | stringToVisual | Cannot find Visual of class %s for display %s |
conversionFailed | xtConvertVarToArgList | Type conversion failed |
conversionFailed | xtGetTypedArg | Type conversion (%s to %s) failed for widget '%s' |
displayError | invalidDisplay | Can't find display structure |
grabError | xtAddGrab | XtAddGrab requires exclusive grab if spring_loaded is TRUE |
grabError | xtRemoveGrab | XtRemoveGrab asked to remove a widget not on the list |
initializationError | xtInitialize | Initializing Resource Lists twice |
insufficientSpace | xtGetTypedArg | Insufficient space for converted type '%s' in widget '%s' |
internalError | shell | Shell's window manager interaction is broken |
invalidAddressMode | computeArgs | Conversion arguments for widget '%s' contain an unsupported address mode |
invalidArgCount | getResources | argument count > 0 on NULL argument list |
invalidCallbackList | xtAddCallback | Cannot find callback list in XtAddCallback |
invalidCallbackList | xtAddCallback | Cannot find callback list in XtAddCallbacks |
invalidCallbackList | xtCallCallback | Cannot find callback list in XtCallCallbacks |
invalidCallbackList | xtRemoveAllCallback | Cannot find callback list in XtRemoveAllCallbacks |
invalidCallbackList | xtRemoveCallback | Cannot find callback list in XtRemoveCallbacks |
invalidChild | xtChangeManagedSet | Null child passed to UnmanageChildren |
invalidChild | xtManageChildren | null child passed to ManageChildren |
invalidChild | xtManageChildren | null child passed to XtManageChildren |
invalidChild | xtUnmanageChildren | Null child passed to XtUnmanageChildren |
invalidChild | xtUnmanageChildren | Null child found in argument list to unmanage |
invalidDepth | setValues | Can't change widget depth |
invalidExtension | xtCreateWidget | widget "%s" class %s has invalid CompositeClassExtension record |
invalidExtension | xtCreateWidget | widget class %s has invalid ConstraintClassExtension record |
invalidGrab | ungrabKeyOrButton | Attempt to remove nonexistent passive grab |
invalidGrabKind | xtPopup | grab kind argument has invalid value; XtGrabNone assumed |
invalidParameters | freeTranslations | Freeing XtTranslations requires no extra arguments |
invalidParameters | mergeTranslations | MergeTM to TranslationTable needs no extra arguments |
invalidParameters | xtMenuPopdown | XtMenuPopdown called with num_params != 0 or 1 |
invalidParameters | xtMenuPopupAction | MenuPopup wants exactly one argument |
invalidParent | xtCopyFromParent | CopyFromParent must have non-NULL parent |
invalidPopup | xtMenuPopup | Can't find popup widget "%s" in XtMenuPopup |
invalidPopup | xtMenuPopdown | Can't find popup in widget "%s" in XtMenuPopdown |
invalidPopup | unsupportedOperation | Pop-up menu creation is only supported on ButtonPress, KeyPress or EnterNotify events. |
invalidPopup | unsupportedOperation | Pop-up menu creation is only supported on Button, Key or EnterNotify events. |
invalidProcedure | deleteChild | null delete_child procedure for class %s in XtDestroy |
invalidProcedure | inputHandler | XtRemoveInput: Input handler not found |
invalidProcedure | set_values_almost | set_values_almost procedure shouldn't be NULL |
invalidResourceCount | getResources | resource count > 0 on NULL resource list |
invalidResourceName | computeArgs | Cannot find resource name %s as argument to conversion |
invalidShell | xtTranslateCoords | Widget has no shell ancestor |
invalidSizeOverride | xtDependencies | Representation size %d must match superclass's to override %s |
missingCharsetList | cvtStringToFontSet | Missing charsets in String to FontSet conversion |
noActionProc | xtCallActionProc | No action proc named "%s" is registered for widget "%s" |
noColormap | cvtStringToPixel | Cannot allocate colormap entry for "%s" |
noFont | cvtStringToFont | Unable to load any usable ISO8859-1 font |
noFont | cvtStringToFontSet | Unable to load any usable fontset |
noFont | cvtStringToFontStruct | Unable to load any usable ISO8859-1 font |
notInConvertSelection | xtGetSelectionRequest | XtGetSelectionRequest or XtGetSelectionParameters called for widget "%s" outside of ConvertSelection proc |
notRectObj | xtChangeManagedSet | child "%s", class %s is not a RectObj |
notRectObj | xtManageChildren | child "%s", class %s is not a RectObj |
nullWidget | xtConvertVarToArgList | XtVaTypedArg conversion needs non-NULL widget handle |
r3versionMismatch | widget | Shell Widget class %s binary compiled for R3 |
translationError | nullTable | Can't remove accelerators from NULL table |
translationError | nullTable | Tried to remove nonexistent accelerators |
translationError | ambiguousActions | Overriding earlier translation manager actions. |
translationError | newActions | New actions are:%s |
translationError | nullTable | table to (un)merge must not be null |
translationError | nullTable | Can't translate event through NULL table |
translationError | oldActions | Previous entry was: %s %s |
translationError | unboundActions | Actions not found: %s |
translationError | xtTranslateInitialize | Initializing Translation manager twice. |
translationParseError | missingComma | ... possibly due to missing ',' in event sequence. |
translationParseError | nonLatin1 | ... probably due to non-Latin1 character in quoted string |
translationParseError | parseError | translation table syntax error: %s |
translationParseError | parseString | Missing '"'. |
translationParseError | showLine | ... found while parsing '%s' |
typeConversionError | noConverter | No type converter registered for '%s' to '%s' conversion. |
unknownType | xtConvertVarToArgList | Unable to find type of resource for conversion |
unknownType | xtGetTypedArg | Unable to find type of resource for conversion |
versionMismatch | widget | Widget class %s version mismatch (recompilation needed):\\n widget %d vs. intrinsics %d. |
wrongParameters | cvtIntOrPixelToXColor | Pixel to color conversion needs screen and colormap arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtIntToBool | Integer to Bool conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtIntToBoolean | Integer to Boolean conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtIntToFloat | Integer to Float conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtIntToFont | Integer to Font conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtIntToPixel | Integer to Pixel conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtIntToPixmap | Integer to Pixmap conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtIntToShort | Integer to Short conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtIntToUnsignedChar | Integer to UnsignedChar conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToAcceleratorTable | String to AcceleratorTable conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToAtom | String to Atom conversion needs Display argument |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToBool | String to Bool conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToBoolean | String to Boolean conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToCommandArgArray | String to CommandArgArray conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToCursor | String to cursor conversion needs display argument |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToDimension | String to Dimension conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToDirectoryString | String to DirectoryString conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToDisplay | String to Display conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToFile | String to File conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToFloat | String to Float conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToFont | String to font conversion needs display argument |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToFontSet | String to FontSet conversion needs display and locale arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToFontStruct | String to font conversion needs display argument |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToGravity | String to Gravity conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToInitialState | String to InitialState conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToInt | String to Integer conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToPixel | String to pixel conversion needs screen and colormap arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToRestartStyle | String to RestartStyle conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToShort | String to Integer conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToTranslationTable | String to TranslationTable conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToUnsignedChar | String to Integer conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtStringToVisual | String to Visual conversion needs screen and depth arguments |
wrongParameters | cvtXColorToPixel | Color to Pixel conversion needs no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | freeCursor | Free Cursor requires display argument |
wrongParameters | freeDirectoryString | Free Directory String requires no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | freeFile | Free File requires no extra arguments |
wrongParameters | freeFont | Free Font needs display argument |
wrongParameters | freeFontSet | FreeFontSet needs display and locale arguments |
wrongParameters | freeFontStruct | Free FontStruct requires display argument |
wrongParameters | freePixel | Freeing a pixel requires screen and colormap arguments |
The StringDefs.h
header file contains definitions for the following resource name,
class, and representation type symbolic constants.
Resource names:
Symbol | Definition |
---|---|
XtNaccelerators | "accelerators" |
XtNallowHoriz | "allowHoriz" |
XtNallowVert | "allowVert" |
XtNancestorSensitive | "ancestorSensitive" |
XtNbackground | "background" |
XtNbackgroundPixmap | "backgroundPixmap" |
XtNbitmap | "bitmap" |
XtNborder | "borderColor" |
XtNborderColor | "borderColor" |
XtNborderPixmap | "borderPixmap" |
XtNborderWidth | "borderWidth" |
XtNcallback | "callback" |
XtNchangeHook | "changeHook" |
XtNchildren | "children" |
XtNcolormap | "colormap" |
XtNconfigureHook | "configureHook" |
XtNcreateHook | "createHook" |
XtNdepth | "depth" |
XtNdestroyCallback | "destroyCallback" |
XtNdestroyHook | "destroyHook" |
XtNeditType | "editType" |
XtNfile | "file" |
XtNfont | "font" |
XtNfontSet | "fontSet" |
XtNforceBars | "forceBars" |
XtNforeground | "foreground" |
XtNfunction | "function" |
XtNgeometryHook | "geometryHook" |
XtNheight | "height" |
XtNhighlight | "highlight" |
XtNhSpace | "hSpace" |
XtNindex | "index" |
XtNinitialResourcesPersistent | "initialResourcesPersistent" |
XtNinnerHeight | "innerHeight" |
XtNinnerWidth | "innerWidth" |
XtNinnerWindow | "innerWindow" |
XtNinsertPosition | "insertPosition" |
XtNinternalHeight | "internalHeight" |
XtNinternalWidth | "internalWidth" |
XtNjumpProc | "jumpProc" |
XtNjustify | "justify" |
XtNknobHeight | "knobHeight" |
XtNknobIndent | "knobIndent" |
XtNknobPixel | "knobPixel" |
XtNknobWidth | "knobWidth" |
XtNlabel | "label" |
XtNlength | "length" |
XtNlowerRight | "lowerRight" |
XtNmappedWhenManaged | "mappedWhenManaged" |
XtNmenuEntry | "menuEntry" |
XtNname | "name" |
XtNnotify | "notify" |
XtNnumChildren | "numChildren" |
XtNnumShells | "numShells" |
XtNorientation | "orientation" |
XtNparameter | "parameter" |
XtNpixmap | "pixmap" |
XtNpopupCallback | "popupCallback" |
XtNpopdownCallback | "popdownCallback" |
XtNresize | "resize" |
XtNreverseVideo | "reverseVideo" |
XtNscreen | "screen" |
XtNscrollProc | "scrollProc" |
XtNscrollDCursor | "scrollDCursor" |
XtNscrollHCursor | "scrollHCursor" |
XtNscrollLCursor | "scrollLCursor" |
XtNscrollRCursor | "scrollRCursor" |
XtNscrollUCursor | "scrollUCursor" |
XtNscrollVCursor | "scrollVCursor" |
XtNselection | "selection" |
XtNselectionArray | "selectionArray" |
XtNsensitive | "sensitive" |
XtNshells | "shells" |
XtNshown | "shown" |
XtNspace | "space" |
XtNstring | "string" |
XtNtextOptions | "textOptions" |
XtNtextSink | "textSink" |
XtNtextSource | "textSource" |
XtNthickness | "thickness" |
XtNthumb | "thumb" |
XtNthumbProc | "thumbProc" |
XtNtop | "top" |
XtNtranslations | "translations" |
XtNunrealizeCallback | "unrealizeCallback" |
XtNupdate | "update" |
XtNuseBottom | "useBottom" |
XtNuseRight | "useRight" |
XtNvalue | "value" |
XtNvSpace | "vSpace" |
XtNwidth | "width" |
XtNwindow | "window" |
XtNx | "x" |
XtNy | "y" |
Resource classes:
Symbol | Definition |
---|---|
XtCAccelerators | "Accelerators" |
XtCBackground | "Background" |
XtCBitmap | "Bitmap" |
XtCBoolean | "Boolean" |
XtCBorderColor | "BorderColor" |
XtCBorderWidth | "BorderWidth" |
XtCCallback | "Callback" |
XtCColormap | "Colormap" |
XtCColor | "Color" |
XtCCursor | "Cursor" |
XtCDepth | "Depth" |
XtCEditType | "EditType" |
XtCEventBindings | "EventBindings" |
XtCFile | "File" |
XtCFont | "Font" |
XtCFontSet | "FontSet" |
XtCForeground | "Foreground" |
XtCFraction | "Fraction" |
XtCFunction | "Function" |
XtCHeight | "Height" |
XtCHSpace | "HSpace" |
XtCIndex | "Index" |
XtCInitialResourcesPersistent | "InitialResourcesPersistent" |
XtCInsertPosition | "InsertPosition" |
XtCInterval | "Interval" |
XtCJustify | "Justify" |
XtCKnobIndent | "KnobIndent" |
XtCKnobPixel | "KnobPixel" |
XtCLabel | "Label" |
XtCLength | "Length" |
XtCMappedWhenManaged | "MappedWhenManaged" |
XtCMargin | "Margin" |
XtCMenuEntry | "MenuEntry" |
XtCNotify | "Notify" |
XtCOrientation | "Orientation" |
XtCParameter | "Parameter" |
XtCPixmap | "Pixmap" |
XtCPosition | "Position" |
XtCReadOnly | "ReadOnly" |
XtCResize | "Resize" |
XtCReverseVideo | "ReverseVideo" |
XtCScreen | "Screen" |
XtCScrollProc | "ScrollProc" |
XtCScrollDCursor | "ScrollDCursor" |
XtCScrollHCursor | "ScrollHCursor" |
XtCScrollLCursor | "ScrollLCursor" |
XtCScrollRCursor | "ScrollRCursor" |
XtCScrollUCursor | "ScrollUCursor" |
XtCScrollVCursor | "ScrollVCursor" |
XtCSelection | "Selection" |
XtCSelectionArray | "SelectionArray" |
XtCSensitive | "Sensitive" |
XtCSpace | "Space" |
XtCString | "String" |
XtCTextOptions | "TextOptions" |
XtCTextPosition | "TextPosition" |
XtCTextSink | "TextSink" |
XtCTextSource | "TextSource" |
XtCThickness | "Thickness" |
XtCThumb | "Thumb" |
XtCTranslations | "Translations" |
XtCValue | "Value" |
XtCVSpace | "VSpace" |
XtCWidth | "Width" |
XtCWindow | "Window" |
XtCX | "X" |
XtCY | "Y" |
Resource representation types:
Symbol | Definition |
---|---|
XtRAcceleratorTable | "AcceleratorTable" |
XtRAtom | "Atom" |
XtRBitmap | "Bitmap" |
XtRBool | "Bool" |
XtRBoolean | "Boolean" |
XtRCallback | "Callback" |
XtRCallProc | "CallProc" |
XtRCardinal | "Cardinal" |
XtRColor | "Color" |
XtRColormap | "Colormap" |
XtRCommandArgArray | "CommandArgArray" |
XtRCursor | "Cursor" |
XtRDimension | "Dimension" |
XtRDirectoryString | "DirectoryString" |
XtRDisplay | "Display" |
XtREditMode | "EditMode" |
XtREnum | "Enum" |
XtREnvironmentArray | "EnvironmentArray" |
XtRFile | "File" |
XtRFloat | "Float" |
XtRFont | "Font" |
XtRFontSet | "FontSet" |
XtRFontStruct | "FontStruct" |
XtRFunction | "Function" |
XtRGeometry | "Geometry" |
XtRGravity | "Gravity" |
XtRImmediate | "Immediate" |
XtRInitialState | "InitialState" |
XtRInt | "Int" |
XtRJustify | "Justify" |
XtRLongBoolean | XtRBool |
XtRObject | "Object" |
XtROrientation | "Orientation" |
XtRPixel | "Pixel" |
XtRPixmap | "Pixmap" |
XtRPointer | "Pointer" |
XtRPosition | "Position" |
XtRRestartStyle | "RestartStyle" |
XtRScreen | "Screen" |
XtRShort | "Short" |
XtRSmcConn | "SmcConn" |
XtRString | "String" |
XtRStringArray | "StringArray" |
XtRStringTable | "StringTable" |
XtRUnsignedChar | "UnsignedChar" |
XtRTranslationTable | "TranslationTable" |
XtRVisual | "Visual" |
XtRWidget | "Widget" |
XtRWidgetClass | "WidgetClass" |
XtRWidgetList | "WidgetList" |
XtRWindow | "Window" |
Boolean enumeration constants:
Symbol | Definition |
---|---|
XtEoff | "off" |
XtEfalse | "false" |
XtEno | "no" |
XtEon | "on" |
XtEtrue | "true" |
XtEyes | "yes" |
Orientation enumeration constants:
Symbol | Definition |
---|---|
XtEvertical | "vertical" |
XtEhorizontal | "horizontal" |
Text edit enumeration constants:
Symbol | Definition |
---|---|
XtEtextRead | "read" |
XtEtextAppend | "append" |
XtEtextEdit | "edit" |
Color enumeration constants:
Symbol | Definition |
---|---|
XtExtdefaultbackground | "xtdefaultbackground" |
XtExtdefaultforeground | "xtdefaultforeground" |
Font constant:
Symbol | Definition |
---|---|
XtExtdefaultfont | "xtdefaultfont" |
Hooks for External Agents constants:
Symbol | Definition |
---|---|
XtHcreate | "Xtcreate" |
XtHsetValues | "XtsetValues" |
XtHmanageChildren | "XtmanageChildren" |
XtHunmanageChildren | "XtunmanageChildren" |
XtHmanageSet | "XtmanageSet" |
XtHunmanageSet | "XtunmanageSet" |
XtHrealizeWidget | "XtrealizeWidget" |
XtHunrealizeWidget | "XtunrealizeWidget" |
XtHaddCallback | "XtaddCallback" |
XtHaddCallbacks | "XtaddCallbacks" |
XtHremoveCallback | "XtremoveCallback" |
XtHremoveCallbacks | "XtremoveCallbacks" |
XtHremoveAllCallbacks | "XtremoveAllCallbacks" |
XtHaugmentTranslations | "XtaugmentTranslations" |
XtHoverrideTranslations | "XtoverrideTranslations" |
XtHuninstallTranslations | "XtuninstallTranslations" |
XtHsetKeyboardFocus | "XtsetKeyboardFocus" |
XtHsetWMColormapWindows | "XtsetWMColormapWindows" |
XtHmapWidget | "XtmapWidget" |
XtHunmapWidget | "XtunmapWidget" |
XtHpopup | "Xtpopup" |
XtHpopupSpringLoaded | "XtpopupSpringLoaded" |
XtHpopdown | "Xtpopdown" |
XtHconfigure | "Xtconfigure" |
XtHpreGeometry | "XtpreGeometry" |
XtHpostGeometry | "XtpostGeometry" |
XtHdestroy | "Xtdestroy" |
The
Shell.h
header file contains definitions for the following resource name,
class, and representation type symbolic constants.
Resource names:
Symbol | Definition |
---|---|
XtNallowShellResize | "allowShellResize" |
XtNargc | "argc" |
XtNargv | "argv" |
XtNbaseHeight | "baseHeight" |
XtNbaseWidth | "baseWidth" |
XtNcancelCallback | "cancelCallback" |
XtNclientLeader | "clientLeader" |
XtNcloneCommand | "cloneCommand" |
XtNconnection | "connection" |
XtNcreatePopupChildProc | "createPopupChildProc" |
XtNcurrentDirectory | "currentDirectory" |
XtNdieCallback | "dieCallback" |
XtNdiscardCommand | "discardCommand" |
XtNenvironment | "environment" |
XtNerrorCallback | "errorCallback" |
XtNgeometry | "geometry" |
XtNheightInc | "heightInc" |
XtNiconMask | "iconMask" |
XtNiconName | "iconName" |
XtNiconNameEncoding | "iconNameEncoding" |
XtNiconPixmap | "iconPixmap" |
XtNiconWindow | "iconWindow" |
XtNiconX | "iconX" |
XtNiconY | "iconY" |
XtNiconic | "iconic" |
XtNinitialState | "initialState" |
XtNinput | "input" |
XtNinteractCallback | "interactCallback" |
XtNjoinSession | "joinSession" |
XtNmaxAspectX | "maxAspectX" |
XtNmaxAspectY | "maxAspectY" |
XtNmaxHeight | "maxHeight" |
XtNmaxWidth | "maxWidth" |
XtNminAspectX | "minAspectX" |
XtNminAspectY | "minAspectY" |
XtNminHeight | "minHeight" |
XtNminWidth | "minWidth" |
XtNoverrideRedirect | "overrideRedirect" |
XtNprogramPath | "programPath" |
XtNresignCommand | "resignCommand" |
XtNrestartCommand | "restartCommand" |
XtNrestartStyle | "restartStyle" |
XtNsaveCallback | "saveCallback" |
XtNsaveCompleteCallback | "saveCompleteCallback" |
XtNsaveUnder | "saveUnder" |
XtNsessionID | "sessionID" |
XtNshutdownCommand | "shutdownCommand" |
XtNtitle | "title" |
XtNtitleEncoding | "titleEncoding" |
XtNtransient | "transient" |
XtNtransientFor | "transientFor" |
XtNurgency | "urgency" |
XtNvisual | "visual" |
XtNwaitForWm | "waitforwm" |
XtNwaitforwm | "waitforwm" |
XtNwidthInc | "widthInc" |
XtNwindowGroup | "windowGroup" |
XtNwindowRole | "windowRole" |
XtNwinGravity | "winGravity" |
XtNwmTimeout | "wmTimeout" |
Resource classes:
Symbol | Definition |
---|---|
XtCAllowShellResize | "allowShellResize" |
XtCArgc | "Argc" |
XtCArgv | "Argv" |
XtCBaseHeight | "BaseHeight" |
XtCBaseWidth | "BaseWidth" |
XtCClientLeader | "ClientLeader" |
XtCCloneCommand | "CloneCommand" |
XtCConnection | "Connection" |
XtCCreatePopupChildProc | "CreatePopupChildProc" |
XtCCurrentDirectory | "CurrentDirectory" |
XtCDiscardCommand | "DiscardCommand" |
XtCEnvironment | "Environment" |
XtCGeometry | "Geometry" |
XtCHeightInc | "HeightInc" |
XtCIconMask | "IconMask" |
XtCIconName | "IconName" |
XtCIconNameEncoding | "IconNameEncoding" |
XtCIconPixmap | "IconPixmap" |
XtCIconWindow | "IconWindow" |
XtCIconX | "IconX" |
XtCIconY | "IconY" |
XtCIconic | "Iconic" |
XtCInitialState | "InitialState" |
XtCInput | "Input" |
XtCJoinSession | "JoinSession" |
XtCMaxAspectX | "MaxAspectX" |
XtCMaxAspectY | "MaxAspectY" |
XtCMaxHeight | "MaxHeight" |
XtCMaxWidth | "MaxWidth" |
XtCMinAspectX | "MinAspectX" |
XtCMinAspectY | "MinAspectY" |
XtCMinHeight | "MinHeight" |
XtCMinWidth | "MinWidth" |
XtCOverrideRedirect | "OverrideRedirect" |
XtCProgramPath | "ProgramPath" |
XtCResignCommand | "ResignCommand" |
XtCRestartCommand | "RestartCommand" |
XtCRestartStyle | "RestartStyle" |
XtCSaveUnder | "SaveUnder" |
XtCSessionID | "SessionID" |
XtCShutdownCommand | "ShutdownCommand" |
XtCTitle | "Title" |
XtCTitleEncoding | "TitleEncoding" |
XtCTransient | "Transient" |
XtCTransientFor | "TransientFor" |
XtCUrgency | "Urgency" |
XtCVisual | "Visual" |
XtCWaitForWm | "Waitforwm" |
XtCWaitforwm | "Waitforwm" |
XtCWidthInc | "WidthInc" |
XtCWindowGroup | "WindowGroup" |
XtCWindowRole | "WindowRole" |
XtCWinGravity | "WinGravity" |
XtCWmTimeout | "WmTimeout" |
Resource representation types:
Symbol | Definition |
---|---|
XtRAtom | "Atom" |
Setting and changing resources in X applications can be difficult for
both the application programmer and the end user. Resource
Configuration Management (RCM) addresses this problem by changing
the X Intrinsics
to immediately modify a resource for a
specified widget and each child widget in the hierarchy.
In this context, immediate means: no sourcing of a resource
file is required; the application does not need to be restarted for the
new resource values to take effect; and the change
occurs immediately.
The main difference between RCM
and the Editres
protocol is that the RCM
customizing hooks reside in the Intrinsics
and thus are linked with
other toolkits such as Motif and the Athena widgets. However, the
EditRes
protocol requires the application to link with the
EditRes
routines in the Xmu library and Xmu is not used by all applications that
use Motif. Also, the EditRes
protocol uses ClientMessage,
whereas the
RCM
Intrinsics
hooks use PropertyNotify
events.
X Properties and the PropertyNotify
events are used
to implement RCM
and
allow on-the-fly resource customization. When the X Toolkit is
initialized, two atoms are interned with the strings
Custom Init and
Custom Data. Both
_XtCreatePopupShell
and
_XtAppCreateShell
register a PropertyNotify
event handler to handle these properties.
A customization tool uses the Custom Init property to ping an application to get the application's toplevel window. When the application's property notify event handler is invoked, the handler deletes the property. No data is transferred in this property.
A customization tool uses the Custom Data property to tell an
application that it should change a resource's value. The data in
the property contains the length of the resource name (the number
of bytes in the resource name), the resource name and the new
value for the resource. This property's type is XA_STRING
and
the format of the string is:
The length of the resource name (the number of bytes in the resource name)
One space character
The resource name
One space character
The resource value
When setting the application's resource, the event handler calls
functions to walk the application's widget tree, determining which
widgets are affected by the resource string, and then applying the value
with
XtSetValues
.
As the widget tree is recursively descended, at
each level in the widget tree a resource part is tested for a match.
When the entire resource string has been matched, the value is applied
to the widget or widgets.
Before a value is set on a widget, it is first determined if the last part of the resource is a valid resource for that widget. It must also add the resource to the application's resource database and then query it using specific resource strings that is builds from the widget information.